COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Pictorial index
Search by illustration
1
For safety
and security
Make sure to read through them
2
Instrument
cluster
How to read the gauges and meters, the variety of
warning lights and indicators, etc.
3
Operation of
each
component
Opening and closing the doors and windows,
adjustment before driving, etc.
4
Driving
Operations and advice which are necessary for
driving
5
Audio system
Operating the audio system
6
Interior features
Usage of the interior features, etc.
7
Maintenance
and care
Caring for your vehicle and maintenance
procedures
8
When trouble
arises
What to do in case of malfunction or emergency
9
Vehicle
specifications
Vehicle specifications, customizable features, etc.
10
For owners
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners, and seat
belt and SRS airbag instructions for Canadian
owners
Index
Search by symptom
Search alphabetically
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
For your information....................... 8
Reading this manual.................... 12
How to search.............................. 13
Pictorial index .............................. 14
1-1. For safe use
Before driving...................... 24
For safe driving ................... 26
Seat belts ............................ 28
SRS airbags........................ 34
Front passenger occupant
classification system ......... 47
Safety information for
children ............................. 53
Child restraint systems........ 54
Installing child restraints...... 58
Exhaust gas
precautions ....................... 66
1-2. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer
system............................... 67
Alarm................................... 69
2. Instrument cluster
Warning lights and
indicators ...........................72
Gauges and meters
(vehicles with a
monochrome display) ........77
Gauges and meters
(vehicles with a
color display) .....................86
Fuel consumption
information.........................96
Eco Driving Indicator ...........99
1
For safety and security
2
Instrument cluster
3
1
9
8
6
5
4
3
2
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
10
7
3-1. Key information
Keys .................................. 102
3-2. Opening, closing and
locking the doors
Doors................................. 108
Trunk................................. 117
Smart key system.............. 122
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Front seats ........................ 130
Rear seats......................... 132
Head restraints.................. 134
3-4. Adjusting the steering
wheel and mirrors
Steering wheel .................. 137
Inside rear view mirror....... 139
Outside rear view
mirrors............................. 141
3-5. Opening and closing
the windows
Power windows ................. 143
Moon roof.......................... 147
4-1. Before driving
Driving the vehicle .............152
Cargo and luggage............163
Vehicle load limits..............166
Trailer towing.....................167
Dinghy towing (vehicles
with a continuously
variable transmission) .....168
Dinghy towing
(vehicles with a manual
transmission) ...................169
4-2. Driving procedures
Engine (ignition) switch
(vehicles without a
smart key system) ...........171
Engine (ignition) switch
(vehicles with a
smart key system) ...........174
Continuously variable
transmission (vehicles
without paddle shift
switches) .........................181
Continuously variable
transmission (vehicles
with paddle shift
switches) .........................184
Manual transmission..........189
Turn signal lever................191
Parking brake ....................192
4-3. Operating the lights
and wipers
Headlight switch ................193
Automatic High Beam........198
Windshield wipers
and washer......................202
3
Operation of each
component
4
Driving
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
4-4. Refueling
Opening the fuel
tank cap .......................... 204
4-5. Using the driving
support systems
Toyota Safety Sense P ..... 207
PCS
(Pre-Collision System) .... 214
LDA (Lane Departure
Alert with steering
control) ............................ 226
Dynamic radar cruise
control ............................. 235
Rear view monitor
system............................. 247
Driving assist systems....... 257
4-6. Driving tips
Winter driving tips.............. 263
5-1. Basic Operations
Audio system types........... 270
Steering wheel audio
switches .......................... 271
AUX port/USB port............ 272
Entune Audio..................... 273
Basic audio operations...... 276
5-2. Setup
Setup menu....................... 278
General settings................ 279
Audio settings.................... 281
Display settings................. 282
Voice settings.................... 283
5-3. Using Entune Audio
Selecting the audio
source..............................284
List screen operation .........285
Optimal use of
Entune Audio...................287
5-4. Using the radio
Radio operation .................288
5-5. Playing an audio CD and
MP3/WMA/AAC discs
CD player operation...........290
5-6. Using an external
device
Listening to an iPod...........296
Listening to a USB
memory device ................301
Using the AUX port............305
5-7. Connecting Bluetooth
®
Preparations to use
wireless
communication ................306
Registering a Bluetooth
®
audio player for the
first time...........................310
Registering a Bluetooth
®
phone for the
first time...........................311
Registering a Bluetooth
®
device ..............................312
Connecting a Bluetooth
®
device ..............................315
Displaying a Bluetooth
®
device details...................318
Detailed Bluetooth
®
system settings................319
5
Audio system
5
1
9
8
6
5
4
3
2
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
10
7
5-8. Bluetooth
®
Audio
Listening to Bluetooth
®
Audio............................... 320
5-9. Bluetooth
®
phone
Using a Bluetooth
®
Phone.............................. 322
Making a call ..................... 325
Receiving a call................. 328
Speaking on the phone ..... 329
Bluetooth
®
phone
message function............ 333
Using the steering wheel
switches .......................... 338
Bluetooth
®
phone
settings............................ 339
Contact/
Call History Settings........ 341
What to do if...
(Troubleshooting)............ 351
5-10. Bluetooth
®
Bluetooth
®
......................... 355
5-11. Using the voice
command system
Voice command
system............................. 359
6-1. Using the air
conditioning system
and defogger
Manual air conditioning
system .............................366
Automatic air conditioning
system .............................373
Heated steering wheel/
seat heaters.....................382
6-2. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list.................384
• Front interior light/
personal lights ...............385
• Rear interior light...........386
6-3. Using the storage
features
List of storage features......387
• Glove box ......................388
• Console box ..................388
• Bottle holders ................389
• Cup holders...................390
6-4. Other interior features
Other interior features........392
• Sun visors .....................392
• Vanity mirrors ................392
• Clock .............................392
• Outside temperature
display ...........................393
• Power outlet ..................394
• Assist grips....................395
Garage door opener ..........396
Compass ...........................403
6
Interior features
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
7-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior.......... 408
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior........... 411
7-2. Maintenance
Maintenance
requirements ................... 414
General maintenance........ 417
Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M)
programs......................... 421
7-3. Do-it-yourself
maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions ..................... 422
Hood.................................. 425
Positioning a floor jack ...... 427
Engine compartment......... 429
Tires .................................. 440
Tire inflation pressure........ 448
Wheels .............................. 451
Air conditioning filter.......... 453
Wireless remote control/
electronic key battery ...... 455
Checking and replacing
fuses ............................... 458
Light bulbs......................... 461
8-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers...........470
If your vehicle has to
be stopped in an
emergency.......................471
8-2. Steps to take in an
emergency
If your vehicle needs to
be towed..........................473
If you think something is
wrong...............................478
Fuel pump shut off
system .............................479
If a warning light turns on
or a warning buzzer
sounds.............................480
If a warning message or
indicator is displayed .......489
If you have a flat tire ..........509
If the engine will
not start ...........................521
If the electronic key does
not operate properly ........523
If the vehicle battery is
discharged.......................526
If your vehicle
overheats.........................531
If the vehicle becomes
stuck ................................534
7
Maintenance and care
8
When trouble arises
7
1
9
8
6
5
4
3
2
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
10
7
9-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.) .......... 538
Fuel information ................ 548
Tire information ................. 551
9-2. Customization
Customizable features ...... 564
9-3. Items to initialize
Items to initialize................ 573
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners ........................576
Seat belt instructions for
Canadian owners
(in French)................................577
SRS airbag instructions for
Canadian owners
(in French)................................579
What to do if...
(Troubleshooting).....................590
Alphabetical index......................595
9
Vehicle specifications
10
For owners
Index
For vehicles with an Entune Premium Audio or Entune Audio Plus,
refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER'S
MANUAL” for information regarding Entune Premium Audio or
Entune Audio Plus.
8
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment,
including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment
not installed on your vehicle.
All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing.
However, because of the Toyota policy of continual product improvement, we
reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.
Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ
from your vehicle in terms of color and equipment.
Approximately five hours after the engine is turned off, you may hear sound
coming from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel
evaporation leakage check and, it does not indicate a malfunction.
A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Toyota vehi-
cles are currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does
not warrant these products and is not responsible for their performance,
repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse
effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Toyota products. Modi-
fication with non-genuine Toyota products could affect its performance, safety
or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition,
damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be
covered under warranty.
For your information
Main Owner’s Manual
Noise from under vehicle after turning off the engine
Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Toyota
9
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
The installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect
electronic systems such as:
● Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system
● Toyota Safety Sense P
● Anti-lock brake system
● SRS airbag system
● Seat belt pretensioner system
Be sure to check with your Toyota dealer for precautionary measures or spe-
cial instructions regarding installation of a mobile two-way radio system.
Your Toyota is equipped with several sophisticated computers that will record
certain data, such as:
• Engine speed
• Accelerator status
• Brake status
• Vehicle speed
• Shift position (vehicles with a continuously variable transmission)
The recorded data varies according to the vehicle grade level and options
with which it is equipped. These computers do not record conversations or
sounds, and only record images outside of the vehicle in certain situations.
● Data Transmission
Your vehicle may transmit the data recorded in these computers to Toyota
without notification to you.
● Data usage
Toyota may use the data recorded in these computers to diagnose malfunc-
tions, conduct research and development, and improve quality.
Toyota will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except:
• With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if
the vehicle is leased
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a govern-
ment agency
• For use by Toyota in a lawsuit
• For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or
vehicle owner
● To learn more about the vehicle data collected, used and shared by
Toyota, please visit www.toyota.com/privacyvts/
.
Installation of a mobile two-way radio system
Vehicle data recordings
10
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main pur-
pose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to
record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fas-
tened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake
pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situ-
ation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving condi-
tions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine
the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access
to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer,
other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can
read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
● Disclosure of the EDR data
Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except
when:
• An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the lessee for a leased vehi-
cle) is obtained
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a govern-
ment agency
• For use by Toyota in a lawsuit
However, if necessary, Toyota may:
• Use the data for research on vehicle safety performance
• Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing
information about the specific vehicle or vehicle owner
Event data recorder
11
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Toyota contain
explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt
pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be
sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner
removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Toyota dealer
before you scrap your vehicle.
Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These compo-
nents may include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote con-
trol batteries.
Scrapping of your Toyota
Perchlorate Material
WARNING
■ General precautions while driving
Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influ-
ence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehi-
cle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and
reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that could result in
death or serious injury.
Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other
drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.
Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that
distracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or
reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you,
your occupants or others.
■ General precaution regarding children’s safety
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to
have or use the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral.
There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with
the windows, the moon roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition,
heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal
to children.
12
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING:
Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause death or
serious injury to people.
NOTICE:
Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause damage to
or a malfunction in the vehicle or its equipment.
Indicates operating or working procedures. Follow the steps
in numerical order.
Indicates the action (push-
ing, turning, etc.) used to
operate switches and other
devices.
Indicates the outcome of an
operation (e.g. a lid opens).
Indicates the component or
position being explained.
Means “Do not”, “Do not do
this”, or “Do not let this hap-
pen”.
Reading this manual
1
2
3
14
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Pictorial index
Pictorial index
■
Exterior
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 108
Locking/unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 108
Opening/closing the door glasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 143
Locking/unlocking by using the mechanical key
* . . . . . . . . . . P. 523
Warning lights/warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 480, 489
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 117
Opening from inside. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 117
Opening from outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 117
Warning lights/warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 480, 489
Outside rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 141
Adjusting the mirror angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 141
Folding the mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 141
Defogging the mirrors* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 368, 376
1
2
3
15
Pictorial index
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 202
Precautions against winter season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 263
To prevent freezing (windshield wiper de-icer)
* . . . . . . . . . . . P. 376
Fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 204
Refueling method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 204
Fuel type/fuel tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 540
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 440
Tire size/inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 546
Winter tires/tire chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 263
Checking/rotation/tire pressure warning system
* . . . . . . . . P. 440
Coping with flat tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 509
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 425
Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 425
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 540
Coping with overheat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 531
Headlights/daytime running lights
*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 193
Front turn signal/parking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 193
Daytime running lights
* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 193
Front side marker lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 193
Turn signal lights
* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 191
Stop/tail lights/rear side marker lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 193
Back-up lights
Shifting the shift lever to R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 181, 184, 189
License plate lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 193
4
5
6
7
Light bulbs of the exterior lights for driving
(Replacing method: P. 461, Watts: P. 547)
*: If equipped
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Pictorial index
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■Instrument panel
Engine switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 171, 174
Starting the engine/changing the modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 171, 174
Emergency stop of the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 471
When the engine will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 521
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 489
Shift lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 181, 184, 189
Changing the shift position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 181, 184, 189
Precautions against towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 473
When the shift lever does not move
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 183, 188
Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 77, 86
Reading the meters/adjusting the meter light . . . . . . . . . . . P. 77, 86
Warning lights/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 72
When the warning lights come on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 480
1
2
3
17
Pictorial index
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Multi-information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 77, 86
When the warning messages are displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 489
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 192
Applying/releasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 192
Precautions against winter season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 264
Warning buzzer/message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 489
Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 191
Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 193
Headlights/front parking lights/tail lights/
daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 193
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 202
Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 202
Adding washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 439
Warning messages
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 497
Emergency flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 470
Hood lock release lever. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 425
Tilt and telescopic steering control lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 137
Air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 366, 373
Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 366, 373
Rear window defogger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 368, 376
Entune Audio
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 273
Entune Audio Plus
*
1, 2
Entune Premium Audio
*
1, 2
*
1
: If equipped
*
2
: For vehicles with an Entune Premium Audio or Entune Audio Plus, refer to
“NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL”.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
18
Pictorial index
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■Switches
Outside rear view mirror switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 141
Instrument panel light control dial
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 79, 88
Heated steering wheel switch
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 383
Windshield wiper de-icer switch
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 376
Window lock switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 143
Door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 111
Power window switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 143
Tire pressure warning reset switch*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 442
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
19
Pictorial index
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Audio remote control switches
*
2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 271
Paddle shift switches
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 184
Telephone switches
*
2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 338
Talk switch
*
2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 359
“DISP” switch
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 81
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 235
LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control)
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 229
Dynamic radar cruise control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 235
Meter control switches
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 91
*
1
: If equipped
*
2
: For vehicles with an Entune Premium Audio or Entune Audio Plus, refer to
“NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL”.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
20
Pictorial index
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
VSC OFF switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 258
Sport mode switch
*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 185
“ECO MODE” switch
* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 182
Seat heater switches
* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 383
Type A Type B
1
2
3
4
21
Pictorial index
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■Interior
SRS airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 34
Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 24
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 130
Head restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 134
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 28
Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 388
Inside lock buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 111
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 390
Rear seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 132
*: If equipped
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
22
Pictorial index
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Moon roof switches
*
3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 147
Interior light/personal lights
*
4
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 385, 386
Microphone
*
5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 323
Assist grips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 395
Vanity mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 392
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 392
Auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror
*
3
/
compass
*
3
/garage door opener switches*
3
. . . P. 139, 396, 403
Inside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 139
*
1
: Vehicles without a moon roof
*
2
: Vehicles with a moon roof
*
3
: If equipped
*
4
: The illustration shows the front, but they are also equipped in the rear.
*
5
: For vehicles with an Entune Premium Audio or Entune Audio Plus, refer to
“NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL”.
*
1
*
3
*
2
*
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
23
For safety and security
1
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
1-1. For safe use
Before driving...................... 24
For safe driving ................... 26
Seat belts ............................ 28
SRS airbags........................ 34
Front passenger occupant
classification system ......... 47
Safety information for
children ............................. 53
Child restraint systems........ 54
Installing child restraints...... 58
Exhaust gas precautions..... 66
1-2. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer
system .............................. 67
Alarm................................... 69
24
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
1-1. For safe use
Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same
model and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place
onto the carpet.
Insert the retaining hooks (clips)
into the floor mat eyelets.
Turn the upper knob of each
retaining hook (clip) to secure
the floor mats in place.
*: Always align the marks.
The shape of the retaining hooks (clips) may differ from that shown in the
illustration.
Before driving
Floor mat
1
*
2
25
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause the driver’s floor mat to slip, possibly interfering
with the pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may
become difficult to stop the vehicle. This could lead to an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
■ When installing the driver’s floor mat
● Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year
vehicles, even if they are Toyota Genuine floor mats.
● Only use floor mats designed for the driver’s seat.
● Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) pro-
vided.
● Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other.
● Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down.
■ Before driving
● Check that the floor mat is securely
fixed in the correct place with all the
provided retaining hooks (clips). Be
especially careful to perform this check
after cleaning the floor.
● With the engine stopped and the shift
lever in P (continuously variable trans-
mission) or N (manual transmission),
fully depress each pedal to the floor to
make sure it does not interfere with the
floor mat.
26
1-1. For safe use
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Adjust the angle of the seat-
back so that you are sitting
straight up and so that you do
not have to lean forward to
steer. (P. 13 0 )
Adjust the seat so that you can
depress the pedals fully and so
that your arms bend slightly at
the elbow when gripping the
steering wheel. (P. 130)
Lock the head restraint in place with the center of the head restraint
closest to the top of your ears. (P. 13 4 )
Wear the seat belt correctly. (P. 2 8)
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driv-
ing the vehicle. (P. 2 8 )
Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child
becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
(P. 54)
For safe driving
For safe driving, adjust the seat and mirror to an appropriate
position before driving.
Correct driving posture
1
2
Correct use of the seat belts
3
4
27
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Make sure that you can see backward clearly by adjusting the inside
and outside rear view mirrors properly. (P. 139, 141)
Adjusting the mirrors
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat while driving.
Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
● Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.
A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce
the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint.
● Do not place anything under the front seats.
Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat
tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an acci-
dent and the adjustment mechanism may also be damaged.
● Always observe the legal speed limit when driving on public roads.
● When driving over long distances, take regular breaks before you start to
feel tired.
Also, if you feel tired or sleepy while driving, do not force yourself to con-
tinue driving and take a break immediately.
28
1-1. For safe use
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
● Extend the shoulder belt so that
it comes fully over the shoulder,
but does not come into contact
with the neck or slide off the
shoulder.
● Position the lap belt as low as
possible over the hips.
● Adjust the position of the seat-
back. Sit up straight and well
back in the seat.
● Do not twist the seat belt.
To fasten the seat belt, push the
plate into the buckle until a click
sound is heard.
To release the seat belt, press
the release button.
Seat belts
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before
driving the vehicle.
Correct use of the seat belts
Fastening and releasing the seat belt
Release button
1
2
29
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Push the seat belt shoulder
anchor down while pressing the
release button.
Push the seat belt shoulder
anchor up.
Move the height adjuster up and
down as needed until you hear a
click.
The pretensioners help the seat
belts to quickly restrain the occu-
pants by retracting the seat belts
when the vehicle is subjected to
certain types of severe frontal or
side collision or a vehicle rollover.
The pretensioners do not activate
in the event of a minor frontal
impact, a minor side impact or a
rear impact.
Adjusting the seat belt shoulder anchor height (front seats)
1
2
Seat belt pretensioners (front seats)
30
1-1. For safe use
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Emergency locking retractor (ELR)
The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also
lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to
extend so that you can move around fully.
■ Automatic locking retractor (ALR)
When a passenger's shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted
even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This
feature is used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt
again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more. (P. 58)
■ Child seat belt usage
The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult
size.
● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child
becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. (P. 54)
● When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat
belt, follow the instructions regarding seat belt usage. (P. 28)
■ Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated (front seats)
If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for
the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions.
■ Seat belt extender
If your seat belts cannot be fastened
securely because they are not long
enough, a personalized seat belt
extender is available from your Toyota
dealer free of charge.
31
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of
sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
■ Wearing a seat belt
● Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.
● Always wear a seat belt properly.
● Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt
for more than one person at once, including children.
● Toyota recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always
use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.
● To achieve a proper seating position, do not recline the seat more than
necessary. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting
up straight and well back in the seats.
● Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.
● Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.
■ Pregnant women
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat
belt in the proper way. (P. 28)
Women who are pregnant should posi-
tion the lap belt as low as possible over
the hips in the same manner as other
occupants, extending the shoulder belt
completely over the shoulder and avoid-
ing belt contact with the rounding of the
abdominal area.
If the seat belt is not worn properly, not
only the pregnant woman, but also the
fetus could suffer death or serious injury
as a result of sudden braking or a colli-
sion.
32
1-1. For safe use
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
■ People suffering illness
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (P. 28)
■ When children are in the vehicle
Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes
twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries
that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used
to cut the belt.
■ Seat belt pretensioners (front seats)
● Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger's seat.
Doing so will disperse the passenger's weight, which prevents the sensor
from detecting the passenger's weight properly. As a result, the seat belt
pretensioner for the front passenger's seat may not activate in the event of
a collision.
● If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In
that case, the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at
your Toyota dealer.
■ Adjustable shoulder anchor (front seats)
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your
shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off
your shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an
accident and cause death or serious injuries in the event of a sudden stop,
sudden swerve or accident. (P. 29)
■ Seat belt damage and wear
● Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be
jammed in the door.
● Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose
parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat
belts cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury.
● Ensure that the belt and plate are locked and the belt is not twisted.
If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Toyota
dealer.
● Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been
involved in a serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage.
● Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the
seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Toyota dealer.
Inappropriate handling may lead to incorrect operation.
33
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
■ Using a seat belt extender
● Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without
the extender.
● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system
because the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increas-
ing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
● The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when
used by another person, or at a different seating position other than the
one originally intended.
NOTICE
■ When using a seat belt extender
When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the
extender, not on the seat belt.
This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.
34
1-1. For safe use
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
◆ SRS front airbags
SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag
Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front pas-
senger from impact with interior components
SRS driver’s knee airbag
Can help provide driver protection
SRS seat cushion airbag
Can help restrain the front passenger
SRS airbags
The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain
types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the
occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce
the risk of death or serious injury.
1
2
3
35
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
◆ SRS side and curtain shield airbags
SRS front side airbags
Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants
SRS curtain shield airbags
• Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer
seats
• Can help prevent the occupants from being thrown from the
vehicle in the event of vehicle rollover
4
5
36
1-1. For safe use
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
SRS airbag system components
Front impact sensors
Front passenger occupant
classification system (ECU
and sensors)
Seat cushion airbag
Side impact sensors (front
doors)
Front passenger airbag
Side airbags
Seat belt pretensioners and
force limiters
Side impact sensors (front)
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG
OFF” indicator lights
Curtain shield airbags
Side impact sensors (rear)
Driver airbag
Driver’s seat belt buckle
switch
Driver’s knee airbag
Airbag sensor assembly
Front passenger’s seat belt
buckle switch
SRS warning light
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
37
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based
on the US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag
sensor assembly (ECU) controls airbag deployment based on infor-
mation obtained from the sensors etc. shown in the system compo-
nents diagram above. This information includes crash severity and
occupant information. As the airbags deploy, a chemical reaction in
the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain
the motion of the occupants.
WARNING
■ SRS airbag precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the SRS airbags.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts
properly.
The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.
● The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause
death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag.
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) advises:
Since the risk zone for the driver’s airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm)
of inflation, placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag pro-
vides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from
the center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10
in. (250 mm) away now, you can change your driving position in several
ways:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the ped-
als comfortably.
• Slightly recline the back of the seat.
Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in. (250
mm) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by
reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your
seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, non-
slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature.
• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the air-
bag toward your chest instead of your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while
still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view
of the instrument panel controls.
38
1-1. For safe use
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
■ SRS airbag precautions
● The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and
can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very
close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the air-
bag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits
upright.
● Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or
seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small
to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint sys-
tem. Toyota strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in
the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are
safer for infants and children than the front passenger seat. (P. 54)
● If the seat belt extender has been con-
nected to the front seat belt buckles but
the seat belt extender has not also been
fastened to the latch plate of the seat
belt, the SRS front airbags will judge
that the driver and front passenger are
wearing the seat belt even though the
seat belt has not been connected. In
this case, the SRS front airbags may
not activate correctly in a collision,
resulting in death or serious injury in the
event of a collision. Be sure to wear the
seat belt with the seat belt extender.
39
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
■ SRS airbag precautions
● Do not sit on the edge of the seat or
lean against the dashboard.
● Do not allow a child to stand in front of
the SRS front passenger airbag unit or
sit on the knees of a front passenger.
● Do not allow the front seat occupants to
hold items on their knees.
● Do not lean against the door, the roof
side rail or the front, side and rear pil-
lars.
● Do not allow anyone to kneel on the
passenger seats toward the door or put
their head or hands outside the vehicle.
40
1-1. For safe use
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
■ SRS airbag precautions
● Do not attach anything to or lean any-
thing against areas such as the dash-
board, steering wheel pad and lower
portion of the instrument panel.
These items can become projectiles
when the SRS driver, front passenger
and driver’s knee airbag deploy.
● Do not attach anything to areas such as
the door, windshield glass, side door
glass, front or rear pillar, roof side rail
and assist grip.
● Vehicles without a smart key system:
Do not attach any heavy, sharp or hard
objects such as keys and accessories
to the key. The objects may restrict the
SRS driver’s knee airbag inflation or be
thrust into the driver's seat area by the
force of the deploying airbag, thus caus-
ing a danger.
41
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
■ SRS airbag precautions
● If a vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS driver’s knee airbag will
deploy, be sure to remove it.
● Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side
airbags and SRS seat cushion airbag inflate as they may interfere with
inflation of the SRS airbags. Such accessories may prevent the side air-
bags and seat cushion airbag from activating correctly, disable the system
or cause the side airbags and seat cushion airbag to inflate accidentally,
resulting in death or serious injury.
● Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS air-
bag components.
Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.
● Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS air-
bags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.
● If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbags have deployed, open a
door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do
so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.
● If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel
pad and front and rear pillars garnishes, are damaged or cracked, have
them replaced by your Toyota dealer.
● Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger's seat.
Doing so will disperse the passenger's weight, which prevents the sensor
from detecting the passenger's weight properly. As a result, the SRS front
airbags for the front passenger may not deploy in the event of a collision.
■ Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components
Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications
without consulting your Toyota dealer. The SRS airbags may malfunction or
deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or serious injury.
● Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags
● Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel,
instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear
pillars or roof side rails
● Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the
occupant compartment
● Installation of a grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar, etc.), snow plows,
winches or roof luggage carrier
● Modifications to the vehicle’s suspension system
● Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios and CD
players
● Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability
42
1-1. For safe use
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)
● Slight abrasions, burns, bruising etc.,may be sustained from SRS airbags,
due to the extremely high speed deployment (inflation) by hot gases.
● A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.
● Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as
well as the front seats, parts of the front and rear pillars, and roof side rails,
may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.
● The windshield may crack.
■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS front airbags)
● The SRS front airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the
set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to an approximately 12 -
18 mph [20 - 30 km/h] frontal collision with a fixed wall that does not move or
deform).
However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher in the following
situations:
• If the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole,
which can move or deform on impact
• If the vehicle is involved in an underride collision, such as a collision in
which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a
truck
● Depending on the type of collision, it is possible that only the seat belt pre-
tensioners will activate.
● The SRS front airbags for the front passenger will not activate if there is no
passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the SRS front air-
bags for the front passenger may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, even if
the seat is unoccupied.
● The SRS seat cushion airbag on the front seats will not operate if the occu-
pant is not wearing a seat belt.
■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS side and curtain shield airbags)
● The SRS side and curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of an
impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding
to the impact force produced by an approximately 3300 lb. [1500 kg] vehicle
colliding with the vehicle cabin from a direction perpendicular to the vehicle
orientation at an approximate speed of 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h]).
● The SRS curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of vehicle rollover.
● The SRS side and curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of a severe
frontal collision.
43
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than
a collision
The SRS front airbags and SRS side and curtain shield airbags may also
deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some
examples are shown in the illustration.
The SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy under the situations shown
in the illustration.
■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS front air-
bags)
The SRS front airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a
side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal
collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward
deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur.
● Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard
surface
● Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
● Landing hard or falling
● The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal.
● The vehicle skids and hits a curb stone.
● Collision from the side
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover
44
1-1. For safe use
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS side and
curtain shield airbags)
The SRS side and curtain shield airbags may not activate if the vehicle is
subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the
side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.
The SRS side airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a
rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed side or low-
speed frontal collision.
The SRS curtain shield airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is
involved in a rear collision, if it pitches end over end, or if it is involved in a
low-speed side or low-speed frontal collision.
● Collision from the side to the vehicle
body other than the passenger compart-
ment
● Collision from the side at an angle
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover
● Collision from the rear
● Pitching end over end
45
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ When to contact your Toyota dealer
In the following cases, the vehicle will require inspection and/or repair. Con-
tact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
● Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.
● The front of the vehicle is damaged or
deformed, or was involved in an acci-
dent that was not severe enough to
cause the SRS front airbags to inflate.
● A portion of a door or its surrounding
area is damaged or deformed, or the
vehicle was involved in an accident that
was not severe enough to cause the
SRS side airbags and curtain shield air-
bags to inflate.
● The pad section of the steering wheel,
dashboard near the front passenger air-
bag or lower portion of the instrument
panel is scratched, cracked, or other-
wise damaged.
● The seat cushion surface is scratched,
cracked, or otherwise damaged.
● The surface of the seats with the side
airbag is scratched, cracked, or other-
wise damaged.
46
1-1. For safe use
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
● The portion of the front pillars, rear pil-
lars or roof side rail garnishes (padding)
containing the curtain shield airbags
inside is scratched, cracked, or other-
wise damaged.
47
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Front passenger occupant classification
system
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classi-
fication system. This system detects the conditions of the front
passenger seat and activates or deactivates the devices for the
front passenger.
U.S.A. Canada
SRS warning light
Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light
“AIR BAG ON” indicator light
1
2
3
4
48
1-1. For safe use
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Adult*
1
■ Child*
4
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classi-
fication system
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
“AIR BAG ON”
SRS warning light Off
Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light
Off*
2
or
flashing
*
3
Devices
Front passenger airbag
Activated
Side airbag
on the front passenger seat
Curtain shield airbag
in the front passenger side
Seat cushion airbag
in the front passenger side
Activated*
2
or
deactivated
*
3
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner Activated
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
“AIR BAG OFF”
or “AIR BAG
ON”
*
4
SRS warning light Off
Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light
Off*
2
or
flashing
*
3
Devices
Front passenger airbag
Deactivated or
activated
*
4
Side airbag
on the front passenger seat
Activated
Curtain shield airbag
in the front passenger side
Seat cushion airbag
in the front passenger side
Deactivated or
activated
*
4, 2
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner Activated
49
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Child restraint system with infant*
5
■ Unoccupied
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
“AIR BAG
OFF”
*
6
SRS warning light Off
Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light
Off*
2
or
flashing
*
3
Devices
Front passenger airbag Deactivated
Side airbag
on the front passenger seat
Activated
Curtain shield airbag
in the front passenger side
Seat cushion airbag
in the front passenger side
Deactivated
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner Activated
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
“AIR BAG OFF”
SRS warning light
Off
Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light
Devices
Front passenger airbag Deactivated
Side airbag
on the front passenger seat
Activated
Curtain shield airbag
in the front passenger side
Seat cushion airbag
in the front passenger side
Deactivated
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner Activated
50
1-1. For safe use
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
There is a malfunction in the system
*
1
: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller
adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may not recognize
him/her as an adult depending on his/her physique and posture.
*
2
: In the event the front passenger is wearing a seat belt.
*
3
: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt
*
4
: For some children, child in seat, child in booster seat or child in convert-
ible seat, the system may not recognize him/her as a child. Factors
which may affect this can be the physique or posture.
*
5
: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger
seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only be installed on
the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (P. 54)
*
6
: In case the indicator light is not illuminated, consult this manual on how
to install the child restraint system properly. (P. 58)
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
“AIR BAG OFF”
SRS warning light
On
Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light
Devices
Front passenger airbag Deactivated
Side airbag
on the front passenger seat
Activated
Curtain shield airbag
in the front passenger side
Seat cushion airbag
in the front passenger side
Deactivated
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner Activated
51
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the front passenger occupant
classification system.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● Wear the seat belt properly.
● Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt plate has not been left inserted
into the buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.
● Make sure the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is not illuminated when using
the seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat
belt buckle, and reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender
after making sure the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If you
use the seat belt extender while the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illumi-
nated, the SRS airbags for the front passenger may not activate, which
could cause death or serious injury in the event of a collision.
● Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment (e.g.
seatback pocket).
● Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or
feet on the front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat.
● Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or
press on the seatback with their legs.
● Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.
52
1-1. For safe use
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
● Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches the rear
seat. This may cause the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light to be illuminated,
which indicates that the SRS airbags for the front passenger will not acti-
vate in the event of a severe accident. If the seatback touches the rear
seat, return the seatback to a position where it does not touch the rear
seat. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible when the
vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the
effectiveness of the seat belt system.
● If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the “AIR BAG ON” indicator
light is illuminated. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the
passenger to sit up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and
with the seat belt worn correctly. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator still
remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or
if that is not possible, move the front passenger seat fully rearward.
● When it is unavoidable to install a forward-facing child restraint system on
the front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front pas-
senger seat in the proper order. (P. 58)
● Do not modify or remove the front seats.
● Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Other-
wise, the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the
front passenger occupant classification system. In this case, contact your
Toyota dealer immediately.
● Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the
front seatbacks.
● Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion and seat cover, that cov-
ers the seat cushion surface.
● Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.
53
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
● It is recommended that children sit in the rear seats to avoid acci-
dental contact with the shift lever, wiper switch etc.
● Use the rear door child-protector lock or the window lock switch to
avoid children opening the door while driving or operating the
power window accidentally.
● Do not let small children operate equipment which may catch or
pinch body parts, such as the power window, hood, trunk, seats etc.
Safety information for children
Observe the following precautions when children are in the vehi-
cle.
Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the
child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat
belt.
WARNING
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to
have or use the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral.
There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with
the windows or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or
extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.
54
1-1. For safe use
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is
much safer than installing one on the front passenger seat.
● Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is appro-
priate to the age and size of the child.
● For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the child
restraint system.
General installation instructions are provided in this manual.
(P. 58)
Child restraint systems
A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be
properly restrained on the seat with the LATCH anchors or the
lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.
The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require
the use of child restraint systems.
Points to remember
55
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types
according to the age and size of the child:
■ Selecting an appropriate child restraint system
● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes
large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
● If the child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear seat
and use the vehicle’s seat belt. (P. 28)
Types of child restraints
Rear facing Infant seat/con-
vertible seat
Forward facing Convertible
seat
Booster seat
56
1-1. For safe use
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
■ Child restraint precautions
● For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child
must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system
depending on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is
not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be
crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle’s interior.
● Toyota strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that con-
forms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to acci-
dent statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat
than in the front seat.
● Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger
seat even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated. In the event
of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag
can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child
restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.
● A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front pas-
senger seat only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that
requires a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat
since there is no top tether strap anchor for the front passenger seat.
Adjust the seatback as upright as possible and always move the seat as
far back as possible even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illumi-
nated, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable
speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.
● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system
on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system
with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not
securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or seri-
ous injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop,
sudden swerve or accident.
● Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body
against the door or the area of the seat, front and rear pillars or roof side
rails from which the SRS side airbags or SRS curtain shield airbags deploy
even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if
the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact
could cause death or serious injury to the child.
● Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by
the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If
it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child
in the event of a sudden stop or accident.
57
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
■ When children are in the vehicle
Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes
twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries
that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used
to cut the belt.
■ When the child restraint system is not in use
● Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is
not in use. Do not store the child restraint system unsecured in the pas-
senger compartment.
● If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the
vehicle or store it securely in the trunk. If a head restraint was removed
when installing a child restraint system, always install the head restraint
before driving. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of
a sudden stop or accident.
58
1-1. For safe use
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Child restraint LATCH anchors
(P. 59)
LATCH anchors are provided for
the outer rear seats. (Buttons dis-
playing the location of the anchors
are attached to the seats.)
Installation with a seat belt
(P. 60)
Anchor brackets (for top tether
strap) (P. 6 3 )
An anchor bracket is provided for
each rear seat.
Installing child restraints
Follow the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions.
Firmly secure child restraints to the seats using the LATCH
anchors or a seat belt. Attach the top tether strap when installing
a child restraint.
The lap/shoulder belt can be used if your child restraint system
is not compatible with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children) system.
59
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Widen the gap between the seat cushion and seatback slightly.
Type A
Latch the hooks of the lower
straps onto the LATCH
anchors. If the child restraint
has a top tether strap, the top
tether strap should be latched
onto the top tether strap anchor.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint
system indicates the presence
of a lower connector system.
Type B
Latch the buckles onto the
LATCH anchors. If the child
restraint has a top tether strap,
the top tether strap should be
latched onto the top tether strap
anchor.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint
system indicates the presence
of a lower connector system.
Installation with LATCH system
1
Canada only
2
Canada only
2
60
1-1. For safe use
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Rear-facing Infant seat/convertible seat
Place the child restraint sys-
tem on the rear seat facing
the rear of the vehicle.
Run the seat belt through the
child restraint system and
insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the
belt is not twisted.
Fully extend the shoulder belt
and allow it to retract to put it
in lock mode. In lock mode,
the belt cannot be extended.
While pushing the child
restraint system down into
the rear seat, allow the
shoulder belt to retract until
the child restraint system is
securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there
is no slack in the belt, pull the
belt to check that it cannot be
extended.
Installing child restraints using a seat belt
1
2
3
4
61
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Forward-facing Convertible seat
Place the child restraint sys-
tem on the seat facing the
front of the vehicle.
If your child restraint system
interferes with a head restraint
and cannot be installed properly,
install the child restraint system
after removing the head
restraint. (P. 135)
Run the seat belt through the
child restraint system and
insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the
belt is not twisted.
Fully extend the shoulder belt
and allow it to retract to put it
in lock mode. In lock mode,
the belt cannot be extended.
While pushing the child
restraint system into the rear
seat, allow the shoulder belt
to retract until the child
restraint system is securely
in place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there
is no slack in the belt, pull the
belt to check that it cannot be
extended.
If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap
should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor. (P. 63)
1
2
3
4
5
62
1-1. For safe use
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Booster seat
Place the child restraint sys-
tem on the seat facing the
front of the vehicle.
Sit the child in the child
restraint system. Fit the seat
belt to the child restraint sys-
tem according to the manu-
facturer's instructions and
insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the
belt is not twisted.
Check that the shoulder belt is correctly positioned over the child's
shoulder and that the lap belt is as low as possible. (P. 28)
Push the buckle release button
and fully retract the seat belt.
1
2
Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt
63
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Adjust the head restraint to the downmost position. (if equipped)
(P. 134)
Secure the child restraint sys-
tem using the seat belt or
LATCH anchors.
Open the anchor bracket cover,
latch the hook onto the anchor
bracket and tighten the top
tether strap.
Make sure the top tether strap is
securely latched.
Child restraint systems with a top tether strap
1
2
3
64
1-1. For safe use
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages
The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.
Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifica-
tions can be used.
This vehicle is designed to conform to SAE J1819.
WARNING
■ When installing a booster seat
To prevent the belt from going into ALR lock mode, do not fully extend the
shoulder belt. ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only. This could cause
injury or discomfort to the child. (P. 30)
■ When installing a child restraint system
Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual
and fix the child restraint system securely in place.
If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other
passengers may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of a sudden
braking or an accident.
● If the driver’s seat interferes with the
child restraint system and prevents it
from being attached correctly, attach the
child restraint system to the right-hand
rear seat.
● Adjust the front passenger seat so that
it does not interfere with the child
restraint system.
● Only put a forward-facing child restraint
system on the front seat when unavoid-
able. When installing a forward-facing
child restraint system on the front pas-
senger seat, move the seat as far back
as possible even if the “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator light is illuminated. Failure to
do so may result in death or serious
injury if the airbags deploy (inflate).
65
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
■ When installing a child restraint system
● When using the LATCH anchors for a child restraint system, move the seat
as far back as possible, with the seatback close to the child restraint sys-
tem.
● When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of the child’s shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from the child’s neck, but not so that it could fall off the child’s
shoulder. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury in the event
of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
● Ensure that the belt and plate are securely locked and the seat belt is not
twisted.
● Shake the child restraint system left and right, and forward and backward
to ensure that it has been securely installed.
● After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.
● Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system
manufacturer.
● When securing some types of child restraint systems in rear seats, it may
not be possible to properly use the seat belts in positions next to the child
restraint without interfering with it or affecting seat belt effectiveness. Be
sure your seat belt fits snugly across your shoulder and low on your hips. If
it does not, or if it interferes with the child restraint, move to a different
position. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ Do not use a seat belt extender
If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the
seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause
death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sud-
den braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
■ To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors
When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects
around the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child
restraint system. Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached,
or it may cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in
the event of a sudden braking, sudden swerve or an accident.
66
1-1. For safe use
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Exhaust gas precautions
Harmful substance to the human body is included in exhaust
gases if inhaled.
WARNING
Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause exhaust gases enter the vehicle and may lead to
an accident caused by light-headedness, or may lead to death or a serious
health hazard.
■ Important points while driving
● Keep the trunk lid closed.
● If you smell exhaust gases in the vehicle even when the trunk lid is closed,
open the windows and have the vehicle inspected at your Toyota dealer as
soon as possible.
■ When parking
● If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area or a closed area, such as a
garage, stop the engine.
● Do not leave the vehicle with the engine on for a long time.
If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space
and ensure that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.
● Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it
is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is
running, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle.
■ Exhaust pipe
The exhaust system needs to be checked periodically. If there is a hole or
crack caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be
sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Toyota dealer.
67
1
For safety and security
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
1-2. Theft deterrent system
Vehicles without a smart key sys-
tem:
The indicator light flashes after
the key has been removed from
the engine switch to indicate that
the system is operating.
The indicator light stops flashing
after the registered key has been
inserted into the engine switch to
indicate that the system has been
canceled.
Vehicles with a smart key system:
The indicator light flashes after the engine switch has been turned off
to indicate that the system is operating.
The indicator light stops flashing after the engine switch has been
turned to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode to indicate that the
system has been canceled.
Engine immobilizer system
The vehicle’s keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent
the engine from starting if a key has not been previously regis-
tered in the vehicle’s on-board computer.
Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehi-
cle.
This system is designed to help prevent vehicle theft but does
not guarantee absolute security against all vehicle thefts.
68
1-2. Theft deterrent system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type engine immobilizer system.
■ Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction
● If the grip portion of the key is in contact with a metallic object
● If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system
(key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle
■ Certifications for the engine immobilizer system
For the U.S.A.
FCC ID: WRKRI-44BTY FCC ID: NI4TMIMB-3
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada
This device complies with Industry Canada’s licence-exempt RSSs. Opera-
tion is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause
interference; and (2) This device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’lndustrie Canada applicables
aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes : (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage; (2)
l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,
même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
NOTICE
■ To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper
operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.
69
1-2. Theft deterrent system
1
For safety and security
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
The alarm uses light and sound to give an alert when an intrusion is
detected.
The alarm is triggered in the following situations when the alarm is
set:
● A locked door or trunk is unlocked or opened in any way other than
using the entry function, wireless remote control or mechanical key.
(The doors will lock again automatically.)
● The hood is opened.
Close the doors, trunk and hood,
and lock all the doors. The system
will be set automatically after 30
seconds.
The indicator light changes from
being on to flashing when the sys-
tem is set.
Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarm:
● Unlock the doors or open the trunk.
● Vehicles without a smart key system:
Turn the engine switch to the “ACC” or “ON” position, or start the
engine. (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped after a few sec-
onds.)
● Vehicles with a smart key system:
Turn the engine switch to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, or
start the engine. (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped after a
few seconds.)
Alarm
: If equipped
The alarm
Setting the alarm system
Deactivating or stopping the alarm
70
1-2. Theft deterrent system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type alarm system.
■ Items to check before locking the vehicle
To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure of
the following:
● Nobody is in the vehicle.
● The windows and moon roof are closed before the alarm is set.
● No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle.
■ Triggering of the alarm
The alarm may be triggered in the following situations:
(Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm system.)
■ Alarm-operated door lock
In the following cases, depending on the situation, the door may automatically
lock to prevent improper entry into the vehicle:
● The doors are unlocked manually without the mechanical key and the alarm
is triggered.
● While the alarm is operating, the doors are unlocked manually without the
mechanical key.
● When recharging or replacing the battery
● A person inside the vehicle opens a
door, the trunk or hood, or unlocks the
vehicle using a door lock switch or inside
lock button.
● The battery is recharged or replaced
when the vehicle is locked. (P. 529)
NOTICE
■ To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper
operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.
71
Instrument cluster
2
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
2. Instrument cluster
Warning lights and
indicators .......................... 72
Gauges and meters
(vehicles with a
monochrome display) ....... 77
Gauges and meters
(vehicles with a
color display)..................... 86
Fuel consumption
information ........................ 96
Eco Driving Indicator........... 99
72
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
2. Instrument cluster
Vehicles with a monochrome display
Vehicles with a color display
The units used on the meters and some indicators may differ depending on
the target region.
Warning lights and indicators
The warning lights and indicators on the instrument cluster and
center panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s vari-
ous systems.
For the purpose of explanation, the following illustration dis-
plays all warning lights and indicators illuminated.
73
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in the indicated vehi-
cle’s systems.
Warning lights
*
1
(U.S.A.)
Brake system warning
light (P. 480)
*
1
Slip indicator (P. 481)
*
1
(Canada)
Brake system warning
light (P. 480)
Low fuel level warning
light (P. 481)
*
1
(U.S.A.)
Malfunction indicator
lamp (P. 480)
Driver’s and front pas-
senger’s seat belt
reminder light (P. 481)
*
1
(Canada)
Malfunction indicator
lamp (P. 480)
*
3
Rear passengers’ seat
belt reminder lights
(P. 481)
*
1
SRS warning light
(P. 480)
*
1, 4
PCS warning light
(P. 482)
*
1
(U.S.A.)
ABS warning light
(P. 481)
(Orange)
LDA (Lane Departure
Alert with steering con-
trol) indicator (P. 482)
*
1
(Canada)
ABS warning light
(P. 481)
*
1
Master warning light
(P. 481)
*
1
Electric power steering
system warning light
(P. 481)
*
1, 2
Tire pressure warning
light (P. 482)
74
2. Instrument cluster
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
*
1
: These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position
(vehicles without a smart key system) or the engine switch is turned to
IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with a smart key system), to indicate that a
system check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is
started, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if
a light does not come on, or turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
*
2
: If equipped
*
3
: This light illuminates on the center panel.
*
4
: The light flashes to indicate a malfunction.
75
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle’s
various systems.
Indicators
Turn signal indicator
(P. 191)
Dynamic radar cruise
control (vehicle-to-vehi-
cle distance control
mode) indicator
(P. 239)
*
2
(U.S.A.)
Headlight indicator
(P. 193)
Dynamic radar cruise
control “SET”
indicator (P. 239, 243)
*
2
(Canada)
Tail light indicator
(P. 193)
*
1, 6
PCS warning light
(P. 217)
Headlight high beam
indicator (P. 195)
LDA (Lane Departure
Alert with steering con-
trol) indicator (P. 230)
*
1
Automatic High Beam
indicator (P. 198)
*
2
“ECO MODE” indicator
(P. 182)
*
2
Sport mode indicator
(P. 185)
*
1, 3
Slip indicator (P. 258)
*
1, 2, 4
Eco Driving Indicator
Light (P. 99)
*
1
VSC OFF indicator
(P. 259)
*
1, 2
“TRAC OFF” indicator
(P. 258)
*
1, 5
(U.S.A.)
“AIR BAG ON/OFF” indi-
cator (P. 47)
Dynamic radar cruise
control (constant speed
control mode) indicator
(P. 243)
*
1, 5
(Canada)
“AIR BAG ON/OFF” indi-
cator (P. 47)
76
2. Instrument cluster
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
*
1
: These lights, except those shown on the multi-information display, turn on
when the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position (vehicles without a
smart key system) or the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode
(vehicles with a smart key system) to indicate that a system check is being
performed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few sec-
onds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on,
or turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
*
2
: If equipped
*
3
: The light flashes to indicate that the system is operating.
*
4
: The light does not turn on when the system is disabled.
*
5
: This light illuminates on the center panel.
*
6
: The light turns on when the system is off.
*
7
: When the outside temperature is approximately 37°F (3°C) or lower, the
indicator will flash 10 times, then stay on.
*
5
Security indicator
(P. 67, 69)
*
2, 7
Low outside tempera-
ture indicator (P. 86)
WARNING
■ If a safety system warning light does not come on
Should a safety system light such as the ABS and SRS warning lights not
come on when you start the engine, this could mean that these systems are
not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death
or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immedi-
ately if this occurs.
77
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute.
Multi-information display
The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of driving-
related data including the current outside air temperature.
Speedometer
Fuel gauge
Display change button (for Canada)
Switches the trip information and instrument panel light control.
Display change button (for U.S.A.)
Switches the trip information.
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature.
Gauges and meters (vehicles with a mono-
chrome display)
The displayed content may differ depending on the type of
meter.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
78
2. Instrument cluster
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Driving assist information
(P. 99, 235)
Driving monitor (P. 81)
Warning messages (P. 4 8 9)
Eco Driving Indicator Zone Dis-
play
* (P. 100)
Outside temperature display
(P. 393)
Trip information (P. 8 0)
Shift position and gear position
indicator
* (P. 181, 184)
*: Vehicles with a continuously variable transmission
Multi-information display
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
79
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
When the tail lights are on, the brightness of the instrument panel
lights can be adjusted. (On vehicles with an automatic light control
system, the instrument panel lights can be adjusted when the sur-
rounding area is dark and the tail lights are on.)
The brightness of the clock light can be adjusted regardless of
whether the tail lights are on or off.
For U.S.A.
Brighter
Darker
For Canada
Press the display change button
repeatedly to display the instru-
ment panel lights control display.
To adjust the brightness, press
and hold the display change but-
ton.
Instrument panel light control
1
2
80
2. Instrument cluster
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Switching the display
Items displayed can be switched by pressing the display change
button.
■ Odometer
Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
■ Trip meter A/trip meter B
Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter
was last reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and dis-
play different distances independently.
Press and hold the display change button to reset.
Trip information
For U.S.A. For Canada
81
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Switching the display
Items displayed can be
switched by pressing the
“DISP” switch.
■ Average fuel consumption
Displays the average fuel consumption since the function was
reset.
• Press and hold the “DISP” switch to reset when the average fuel con-
sumption is displayed.
• Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.
■
Current fuel consumption
Displays the current rate of fuel consumption.
Use the displayed current fuel consumption as a reference.
Driving monitor
82
2. Instrument cluster
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Driving range
Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with
the quantity of fuel remaining.
• This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As
a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that dis-
played.
• When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display may
not be updated.
When refueling, turn the engine switch off. If the vehicle is refueled with-
out turning the engine switch off, the display may not be updated.
■
Average vehicle speed
Displays the average vehicle speed since the engine was last
started.
■ Elapsed time
Displays the elapsed time since the engine was started.
■ Customization
Some settings can be changed. (Customizable features: P. 56 4 )
■ Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display (vehicles with a continu-
ously variable transmission)
P. 1 0 0
83
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
It is possible to customize the language and Eco Driving Indicator
Light settings using the “DISP” switch.
When customizing vehicle features, ensure that the vehicle is parked
in a safe place with the shift the shift lever to P (continuously variable
transmission) or N (manual transmission) and the parking brake set.
Press the “DISP” switch to dis-
play the setting screen while
the vehicle is stopped, and then
press and hold the “DISP”
switch to display the customize
mode screen.
Press the “DISP” switch to
select the item to be set, then
press and hold the “DISP”
switch.
Press the “DISP” switch to
select the desired setting, and
then press and hold the “DISP”
switch.
To go back to the previous screen or exit the customize mode, press
the “DISP” switch to select “EXIT”, and then press and hold the
“DISP” switch.
Customizing vehicle features
1
2
3
84
2. Instrument cluster
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Customization
Some settings can be changed. (Customizable features: P. 56 4 )
■ The meters and display illuminate when
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals
The following information data will be reset:
● Driving range
● Average vehicle speed
● Elapsed time
● Average fuel consumption
■ Liquid crystal display
Small spots or light spots may appear on the display. This phenomenon is
characteristic of liquid crystal displays, and there is no problem continuing to
use the display.
■ Setting display automatic suspension
In the following situations, the setting display will be suspended.
● When a message appears.
● When the vehicle begins to move.
85
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
■ The display at low temperatures
Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the display. At
extremely low temperatures, the display monitor may respond slowly, and
display changes may be delayed.
For example, there is a lag between the driver’s shifting and the new gear
number appearing on the display. This lag could cause the driver to down-
shift again, causing rapid and excessive engine braking and possibly an
accident resulting in death or injury.
■ Cautions during setting up the display
As the engine needs to be running during setting up the display, ensure that
the vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area
such as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO)
may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious
health hazard.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the engine and its components
● Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which
indicates the maximum engine speed.
● The engine may be overheating if the engine coolant temperature gauge
are in the red zone. In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place, and check the engine after it has cooled completely. (P. 531)
86
2. Instrument cluster
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute.
Multi-information display
Presents the driver with a variety of driving-related data.
Displays warning messages in case of a malfunction (P. 489)
Outside temperature display
P. 393
Shift position/gear position display
Displays the currently selected the shift position and gear position.
P. 181, 184
Speedometer
Fuel gauge
Odometer and trip meter display/Instrument panel light control dis-
play
*
P. 87, 88
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature.
*: Canada only
Gauges and meters (vehicles with a color
display)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
87
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Switches the items of the odome-
ter and trip meter display by
pressing the “TRIP” switch.
■ Odometer
Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
■ Trip meter A*/trip meter B*
Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter
was last reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and dis-
play different distances independently.
*: Press and hold the “TRIP” switch to reset.
Changing the odometer/trip meter display
88
2. Instrument cluster
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
When the tail lights are on, the brightness of the instrument panel
lights can be adjusted. (On vehicles with an automatic light control
system, the instrument panel lights can be adjusted when the sur-
rounding area is dark and the tail lights are on.)
The brightness of the clock light can be adjusted regardless of
whether the tail lights are on or off.
For U.S.A.
Brighter
Darker
For Canada
Press the “TRIP” switch repeat-
edly to display the instrument
panel lights control display.
To adjust the brightness, press
and hold the “TRIP” switch.
Instrument panel light control
1
2
89
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ The meters and display illuminate when
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the engine and its components
● Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which
indicates the maximum engine speed.
● The engine may be overheating if the engine coolant temperature gauge is
in the red zone. In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place,
and check the engine after it has cooled completely. (P. 531)
90
2. Instrument cluster
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Display contents
The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of
vehicle data.
● Menu icons
Displays the following infor-
mation when an icon is
selected. (P. 91 )
Some of the information may
be displayed automatically
depending on the situation.
Drive information
Select to display various drive data. (P. 92)
Navigation system-linked display (if equipped)
Select to display the following navigation system-linked information.
• Route guidance
• Compass display (north-up display/heading-up display)
Audio system-linked display (if equipped)
Select to enable selection of an audio source or track on the meter
using the meter control switches.
Driving assist information
Select to display the dynamic radar cruise control or LDA (Lane
Departure Alert with steering control) information, when the system is
used. (P. 226, 235)
The display icon changes depending on the system used.
Multi-information display
91
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Warning message display
Select to display warning messages and measures to be taken if a
malfunction is detected. (P. 489)
Settings display
Select to change the meter display settings. (P. 93)
■
Operating the meter control switches
Select an item/change pages
Press: Enters/Sets
Press and hold: Resets
Returns to the previous
screen
1
2
3
92
2. Instrument cluster
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
● Current fuel consumption*
1
● Average fuel consumption (after reset*
2
/after start/after refuel)*
1
Displays the average fuel consumption since the function was
reset, the engine was started, and the vehicle was refueled, respec-
tively
Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.
● Average speed (after reset*
2
/after start)*
1
Displays the average vehicle speed since the function was reset
and the engine was started, respectively
● Distance (driving range/after start)
*
1
Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with
the quantity of fuel remaining and the distance driven after the
engine was started, respectively.
• This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As
a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that dis-
played.
• When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display may
not be updated.
When refueling, turn the engine switch off. If the vehicle is refueled with-
out turning the engine switch off, the display may not be updated.
● Elapsed time (after reset*
2
/after start)*
1
Displays the elapsed time since the function was reset and the
engine was started, respectively
● Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display (vehicles with a continuously
variable transmission)
P. 1 0 0
● LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control) vehicle sway
warning
P. 2 2 7
● Display off
A blank screen is displayed
*
1
: Can be registered to Drive information 1 or 2. (P. 93)
*
2
: Resetting procedures:
• Select a function to be reset using the meter control switch and then
press and hold to reset.
• If there is more than one function that can be reset, check boxes will be
displayed next to those functions.
Drive information
93
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Changing the settings
Select using the meter control switch.
Select an item and then set it with the center button.
■ Customizable items
● LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control)
P. 2 2 6
● LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control) vehicle sway
warning
P. 2 2 7
● PCS (Pre-Collision System)
P. 2 1 4
● Language
Select to change the language displayed on the multi-information
display.
● Units
Select to change the unit of measure displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display.
● Drive information 1/Drive information 2
Select to select up to 2 items that will be displayed on a Drive
information screen.
● Eco driving indicator light
Select to activate/deactivate the Eco Driving Indicator Light.
(
P. 9 9)
● Pop-up display
Select to set the following pop-up displays, which may appear in
some situations, on/off.
• Route guidance display of the navigation system-linked sys-
tem (if equipped)
• Incoming call display of the hands-free phone system
● Accent color
Select to change the accent colors on the screen, such as the
cursor color.
Settings display
1
2
94
2. Instrument cluster
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
● Maintenance system (U.S.A.)
Select to reset the message after the required maintenance is
performed. (
P. 415)
● Initialization
Registered or changed meter settings will be deleted or returned
to their default setting.
■ Pop-up display
In some situations, such as when a switch operation is performed, a pop-up
display, such as the operating dynamic radar cruise control switch, will be
temporarily displayed on the multi-information display.
The pop-up display function can be set on/off.
■ Setting display automatic cancelation
In the following situations, a setting display in which the settings can be
changed through the meter control switches will automatically be turned off.
● When a warning message appears while the setting display is displayed
● When the vehicle begins to move while the setting display is displayed
■ Liquid crystal display
Small spots or light spots may appear on the display. This phenomenon is
characteristic of liquid crystal displays, and there is no problem continuing to
use the display.
95
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
■ The information display at low temperatures
Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal
information display. At extremely low temperatures, the display monitor may
respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.
For example, there is a lag between the driver’s shifting and the new gear
number appearing on the display. This lag could cause the driver to down-
shift again, causing rapid and excessive engine braking and possibly an
accident resulting in death or injury.
■ Cautions during setting up the display
As the engine needs to be running during setting up the display, ensure that
the vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area
such as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO)
may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious
health hazard.
NOTICE
■ During setting up the display
To prevent battery discharge, ensure that the engine is running while setting
up the display features.
96
2. Instrument cluster
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Entune Audio, Entune Audio Plus
or Entune Premium Audio
Entune Audio
Press the “CAR” button.
If the “Past Record” screen is dis-
played, select “Trip Information”.
Entune Audio Plus or Entune Premium Audio
Press the “APPS” button.
Touch “Eco” on the “Apps”
screen.
If the “Past Record” screen is dis-
played, select “Trip Information”.
Fuel consumption information
Fuel consumption information can be displayed on Entune
Audio, Entune Audio Plus and/or Entune Premium Audio.
Trip information
1
2
97
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Average vehicle speed
Elapsed time
Range
Previous fuel consumption
per minute
Current fuel consumption
Reset the trip information
data
“Past Record” screen appears
Vehicles without a smart key system:
Average fuel consumption for the past 15 minutes is divided by color
into past averages and averages attained since the engine switch was
last turned to the “ON” position. Use the displayed average fuel con-
sumption as a reference.
Vehicles with a smart key system:
Average fuel consumption for the past 15 minutes is divided by color
into past averages and averages attained since the engine switch was
last turned to IGNITION ON mode. Use the displayed average fuel
consumption as a reference.
This image is an example only.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
98
2. Instrument cluster
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Past record
Entune Audio
Press the “CAR” button.
If the “Trip Information” screen is displayed, select “Past Record”.
Entune Audio Plus or Entune Premium Audio
Press the “APPS” button.
Touch “Eco” on the “Apps” screen.
If the “Trip Information” screen is displayed, select “Past Record”.
Previous fuel economy
record
Current fuel economy
Best recorded fuel econ-
omy
Update the past record
data
Reset the past record data
“Trip Information” screen appears
Average recorded fuel economy
These images are examples only, and may vary slightly from actual
conditions.
■ Resetting the data
Selecting “Clear” on the “Trip Information” screen will reset the consumption
data.
Selecting “Clear” on the “Past Record” screen will reset the past record data.
■ Updating the past record data
Selecting “Update” on the “Past Record” screen will update the past record
data.
■ Cruising range
Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quan-
tity of fuel remaining.
This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption.
As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that dis-
played.
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
99
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
During Eco-friendly acceleration
operation (Eco driving), Eco Driv-
ing Indicator Light will turn on.
When the acceleration exceeds
Zone of Eco driving, and when the
vehicle is stopped, the light turns
off.
Eco Driving Indicator (vehicles with a con-
tinuously variable transmission)
Eco Drive Indicator Light
Monochrome display
Color display
100
2. Instrument cluster
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Suggests Zone of Eco driving with
current Eco driving ratio based on
acceleration.
Eco driving ratio based on
acceleration
If the acceleration exceeds Zone of
Eco driving, the right side of Eco
Driving Indicator Zone Display
blinks.
Zone of Eco driving
Vehicles with a monochrome display
P. 8 3
Vehicles with a color display
P. 9 3
■ Operation of Eco Driving Indicator
Eco Driving Indicator will not operate in the following conditions:
● The shift lever is in any position other than D.
● Paddle shift switch
* is operated.
● Sport mode
* is selected.
● The vehicle speed is approximately 80 mph (130 km/h) or higher.
*: If equipped
Eco Drive Indicator Zone Display
Monochrome display
Color display
1
2
Eco Driving Indicator Light customization
101
3
Operation of
each component
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
3-1. Key information
Keys .................................. 102
3-2. Opening, closing and
locking the doors
Doors ................................ 108
Trunk................................. 117
Smart key system ............. 122
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Front seats ........................ 130
Rear seats......................... 132
Head restraints.................. 134
3-4. Adjusting the steering
wheel and mirrors
Steering wheel .................. 137
Inside rear view mirror ...... 139
Outside rear view
mirrors............................. 141
3-5. Opening and closing
the windows
Power windows ................. 143
Moon roof.......................... 147
102
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
3-1. Key information
The following keys are provided with the vehicle.
Vehicles without a smart key system (type A)
Keys
Key number plate
Vehicles without a smart key system (type B)
Keys
Operating the wireless remote con-
trol function
Key number plate
Vehicles with a smart key system
Electronic keys
• Operating the smart key system
(P. 122)
• Operating the wireless remote
control function
Mechanical keys
Key number plate
Keys
The keys
1
2
1
2
1
2
3
103
3-1. Key information
3
Operation of each component
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Vehicles without a smart key system
Locks all the doors (P. 1 08 )
Unlocks all the doors (P. 10 8 )
Pressing the button unlocks the
driver’s door. Pressing the button
again within 5 seconds unlocks the
other doors.
Sounds the alarm (P. 104)
Opens the trunk (P. 118 )
Vehicles with a smart key system
Locks all the doors (P. 1 09 )
Unlocks all the doors (P. 10 9 )
Pressing the button unlocks the
driver’s door. Pressing the button
again within 5 seconds unlocks the
other doors.
Opens the trunk (P. 118 )
Sounds the alarm (P. 104)
To take out the mechanical key,
push the release button and take
the key out.
The mechanical key can only be
inserted in one direction, as the
key only has grooves on one side.
If the key cannot be inserted in a
lock cylinder, turn it over and re-
attempt to insert it.
After using the mechanical key, store it in the electronic key. Carry the
mechanical key together with the electronic key. If the electronic key bat-
tery is depleted or the entry function does not operate properly, you will
need the mechanical key. (P. 523)
Wireless remote control (if equipped)
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Using the mechanical key
104
3-1. Key information
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Panic mode (with a wireless remote control function)
Vehicles without a smart key system
Vehicles with a smart key system
■ If you lose your keys
New genuine keys can be made by your Toyota dealer using the other key
(vehicles without a smart key system) or mechanical key (vehicles with a
smart key system) and the key number stamped on your key number plate.
Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle.
■ When riding in an aircraft
When bringing a key with wireless remote control function onto an aircraft,
make sure you do not press any button on the key while inside the aircraft
cabin. If you are carrying the key in your bag etc., ensure that the buttons are
not likely to be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the key to
emit radio waves that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.
When is pressed for longer than
about one second, an alarm will sound
intermittently and the vehicle lights will
flash to deter any person from trying to
break into or damage your vehicle.
To stop the alarm, press any button on the
wireless remote control.
When is pressed for longer than
about one second, an alarm will sound
intermittently and the vehicle lights will
flash to deter any person from trying to
break into or damage your vehicle.
To stop the alarm, press any button on the
electronic key.
105
3-1. Key information
3
Operation of each component
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Key battery depletion (vehicles with a wireless remote control function)
Vehicles without a smart key system
If the wireless remote control function does not operate, the battery may be
depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (P. 455)
Vehicles with a smart key system
● The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years.
● If the battery becomes low, an alarm will sound in the cabin when the engine
stops. (P. 503)
● As the electronic key always receives radio waves, the battery will become
depleted even if the electronic key is not used. The following symptoms indi-
cate that the electronic key battery may be depleted. Replace the battery
when necessary. (P. 455)
• The smart key system or the wireless remote control does not operate.
• The detection area becomes smaller.
• The LED indicator on the key surface does not turn on.
● To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft. (1
m) of the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field:
•TVs
• Personal computers
• Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers
• Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones
• Table lamps
• Induction cookers
■ Replacing the battery
P. 455
■ Confirmation of the registered key number
The number of keys already registered to the vehicle can be confirmed. Ask
your Toyota dealer for details.
■ If a wrong key is used (vehicles with a smart key system)
The key cylinder rotates freely to isolate inside mechanism.
106
3-1. Key information
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Certification for the wireless remote control
For the U.S.A.
FCC ID: HYQ23AAH FCC ID: HYQ12BEL
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For 12BEL
The FCC ID/IC Certification number is affixed inside the equipment. You can
find the ID/number when replacing the battery.
For Canada
NOTE:
This device complies with Industry Canada’s licence-exempt RSSs. Opera-
tion is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause
interference; and (2) This device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
For 12BEL/12BDP
The FCC ID/IC Certification number is affixed inside the equipment. You can
find the ID/number when replacing the battery.
NOTE:
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'lndustrie Canada appli-
cables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autori-
sée aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage; (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
Pour 12BEL/12BDP
L’identification FCC/le numéro d’accréditation IC est apposé(e) à l’intérieur de
l’appareil. Cette identification/ce numéro est visible au remplacement de la
pile.
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. wireless remote control system) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 564)
107
3-1. Key information
3
Operation of each component
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
NOTICE
■ To prevent key damage
● Do not drop the keys, subject them to strong shocks or bend them.
● Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for long periods of time.
● Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer etc.
● Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials to the keys or place the keys
close to such materials.
● Do not disassemble the keys.
● Do not attach a sticker or anything else to the surface of the electronic key
and key (with a wireless remote control function).
● Vehicles with a smart key system: Do not place the keys near objects that
produce magnetic fields, such as TVs, audio systems and induction cook-
ers, or medical electrical equipment, such as low-frequency therapy equip-
ment.
■ Carrying the electronic key on your person (vehicles with a smart key
system)
Carry the electronic key 3.9 in. (10 cm) or more away from electric appli-
ances that are turned on. Radio waves emitted from electric appliances
within 3.9 in. (10 cm) of the electronic key may interfere with the key, caus-
ing the key to not function properly.
■ In case of a smart key system malfunction or other key-related prob-
lems (vehicles with a smart key system)
Take your vehicle with all the electronic keys provided with your vehicle to
your Toyota dealer.
■ When an electronic key is lost (vehicles with a smart key system)
If the electronic key remains lost, the risk of vehicle theft increases signifi-
cantly. Visit your Toyota dealer immediately with all remaining electronic
keys that was provided with your vehicle.
108
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
◆ Smart key system (if equipped)
Carry the electronic key to enable this function.
Grip the driver’s door handle
to unlock the door. Grip the
passenger’s door handle to
unlock all the doors.
*
Make sure to touch the sensor
on the back of the handle.
The doors cannot be unlocked
for 3 seconds after the doors are
locked.
*: The door unlock settings can be changed. (P. 115)
Touch the lock sensor (the indentation on the upper part of the
door handle) to lock all the doors.
Check that the door is securely locked.
◆ Wireless remote control (if equipped)
Vehicles without a smart key system
Locks all the doors
Check that the door is securely
locked.
Unlocks all the doors
Pressing the button unlocks the
driver’s door. Pressing the but-
ton again within 5 seconds
unlocks the other doors.
Doors
Unlocking and locking the doors from the outside
1
2
1
2
109
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Vehicles with a smart key system
Locks all the doors
Check that the door is securely
locked.
Unlocks all the doors
Pressing the button unlocks the
driver’s door. Pressing the but-
ton again within 5 seconds
unlocks the other doors.
◆ Key
Turning the key operates the doors as follows:
Vehicles without a smart key system
Locks all the doors
Unlocks all the doors
Driver’s side only: Turning the
key unlocks the driver's door.
Turning the key again unlocks
the other doors.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical
key. (P. 5 23 )
1
2
1
2
110
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Operation signals
A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors
have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: once; Unlocked: twice)
■ Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is
unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.
■ When the door cannot be locked by the lock sensor on the upper part of
the door handle
■ Door lock buzzer
If an attempt to lock the doors using the wireless remote control or smart key
system is made when a door is not fully closed, a buzzer will sound for 5 sec-
onds. Fully close the door, and lock the vehicle again.
■ Setting the alarm (if equipped)
Locking the doors will set the alarm system. (P. 69)
■ If the smart key system or the wireless remote control does not operate
properly
Use the mechanical key to lock and unlock the doors. (P. 523)
Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted. (P. 455)
If the door will not lock even when the top-
side sensor area is touched, try using
your palm to touch the lock sensor.
111
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
◆ Door lock switches
Locks all the doors
Unlocks all the doors
◆ Inside lock buttons
Locks the door
Unlocks the door
The front doors can be opened
by pulling the inside handle
even if the lock buttons are in
the lock position.
Move the inside lock button to the lock position.
Close the door.
Vehicles without a smart key system
The door cannot be locked if either of the front doors is open and the
key is in the engine switch.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The door cannot be locked if the engine switch is in ACCESSORY or
IGNITION ON mode, or the electronic key is left inside the vehicle.
However, the key may not be detected correctly and the door may be
locked.
Unlocking and locking the doors from the inside
1
2
1
2
Locking the doors from the outside without a key
1
2
112
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
The door cannot be opened from
inside the vehicle when the lock is
set.
Unlock
Lock
These locks can be set to prevent
children from opening the rear
doors. Push down on each rear
door switch to lock both rear doors.
Rear door child-protector lock
1
2
113
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
The following functions can be set or cancelled:
*
1
: Vehicles with a continuously variable transmission
*
2
: Vehicles with a smart key system
Automatic door locking and unlocking systems
Function Operation
Shift position linked door locking
function
*
1
Shifting the shift lever out of P locks
all doors.
Shift position linked door unlocking
function
*
1
Shifting the shift lever to P unlocks
all doors.
Speed linked door locking function*
2
All doors are locked when the vehi-
cle speed is approximately 12 mph
(20 km/h) or higher.
Driver’s door linked door unlocking
function
Vehicles without a smart key sys-
tem
All doors are unlocked when the
driver's door is opened within
approximately 45 seconds of turning
the engine switch to “ACC” or
“LOCK”.
Vehicles with a smart key system
All doors are unlocked when the
driver's door is opened within
approximately 45 seconds of turning
the engine switch to ACCESSORY
mode or OFF.
114
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Setting and canceling the functions
To switch between set and canceled, follow the procedure below:
Vehicles without a smart key system: Close all the doors and
switch the engine switch to the “ON” position. (Perform step
within 20 seconds.)
Vehicles with a smart key system: Close all the doors and switch
the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode. (Perform step
within 20 seconds.)
Shift the shift lever to P or N,
and press and hold the
driver's door lock switch
(
or ) for
approximately 5 seconds and
then release.
The shift lever and switch posi-
tions corresponding to the
desired function to be set are
shown as follows.
Use the same procedure to cancel the function.
*
1
: Vehicles with a continuously variable transmission
*
2
: Vehicles with a smart key system
When the setting or canceling operation is complete, all doors are
locked and then unlocked.
1
2
2
2
Function
Shift lever
position
Driver’s door lock
switch position
Shift position linked door lock-
ing function
*
1
P
Shift position linked door
unlocking function
*
1
Speed linked door locking func-
tion
*
2
N
Driver's door linked door
unlocking function
115
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Switching the door unlock function (vehicles with a smart key system)
It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks using the wireless
remote control.
Turn the engine switch off.
When the indicator light on the key surface is not on, press and hold ,
or for approximately 5 seconds while pressing and holding
.
The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below.
(When changing the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at least
5 seconds, and repeat step .)
Vehicles with an alarm: To prevent unintended triggering of the alarm, unlock
the doors using the wireless remote control and open and close a door once
after the settings have been changed. (If a door is not opened within 60 sec-
onds after is pressed, the doors will be locked again and the alarm will
automatically be set.)
In case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. (P. 69)
1
2
2
Multi-information display
Unlocking
function
Beep
Monochrome
display
Color display
Holding the
driver’s door
handle unlocks
only the driver’s
door.
Exterior:
Beeps 3 times
Interior: Pings
once
Holding the front
passenger’s
door handle
unlocks all the
doors.
Holding either
front door han-
dle unlocks all
the doors.
Exterior:
Beeps twice
Interior: Pings
once
116
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Conditions affecting the operation of the smart key system or wireless
remote control (with a wireless remote control function)
Vehicles without a smart key system
The wireless remote control function may not operate normally in the follow-
ing situations:
● When the wireless key battery is depleted
● Near a TV tower, radio station, electric power plant, airport or other facility
that generates strong radio waves
● When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone or other wireless communi-
cation devices
● When multiple wireless keys are in the vicinity
● When the wireless key is in contact with, or is covered by a metallic object
● When a wireless key (that emits radio waves) is being used nearby
● When the wireless key has been left near an electrical appliance such as a
personal computer
● If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the
rear window
Vehicles with a smart key system
P. 125
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 564)
WARNING
■ To prevent an accident
Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out,
resulting in death or serious injury.
● Always use a seat belt.
● Always lock all the doors.
● Ensure that all doors are properly closed.
● Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.
The doors may be opened and the passengers are thrown out of the vehi-
cle and it may result in serious injury or death.
Be especially careful for the front doors, as the doors may be opened
even if the inside lock buttons are in locked position.
● Set the rear door child-protector locks when children are seated in the rear
seats.
117
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Pull up the lever to release the
trunk lid.
◆ Smart key system (if equipped)
While carrying the electronic
key, press the button on the
trunk lid.
When all the doors are unlocked
with the power door lock sys-
tem, the trunk can be opened
without carrying the electronic
key.
Trunk
The trunk can be opened using the trunk opener, entry function,
wireless remote control or key.
Opening the trunk from inside the vehicle
Opening the trunk from outside the vehicle
118
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
◆ Wireless remote control (if equipped)
Vehicles without a smart key system
Press and hold the switch.
Vehicles with a smart key system
Press and hold the switch.
◆ Key (vehicles with a key cylinder on the trunk lid)
Turn the key clockwise to
release the trunk lid.
119
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Operation signal (with a wireless remote control function)
A buzzer sounds to indicate that the trunk has been opened.
■ Trunk light
The trunk light turns on when the trunk is opened.
■ Function to prevent the trunk being locked with the electronic key inside
(vehicles with a smart key system)
● When all doors are being locked, closing the trunk lid with the electronic key
left inside the trunk will sound an alarm.
In this case, the trunk lid can be opened by pressing the trunk release but-
ton on the trunk lid.
● Even when the spare electronic key is put in the trunk with all the doors
locked, the key confinement prevention function can be activated so the
trunk can be opened. In order to prevent theft, take all electronic keys with
you when leaving the vehicle.
● Even when the electronic key is put in the trunk with all the doors are locked,
the key may not be detected depending on the places and the surrounding
radio wave conditions. In this case, the key confinement prevention function
cannot be activated, causing the doors to lock when the trunk is closed.
Make sure to check where the key is before closing the trunk.
● The key confinement prevention function cannot be activated if any one of
the doors is unlocked. In this case, open the trunk using the trunk opener.
■ Internal trunk release lever
■ Customization
The trunk unlocking operation can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 564)
The trunk lid can be opened by pushing
the glow-in-the-dark lever located on the
inside of the trunk lid to the side.
The lever will continue to glow for some
time after the trunk lid is closed.
120
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
■ Caution while driving
● Keep the trunk lid closed while driving.
If the trunk lid is left open, it may hit near-by objects while driving or lug-
gage in the trunk may be unexpectedly thrown out, causing an accident.
In addition, exhaust gases may enter the vehicle, causing death or a seri-
ous health hazard. Make sure to close the trunk lid before driving.
● Before driving the vehicle, make sure that the trunk lid is fully closed. If the
trunk lid is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving, caus-
ing an accident.
● Never let anyone sit in the trunk. In the event of sudden braking or a colli-
sion, they are susceptible to death or serious injury.
■ When a child is in the vehicle
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Do not allow a child to play in the trunk.
If a child is accidentally locked in the trunk, the child could suffer from heat
exhaustion, suffocation or other injuries.
● Do not allow a child to open or close the trunk lid.
Doing so may cause the trunk lid to operate unexpectedly, or cause the
child’s hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing trunk lid.
121
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
■ Using the trunk
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in seri-
ous injury.
● Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the trunk lid before
opening it. Failure to do so may cause the trunk lid to suddenly shut again
after it is opened.
● When opening or closing the trunk lid, thoroughly check to make sure the
surrounding area is safe.
● If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that
the trunk is about to open or close.
● Use caution when opening or closing the trunk lid in windy weather as it
may move abruptly in strong wind.
● Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Toyota parts to the trunk
lid. Such additional weight on the trunk lid may cause the lid to suddenly
shut again after it is opened.
● The trunk lid may suddenly shut if it is
not opened fully. It is more difficult to
open or close the trunk lid on an incline
than on a level surface, so beware of
the trunk lid unexpectedly opening or
closing by itself. Make sure that the
trunk lid is fully open and secure before
using the trunk.
● When closing the trunk lid, take extra
care to prevent your fingers etc. from
being caught.
● When closing the trunk lid, make sure to
press it lightly on its outer surface. If the
trunk handle is used to fully close the
trunk lid, it may result in hands or arms
being caught.
122
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
● Locks and unlocks the doors (P. 108)
● Opens the trunk (P. 117 )
● Starts the engine (P. 17 4 )
■ Antenna location
Smart key system
: If equipped
The following operations can be performed simply by carrying
the electronic key on your person, for example in your pocket.
(The driver should always carry the electronic key.)
Antennas outside the cabin
Antennas inside the cabin
Antenna inside the trunk
Antenna outside the trunk
1
2
3
4
123
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is detected)
■ Alarms and warning indicators
A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warning messages
shown on the multi-information display are used to prevent theft of the vehicle
and accidents resulting from erroneous operation. Take appropriate mea-
sures in response to any warning message on the multi-information display.
(P. 489)
The following table describes circumstances and correction procedures when
only alarms are sounded.
When locking or unlocking the
doors
The system can be operated when
the electronic key is within about 2.3
ft. (0.7 m) of either of the outside
front door handles. (Only the doors
detecting the key can be operated.)
When starting the engine or changing engine switch modes
The system can be operated when the electronic key is inside the
vehicle.
When opening the trunk
The system can be operated when the electronic key is within about
2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of the trunk release button.
Alarm Situation Correction procedure
Exterior alarm sounds
once for 5 seconds
An attempt was made
to lock the vehicle while
a door was open.
Close all of the doors
and lock the doors
again.
The trunk was closed
while the electronic key
was still inside the trunk
and all the doors were
locked.
Retrieve the electronic
key from the trunk and
close the trunk lid.
Interior alarm sounds
continuously
The engine switch was
turned to ACCESSORY
mode while the driver’s
door was open (or the
driver’s door was
opened while the
engine switch was in
ACCESSORY mode).
Turn the engine switch
off and close the
driver’s door.
124
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Battery-saving function
The battery-saving function will be activated in order to prevent the electronic
key battery and the vehicle battery from being discharged while the vehicle is
not in operation for a long time.
● In the following situations, the smart key system may take some time to
unlock the doors.
• The electronic key has been left in an area of approximately 6 ft. (2 m) of
the outside of the vehicle for 10 minutes or longer.
• The smart key system has not been used for 5 days or longer.
● If the smart key system has not been used for 14 days or longer, the doors
cannot be unlocked at any doors except the driver’s door. In this case, take
hold of the driver’s door handle, or use the wireless remote control or the
mechanical key, to unlock the doors.
■ Electronic Key Battery-Saving Function
When battery-saving mode is set, battery depletion is minimized by stopping
the electronic key from receiving radio waves.
Press twice while pressing and
holding . Confirm that the electronic
key indicator flashes 4 times.
While the battery-saving mode is set, the
smart key system cannot be used. To
cancel the function, press any of the elec-
tronic key buttons.
125
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Conditions affecting operation
The smart key system uses weak radio waves. In the following situations, the
communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may be affected,
preventing the smart key system, wireless remote control and engine immobi-
lizer system from operating properly. (Ways of coping: P. 523)
● When the electronic key battery is depleted
● Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large dis-
play, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical
noise
● When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other
wireless communication device
● When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following
metallic objects
• Cards to which aluminum foil is attached
• Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside
• Metallic wallets or bags
• Coins
• Hand warmers made of metal
• Media such as CDs and DVDs
● When other wireless keys (that emit radio waves) are being used nearby
● When carrying the electronic key together with the following devices that
emit radio waves
• Another vehicle’s electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio waves
• Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs)
• Digital audio players
• Portable game systems
● If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the
rear window
● When the electronic key is placed near a battery charger or electronic
devices
126
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Note for the entry function
● Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection areas),
the system may not operate properly in the following cases:
• The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle, near
the ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or unlocked.
• The electronic key is near the ground or in a high place, or too close to
the rear bumper center when the trunk is opened.
• The electronic key is on the instrument panel, rear package tray or floor,
or in the door pockets or glove box when the engine is started or engine
switch modes are changed.
● Do not leave the electronic key on top of the instrument panel or near the
door pockets when exiting the vehicle. Depending on the radio wave recep-
tion conditions, it may be detected by the antenna outside the cabin and the
doors will become lockable from the outside, possibly trapping the electronic
key inside the vehicle.
● As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may be
locked or unlocked by anyone. However, only the doors detecting the elec-
tronic key can be used to unlock the vehicle.
● Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to start
the engine if the electronic key is near the window.
● The doors may unlock or lock if a large amount of water splashes on the
door handle, such as in the rain or in a car wash, when the electronic key is
within the effective range. (The doors will automatically be locked after
approximately 60 seconds if the doors are not opened and closed.)
● If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic
key is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be
unlocked by the entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to unlock
the doors.)
● Touching the door lock or unlock sensor while wearing gloves may prevent
lock or unlock operation.
● When the lock operation is performed using the lock sensor, recognition sig-
nals will be shown up to two consecutive times. After this, no recognition
signals will be given.
● If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effec-
tive range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In this case, follow the
following correction procedures to wash the vehicle:
• Place the electronic key in a location 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from the
vehicle. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)
• Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart key
system. (P. 124)
127
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
● If the electronic key is inside the vehicle and a door handle becomes wet
during a car wash, a message may be shown on the multi-information dis-
play and a buzzer will sound outside the vehicle. To turn off the alarm, lock
all the doors.
● The lock sensor may not work properly if it comes into contact with ice,
snow, mud, etc. Clean the lock sensor and attempt to operate it again.
● If there is another electronic key in the detection area, it may take slightly
longer to unlock the doors after the door handle is gripped.
● Fingernails may scrape against the door during operation of the door han-
dle. Be careful not to injure fingernails or damage the surface of the door.
● A sudden handle operation or a handle operation immediately after entering
the effective range may prevent the doors from being unlocked. Touch the
door unlock sensor and check that the doors are unlocked before pulling the
door handle again.
● Unlocking the vehicle may take more time if another electronic key is within
the effective range.
■ When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods
● To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2
m) of the vehicle.
● The smart key system can be deactivated in advance. (P. 564)
■ To operate the system properly
Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get
the electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from the
outside of the vehicle.
Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the key
may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly. (The
alarm may go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention function may not
operate.)
■ If the smart key system does not operate properly
● Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the mechanical key. (P. 523)
● Starting the engine: P. 524
■ Customization
Settings (e. g. smart key system) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 564)
■ If the smart key system has been deactivated in a customized setting
● Locking and unlocking the doors and opening the trunk:
Use the wireless remote control or mechanical key. (P. 118, 523)
● Starting the engine and changing engine switch modes: P. 524
● Stopping the engine: P. 175
128
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Certification for the smart key system
For the U.S.A.
FCC ID: HYQ23AAB FCC ID: HYQ14FBA
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada
NOTE:
This device complies with Industry Canada’s licence-exempt RSSs. Opera-
tion is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause
interference; and (2) This device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
For the U.S.A.
FCC ID: NI4TMLF10-51
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada
This device complies with Industry Canada’s licence-exempt RSSs. Opera-
tion is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause
interference; and (2) This device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
NOTE:
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’lndustrie Canada appli-
cables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autori-
sée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage; (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
129
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
● People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization
therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should keep
away from the smart key system antennas. (P. 122)
The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary,
the entry function can be disabled. Ask your Toyota dealer for details, such
as the frequency of radio waves and timing of the emitted radio waves.
Then, consult your doctor to see if you should disable the entry function.
● User of any electrical medical device other than implantable cardiac pace-
makers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable
cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for
information about its operation under the influence of radio waves.
Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such
medical devices.
Ask your Toyota dealer for details for disabling the entry function.
130
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Manual seat
Power seat (driver’s side only)
Front seats
Adjustment procedure
Seat position adjustment lever
Seatback angle adjustment
lever
Vertical height adjustment
lever (driver’s side only)
1
2
3
Seat position adjustment
switch
Seatback angle adjustment
switch
Seat cushion (front) angle
adjustment switch
Vertical height adjustment
switch
1
2
3
4
131
3-3. Adjusting the seats
3
Operation of each component
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
■ Seat adjustment
● Be careful that the seat does not hit passengers or luggage.
● Do not recline the seat more than necessary when the vehicle is in motion
to reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply
restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the
shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of
an accident.
● Manual seat only: After adjusting the seat, make sure that the seat is
locked in position.
■ When adjusting the seat positions
Make sure to leave enough space around the feet so they do not get stuck.
132
3-3. Adjusting the seats
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Stow the rear outside seat belt
buckles and stow the rear cen-
ter seat belt buckle as shown.
Pull the seatback lock release
knob and fold the seatback
down.
Rear seats
The seatbacks of the rear seats can be folded down.
Folding down the rear seatbacks
1
2
133
3-3. Adjusting the seats
3
Operation of each component
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
■ When folding the rear seatbacks down
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
● Do not fold the seatbacks down while driving.
● Stop the vehicle on level ground, set the parking brake and shift the shift
lever to P (continuously variable transmission) or N (manual transmission).
● Do not allow anyone to sit on a folded seatback or in the trunk while driv-
ing.
● Do not allow children to enter the trunk.
● Do not allow anyone to sit on the rear center seat if the rear right seat is
folded down, as the seat belt buckle for the rear center seat belt is then
concealed under the folded seat and cannot be used.
● Be careful not to catch your hand when folding the rear seatbacks.
● Adjust the position of the front seat before folding down the rear seatbacks
so that the front seat does not interfere with the rear seatbacks when fold-
ing down the rear seatbacks.
■ After returning the seatback to the upright position
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
● Check that the seat belts are not twisted or caught under the seat.
NOTICE
■ When the rear right seatback is folded down
Make sure the luggage loaded in the enlarged trunk will not damage the
webbing of the rear center seat belt.
● Make sure that the seatback is securely
locked in position by lightly rocking it
back and forth.
If the seatback is not securely locked,
the red marking will be visible on the
seatback lock release knob. Make sure
that the red marking is not visible.
134
3-3. Adjusting the seats
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Up
Pull the head restraints up.
Down
Push the head restraint down while
pressing the lock release button.
Type A
Up
Pull the head restraints up.
Down
Push the head restraint down while
pressing the lock release button.
Type B
Up
Pull the head restraints up.
Down
Push the head restraint down while
pressing the lock release button.
Head restraints
Head restraints are provided for all seats.
Front seats
Lock release button
1
2
Rear seats
Lock release buttons
1
2
Lock release button
1
2
135
3-3. Adjusting the seats
3
Operation of each component
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Removing the head restraints (except for fixed rear head restraints)
■ Installing the head restraints (except for fixed rear head restraints)
Front seats and rear outside seats
Rear center seat
■ Adjusting the height of the head restraints (except for fixed rear head
restraints)
■ Adjusting the rear center seat head restraint
Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed position when
using.
Pull the head restraint up while pressing
the lock release button.
Align the head restraint with the installa-
tion holes and push it down to the lock
position.
Press and hold the lock release button
when lowering the head restraint.
Align the head restraint with the installa-
tion holes and push it down to the lowest
lock position while pressing the lock
release button.
Make sure that the head restraints are
adjusted so that the center of the head
restraint is closest to the top of your ears.
Lock
release
button
Lock release
button
Lock release
button
136
3-3. Adjusting the seats
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
■ Head restraint precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to
do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.
● Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.
● After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure
they are locked in position.
● Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
137
3
Operation of each component
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
Hold the steering wheel and
push the lever down.
Adjust to the ideal position by
moving the steering wheel hori-
zontally and vertically.
After adjustment, pull the lever up
to secure the steering wheel.
To sound the horn, press on or
close to the mark.
Steering wheel
Adjustment procedure
1
2
Horn
138
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
■ Caution while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an acci-
dent, resulting in death or serious injury.
■ After adjusting the steering wheel
Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.
Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an
accident, and resulting in death or serious injury. Also, the horn may not
sound if the steering wheel is not securely locked.
139
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
3
Operation of each component
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
The height of the rear view mirror can be adjusted to suit your driving
posture.
Adjust the height of the rear view
mirror by moving it up and down.
Manual anti-glare inside rear view mirror
Reflected light from the headlights of vehicles behind can be reduced
by operating the lever.
Normal position
Anti-glare position
Inside rear view mirror
The rear view mirror’s position can be adjusted to enable suffi-
cient confirmation of the rear view.
Adjusting the height of rear view mirror
Anti-glare function
1
2
140
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror
Responding to the level of brightness of the headlights of vehicles
behind, the reflected light is automatically reduced.
Changing automatic anti-glare
function mode
On/off
When the automatic anti-glare
function is in ON mode, the indica-
tor illuminates.
Vehicles without a smart key sys-
tem: The function will set to ON
mode each time the engine switch
is turned to the “ON” position.
Pressing the button turns the func-
tion to OFF mode. (The indicator
also turns off.)
Vehicles with a smart key system: The function will set to ON mode each
time the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode.
Pressing the button turns the function to OFF mode. (The indicator also
turns off.)
■ To prevent sensor error (vehicles with an auto anti-glare inside rear view
mirror)
Indicator
To ensure that the sensors operate prop-
erly, do not touch or cover them.
WARNING
Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.
Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and cause an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
141
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
3
Operation of each component
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
To select a mirror to adjust,
press the switch.
Left
Right
To adjust the mirror, press the
switch.
Up
Right
Down
Left
Push the mirror back in the direc-
tion of the vehicle’s rear.
Outside rear view mirrors
Adjustment procedure
1
1
2
2
1
2
3
4
Folding the mirrors
142
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Mirror angle can be adjusted when
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
■ When the mirrors are fogged up (if equipped)
The outside rear view mirrors can be cleared using the mirror defoggers. Turn
on the rear window defogger to turn on the outside rear view mirror defog-
gers. (P. 368, 376)
WARNING
■ Important points while driving
Observe the following precautions while driving.
Failure to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an
accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
● Do not drive with the mirrors folded.
● Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly
adjusted before driving.
■ When a mirror is moving
To avoid personal injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to get your
hand caught by the moving mirror.
■ When the mirror defoggers are operating (if equipped)
Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot
and burn you.
143
3
Operation of each component
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
3-5. Opening and closing the windows
The power windows can be opened and closed using the switches.
Operating the switch moves the windows as follows:
Closing
One-touch closing (driver’s win-
dow only)
*
Opening
One-touch opening (driver’s
window only)
*
*
: To stop the window partway, oper-
ate the switch in the opposite direc-
tion.
Press the switch to lock the pas-
senger window switches.
Use this switch to prevent children
from accidentally opening or clos-
ing a passenger window.
Power windows
Opening and closing procedures
1
2
3
4
Window lock switch
144
3-5. Opening and closing the windows
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ The power windows can be operated when
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Operating the power windows after turning the engine off
Vehicles without a smart key system
The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even
after the engine switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. They can-
not, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even
after the engine switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. They
cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
■ Jam protection function (driver’s window only)
If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame, win-
dow travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly.
145
3-5. Opening and closing the windows
3
Operation of each component
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ When the power window does not close normally (driver’s window only)
If the jam protection function is operating abnormally and a window cannot be
closed, perform the following operations using the power window switch on
the driver’s door.
● Vehicles without a smart key system: After stopping the vehicle, the window
can be closed by holding the power window switch in the one-touch closing
position while the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system: After stopping the vehicle, the window
can be closed by holding the power window switch in the one-touch closing
position while the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode.
● If the window still cannot be closed even by carrying out the operation as
explained above, initialize the function by performing the following proce-
dure.
Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position. Continue
holding the switch for a further 6 seconds after the window has closed.
Hold the power window switch in the one-touch opening position. Con-
tinue holding the switch for a further 2 seconds after the window has
opened completely.
Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position once
again. Continue holding the switch for a further 2 seconds after the win-
dow has closed.
If you release the switch while the window is moving, start again from the
beginning.
If the window continues to close but then re-open slightly even after perform-
ing the above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
1
2
3
146
3-5. Opening and closing the windows
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ Closing the windows
● The driver is responsible for all the power window operations, including the
operation for the passengers. In order to prevent accidental operation,
especially by a child, do not let a child operate the power windows. It is
possible for children and other passengers to have body parts caught in
the power window. Also, when riding with a child, it is recommended to use
the window lock switch.(P. 143)
● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body
in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.
● When exiting the vehicle, turn the engine switch off, carry the key and exit
the vehicle along with the child. There may be accidental operation, due to
mischief, etc., that may possibly lead to an accident.
■ Jam protection function (driver’s window only)
● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection
function.
● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just
before the window fully closes.
147
3-5. Opening and closing the windows
3
Operation of each component
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Opening and closing
Opens
the moon roof
*
The moon roof stops slightly
before the fully open position to
reduce wind noise.
Press the switch again to fully
open the moon roof.
Closes
the moon roof
*
*
: Lightly press the switch in either
direction to stop the moon roof
partway.
■
Tilt up and down
T
ilts the moon roof up
*
Tilts the moon roof down
*
*: Lightly press either of the moon
roof switches to stop the moon
roof partway.
Moon roof
: If equipped
Use the overhead switches to open and close the moon roof and
tilt it up and down.
1
2
1
2
148
3-5. Opening and closing the windows
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ The moon roof can be operated when
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Operating the moon roof after turning the engine off
Vehicles without a smart key system
The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the
engine switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. It cannot, however,
be operated once either front door is opened.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the
engine switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. It cannot, how-
ever, be operated once either front door is opened.
■ Jam protection function
If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while the moon
roof is closing or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens
slightly.
■ Sunshade
The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade
will open automatically when the moon roof is opened.
149
3-5. Opening and closing the windows
3
Operation of each component
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ When the moon roof does not close normally
Perform the following procedure:
● If the moon roof closes but then re-opens slightly
Stop the vehicle.
Press and hold the “CLOSE” switch.
*
1
The moon roof will close, reopen and pause for approximately 10 sec-
onds.
*
2
Then it will close again, tilt up and pause for approximately 1 sec-
ond. Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.
Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then
release the switch.
● If the moon roof tilts down but then tilts back up
Stop the vehicle.
Press and hold the “UP” switch
*
1
until the moon roof moves into the tilt
up position and stops.
Release the “UP” switch once and then press and hold the “UP” switch
again.
*
1
The moon roof will pause for approximately 10 seconds in the tilt up posi-
tion.
*
2
Then it will adjust slightly and pause for approximately 1 second.
Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.
Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then
release the switch.
*
1
: If the switch is released at the incorrect time, the procedure will have to
be performed again from the beginning.
*
2
: If the switch is released after the above mentioned 10 second pause,
automatic operation will be disabled. In that case, press and hold the
open/close switch in the close position or press and hold the “UP” switch.
The moon roof will tilt up and pause for approximately 1 second. Then it
will tilt down, open and close. Check to make sure that the moon roof is
completely closed and then release the switch.
If the moon roof does not fully close even after performing the above proce-
dure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
■ Moon roof open reminder function
An alarm will sound when the driver’s door is opened with the moon roof not
fully closed and the engine switch off.
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
150
3-5. Opening and closing the windows
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
■ Opening the moon roof
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehi-
cle while it is moving.
● Do not sit on top of the moon roof.
■ Closing the moon roof
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● The driver is responsible for moon roof opening and closing operations.
In order to prevent accidental operation, especially by a child, do not let a
child operate the moon roof. It is possible for children and other passen-
gers to have body parts caught in the moon roof.
● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their bod-
ies in a position where they could be caught when the moon roof is being
operated.
● When exiting the vehicle, turn the engine switch off, carry the key and exit
the vehicle along with the child. There may be accidental operation, due to
mischief, etc., that may possibly lead to an accident.
■ Jam protection function
● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection
function.
● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just
before the moon roof fully closes.
151
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
4-1. Before driving
Driving the vehicle............. 152
Cargo and luggage ........... 163
Vehicle load limits ............. 166
Trailer towing..................... 167
Dinghy towing (vehicles
with a continuously
variable transmission)..... 168
Dinghy towing (vehicles
with a manual
transmission)................... 169
4-2. Driving procedures
Engine (ignition) switch
(vehicles without a
smart key system)........... 171
Engine (ignition) switch
(vehicles with a
smart key system)........... 174
Continuously variable
transmission
(vehicles without paddle
shift switches) ................. 181
Continuously variable
transmission
(vehicles with paddle
shift switches) ................. 184
Manual transmission ......... 189
Turn signal lever................ 191
Parking brake.................... 192
4-3. Operating the lights
and wipers
Headlight switch................ 193
Automatic High Beam ....... 198
Windshield wipers
and washer ..................... 202
4-4. Refueling
Opening the fuel
tank cap .......................... 204
4-5. Using the driving
support systems
Toyota Safety Sense P ..... 207
PCS
(Pre-Collision System) .... 214
LDA
(Lane Departure Alert
with steering control)....... 226
Dynamic radar cruise
control ............................. 235
Rear view monitor
system ............................ 247
Driving assist systems ...... 257
4-6. Driving tips
Winter driving tips ............. 263
152
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
4-1. Before driving
P. 171, 174
Continuously variable transmission
With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D.
(P. 181, 184)
Release the parking brake. (P. 19 2 )
Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelera-
tor pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
Manual transmission
While depressing the clutch pedal, shift the shift lever to 1.
(P. 189)
Release the parking brake. (P. 19 2 )
Gradually release the clutch pedal. At the same time, gently
depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
Continuously variable transmission
With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
If necessary, set the parking brake.
If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift
lever to P or N. (P. 181, 184)
Manual transmission
While depressing the clutch pedal, depress the brake pedal.
If necessary, set the parking brake.
If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift
lever to N. (P. 189)
Driving the vehicle
The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe
driving:
Starting the engine
Driving
Stopping
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
1
2
153
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Continuously variable transmission
With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
Set the parking brake (P. 192), and shift the shift lever to P.
(P. 181, 184)
Vehicles without a smart key system: Turn the engine switch to the
“LOCK” position to stop the engine.
Vehicles with a smart key system: Press the engine switch to stop
the engine.
Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your person.
If parking on a hill, block the wheels as needed.
Manual transmission
While depressing the clutch pedal, depress the brake pedal.
Shift the shift lever to N. (P. 189)
If parking on a hill, shift the shift lever to 1 or R.
Set the parking brake. (P. 1 9 2)
Vehicles without a smart key system: Turn the engine switch to the
“LOCK” position to stop the engine.
Vehicles with a smart key system: Press the engine switch to stop
the engine.
Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your person.
If parking on a hill, block the wheels as needed.
Parking the vehicle
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
154
4-1. Before driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Continuously variable transmission
Make sure that the parking brake is set and shift the shift lever to D.
Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
Release the parking brake.
Manual transmission
With the parking brake firmly set and the clutch pedal fully
depressed, shift the shift lever to 1.
Lightly depress the accelerator pedal at the same time as gradually
releasing the clutch pedal.
Release the parking brake.
■ When starting off on an uphill
The hill-start assist control will activate. (P. 257)
■ Driving in the rain
● Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the win-
dows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.
● Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be espe-
cially slippery.
● Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain,
because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road sur-
face, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly.
Starting off on a steep uphill
1
2
3
1
2
3
155
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Engine speed while driving (vehicles with a continuously variable trans-
mission)
In the following conditions, the engine speed may become high while driving.
This is due to automatic up-shifting control or down-shifting implementation to
meet driving conditions. It does not indicate sudden acceleration.
● The vehicle is judged to be driving uphill or downhill
● When the accelerator pedal is released
● When the brake pedal is depressed while sport mode is selected (if
equipped)
● When the brake pedal is depressed suddenly and vehicle speed is reduced
sharply
■ Breaking in your new Toyota
To extend the life of the vehicle, observing the following precautions is recom-
mended:
● For the first 186 miles (300 km):
Avoid sudden stops.
● For the first 621 miles (1000 km):
• Do not drive at extremely high speeds.
• Avoid sudden acceleration.
• Do not drive continuously in low gears.
• Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.
■ Operating your vehicle in a foreign country
Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability
of the correct fuel. (P. 540)
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ When starting the vehicle (vehicles with a continuously variable trans-
mission)
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine
running. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.
156
4-1. Before driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ When driving the vehicle
● Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accel-
erator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.
• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake
pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident.
• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a diffi-
culty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.
• Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the
vehicle only slightly. This allows you to depress the brake and accelera-
tor pedals properly.
• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake
pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, result-
ing in an accident.
● Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.
The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. These hot
parts may cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.
● During normal driving, do not turn off the engine. Turning the engine off
while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the
power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to
steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it
is safe to do so.
However, in the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible
to stop the vehicle in the normal way: P. 471
● Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving
down a steep hill.
Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose
effectiveness. (P. 181, 184, 189)
● Do not adjust the display, the positions of the steering wheel, the seat, or
the inside or outside rear view mirrors while driving.
Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control.
● Always check that all passengers’ arms, heads or other parts of their body
are not outside the vehicle.
● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit per-
mits it, do not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has high-
speed capability tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire
failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer
to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high-speed capability
tires or not before driving at such speeds.
157
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ When driving on slippery road surfaces
● Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and
reduce your ability to control the vehicle.
● Sudden acceleration, engine braking due to shifting, or changes in engine
speed could cause the vehicle to skid.
● After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make
sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent
the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet
and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected.
■ When shifting the shift lever
● Vehicles with a continuously variable transmission: Do not let the vehicle
roll backward while the shift lever is in a driving position, or roll forward
while the shift lever is in R.
Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering
performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle.
● Vehicles with a continuously variable transmission: Do not shift the shift
lever to P while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle
control.
● Do not shift the shift lever to R while the vehicle is moving forward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle
control.
● Do not shift the shift lever to a driving position while the vehicle is moving
backward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle
control.
● Moving the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving will disengage the
engine from the transmission. Engine braking is not available when N is
selected.
● Vehicles with a continuously variable transmission: Be careful not to shift
the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. Shifting the shift lever
to a gear other than P or N may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of
the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious
injury.
158
4-1. Before driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indica-
tors)
Have the brake pads checked and replaced by your Toyota dealer as soon
as possible.
Rotor damage may result if the pads are not replaced when needed.
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads
and/or those of the brake discs are exceeded.
■ When the vehicle is stopped
● Do not race the engine.
If the vehicle is in any gear other than P (continuously variable transmis-
sion) or N, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly and unexpectedly, caus-
ing an accident.
● Vehicles with a continuously variable transmission: In order to prevent
accidents due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep depressing the
brake pedal while the engine is running, and apply the parking brake as
necessary.
● If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused
by the vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal
and securely apply the parking brake as needed.
● Avoid revving or racing the engine.
Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause
the exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible
material is nearby.
■ When the vehicle is parked
● Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in
the vehicle when it is in the sun.
Doing so may result in the following:
• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a
fire.
• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and
plastic material of glasses to deform or crack.
• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the
interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle’s
electrical components.
159
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ When the vehicle is parked
● Do not leave cigarette lighters in the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a
place such as the glove box or on the floor, it may be lit accidentally when
luggage is loaded or the seat is adjusted, causing a fire.
● Do not attach adhesive discs to the windshield or windows. Do not place
containers such as air fresheners on the instrument panel or dashboard.
Adhesive discs or containers may act as lenses, causing a fire in the vehi-
cle.
● Do not leave a door or window open if the curved glass is coated with a
metallized film such as a silver-colored one. Reflected sunlight may cause
the glass to act as a lens, causing a fire.
● Vehicles with a continuously variable transmission: Always apply the park-
ing brake, shift the shift lever to P, stop the engine and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.
If the vehicle is parked with the shift lever in P but the parking brake is not
set, the vehicle may start to move, possibly leading to an accident.
Vehicles with a manual transmission: Always apply the parking brake,
stop the engine and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.
● Do not touch the exhaust pipes while the engine is running or immediately
after turning the engine off.
Doing so may cause burns.
■ When taking a nap in the vehicle
Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, if you accidentally move the shift
lever or depress the accelerator pedal, this could cause an accident or fire
due to engine overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly
ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to
death or a serious health hazard.
160
4-1. Before driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ When braking
● When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.
Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and this may cause
one side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also, the
parking brake may not securely hold the vehicle.
● If the brake booster device does not operate, do not follow other vehicles
closely and avoid hills or sharp turns that require braking.
In this case, braking is still possible, but the brake pedal should be
depressed more firmly than usual. Also, the braking distance will increase.
Have your brakes fixed immediately.
● Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.
Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted
brakes.
● The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems; if one of the
systems fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal
should be depressed more firmly than usual and the braking distance will
increase.
Have your brakes fixed immediately.
NOTICE
■ When driving the vehicle (vehicles with a continuously variable trans-
mission)
● Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during
driving, as this may restrain the engine output.
● Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake
pedals at the same time to hold the vehicle on a hill.
161
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
NOTICE
■ When driving the vehicle (vehicles with a manual transmission)
● Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during
driving, as this may restrain the engine output.
● Do not shift gears unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed. After shifting,
do not release the clutch pedal abruptly. Doing so may damage the clutch,
transmission and gears.
● Observe the following to prevent the clutch from being damaged.
• Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving.
Doing so may cause clutch trouble.
• Do not use any gear other than the 1st gear when starting off and mov-
ing forward.
Doing so may damage the clutch.
• Do not use the clutch to hold the vehicle when stopping on an uphill
grade.
Doing so may damage the clutch.
● Do not shift the shift lever to R when the vehicle is still moving. Doing so
may damage the clutch, transmission and gears.
■ When parking the vehicle (vehicles with a continuously variable trans-
mission)
Always set the parking brake, and shift the shift lever to P. Failure to do so
may cause the vehicle to move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if
the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed.
■ Avoiding damage to vehicle parts
● Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for
an extended period of time.
Doing so may damage the power steering motor.
● When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid
damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.
162
4-1. Before driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
NOTICE
■ If you get a flat tire while driving
A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and gradually depress the brake pedal to slow down the vehi-
cle.
● It may be difficult to control your vehicle.
● The vehicle will make abnormal sounds or vibrations.
● The vehicle will lean abnormally.
Information on what to do in case of a flat tire (P. 509)
■ When encountering flooded roads
Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may
cause the following serious damage to the vehicle:
● Engine stalling
● Short in electrical components
● Engine damage caused by water immersion
In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be
sure to have your Toyota dealer check the following:
● Brake function
● Changes in quantity and quality of engine oil, transaxle fluid, etc.
● Lubricant condition for the bearings and suspension joints (where possi-
ble), and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.
163
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) — (Total weight of occupants)
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit —
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s
placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and lug-
gage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be
five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 750 (5150) =
650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your
vehicle.
(P. 1 6 6)
Toyota does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Your
vehicle is not designed for trailer towing.
Cargo and luggage
Take notice of the following information about storage precau-
tions, cargo capacity and load:
Capacity and distribution
164
4-1. Before driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Cargo capacity
Total load capacity (vehicle
capacity weight) (P. 538)
When 2 people with the combined weight of A lb. (kg) are riding in
your vehicle, which has a total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight)
of B lb. (kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity
will be C lb. (kg) as follows:
B
*
2
lb. (kg) - A*
1
lb. (kg) = C*
3
lb. (kg)
*
1
: A =Weight of people
*
2
: B =Total load capacity
*
3
: C =Available cargo and luggage load
In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of D
lb. (kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced E
lb. (kg) as follows:
C lb. (kg) - D*
4
lb. (kg) = E*
5
lb. (kg)
*
4
: D =Additional weight of people
*
5
: E =Available cargo and luggage load
As shown in the example above, if the number of occupants
increases, the cargo and luggage load will be reduced by an amount
that equals the increased weight due to the additional occupants. In
other words, if an increase in the number of occupants causes an
excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus
cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on
your vehicle.
Calculation formula for your vehicle
1
2
165
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
■ Things that must not be carried in the trunk
The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the trunk:
● Receptacles containing gasoline
● Aerosol cans
■ Storage precautions
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may prevent the pedals from being depressed properly,
may block the driver’s vision, or may result in items hitting the driver or
passengers, possibly causing an accident.
● Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible.
● To prevent cargo and luggage from sliding forward during braking, do
not stack anything in the enlarged trunk. Keep cargo and luggage low,
as close to the floor as possible.
● Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations.
• At the feet of the driver
• On the front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)
• On the package tray
• On the instrument panel
• On the dashboard
• Tray that has no lid
● Secure all items in the occupant compartment.
● When you fold down the rear seats, long items should not be placed
directly behind the front seats.
● Never allow anyone to ride in the enlarged trunk. It is not designed for
passengers. They should ride in their seats with their seat belts prop-
erly fastened.
■ Capacity and distribution
● Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle
weight rating.
● Even if the total load of occupant's weight and the cargo load is less
than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper
loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which
may cause death or serious injury.
166
4-1. Before driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
◆ Total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight): (P. 5 38 )
Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo
and luggage.
◆ Seating capacity: 5 occupants (Front 2, Rear 3)
Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose
estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.
◆ Towing capacity
Toyota does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.
◆ Cargo capacity
Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight
and the number of occupants.
■ Total load capacity and seating capacity
These details are also described on the tire and loading information label.
(P. 448)
Vehicle load limits
Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity,
towing capacity and cargo capacity.
WARNING
■ Overloading the vehicle
Do not overload the vehicle.
It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering
and braking ability, resulting in an accident.
167
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Trailer towing
Toyota does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.
Toyota also does not recommend the installation of a tow hitch
or the use of a tow hitch carrier for a wheelchair, scooter, bicy-
cle, etc. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing or for the
use of tow hitch mounted carriers.
168
4-1. Before driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Dinghy towing (vehicles with a continu-
ously variable transmission)
Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels
on the ground) behind a motor home.
NOTICE
■ To avoid serious damage to your vehicle
Do not tow your vehicle with four wheels on the ground.
169
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
To prevent damage to your vehicle, perform the following procedures
before towing.
Shift the shift lever to N.
Turn the engine switch to the “ACC” position (without a smart key
system) or ACCESSORY mode (with a smart key system).
(P. 171, 176)
Ensure that the audio system and other powered devices are turned off.
Release the parking brake.
After towing, leave the engine in idle for at least 3 minutes before driving
the vehicle.
■ Necessary equipment and accessories
Specialized equipment and accessories are required for dinghy towing. Con-
tact the service branch of the motor home manufacturer regarding recom-
mended equipment.
Dinghy towing (vehicles with a manual
transmission)
Your vehicle can be dinghy towed in a forward direction (with 4
wheels on the ground) behind a motor home.
Towing your vehicle with 4 wheels on the ground
1
2
3
170
4-1. Before driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
NOTICE
■ Dinghy towing direction
■ To prevent the steering from locking
Vehicles without a smart key system: Ensure the engine switch is in the
“ACC” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system: Ensure the engine switch is in ACCES-
SORY mode.
Do not tow the vehicle backwards.
Doing so may cause serious damage.
171
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
4-2. Driving procedures
Continuously variable transmission
Check that the parking brake is set.
Check that the shift lever is set in P.
Firmly depress the brake pedal.
Turn the engine switch to the “START” position and start the
engine.
Manual transmission
Check that the parking brake is set.
Check that the shift lever is set in N.
Firmly depress the clutch pedal.
Turn the engine switch to the “START” position and start the
engine.
“LOCK”
The steering wheel is locked and
the key can be removed. (Vehicles
with a continuously variable trans-
mission: The key can be removed
only when the shift lever is in P.)
“ACC”
Some electrical components such
as the audio system can be used.
“ON”
All electrical components can be used.
“START”
For starting the engine.
Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles without a
smart key system)
Starting the engine
Changing the engine switch positions
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
172
4-2. Driving procedures
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Turning the key from “ACC” to “LOCK”
Shift the shift lever to P (continuously variable transmission) or N (manual
transmission). (P. 181, 184, 189)
■ If the engine does not start
The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 67)
Contact your Toyota dealer.
■ When the steering lock cannot be released
■ Key reminder function
A buzzer sounds if the driver’s door is opened while the engine switch is in
the “LOCK” or “ACC” position to remind you to remove the key.
Push in the key and turn it to the
“LOCK” position.
1
2
When starting the engine, the engine
switch may seem stuck in the “LOCK”
position. To free it, turn the key while turn-
ing the steering wheel slightly left and
right.
WARNING
■ When starting the engine
Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress the
accelerator pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Caution when driving
Do not turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position while driving. If, in an
emergency, you must turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving, turn
the engine switch only to the “ACC” position to stop the engine. An accident
may result if the engine is stopped while driving. (P. 471)
173
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the engine switch in the “ACC” or “ON” position for long peri-
ods of time without the engine running.
■ When starting the engine
● Do not crank the engine for more than 30 seconds at a time. This may
overheat the starter and wiring system.
● Do not race a cold engine.
● If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have your vehi-
cle checked by your Toyota dealer immediately.
174
4-2. Driving procedures
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Check that the parking brake is set.
Continuously variable transmission: Check that the shift lever is set
in P. Firmly depress the brake pedal.
Manual transmission: Check that the shift lever is set in N. Firmly
depress the clutch pedal.
will be displayed on the multi-information display.
If it is not displayed, the engine cannot be started.
Press the engine switch shortly
and firmly.
When operating the engine switch,
one short, firm press is enough. It
is not necessary to press and hold
the switch.
The engine will crank until it starts
or for up to 30 seconds, whichever
is less.
Continue depressing the brake
pedal (continuously variable trans-
mission) or clutch pedal (manual
transmission) until the engine is
completely started.
The engine can be started from any engine switch mode.
Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles with a
smart key system)
Performing the following operations when carrying the elec-
tronic key on your person starts the engine or changes engine
switch modes.
Starting the engine
1
2
3
175
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Continuously variable transmission
Stop the vehicle.
Set the parking brake (P. 192), and shift the shift lever to P.
Press the engine switch.
Release the brake pedal and check that “Power On” on the multi-
information display is off.
Manual transmission
Stop the vehicle.
Shift the shift lever to N.
Set the parking brake. (P. 1 9 2)
Press the engine switch.
Release the clutch pedal and check that “Power On” on the multi-
information display is off.
Stopping the engine
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
176
4-2. Driving procedures
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Modes can be changed by pressing the engine switch with the brake
pedal (continuously variable transmission) or clutch pedal (manual
transmission) released. (The mode changes each time the switch is
pressed.)
Off
*
The emergency flashers can be
used.
The multi-information display will
not be displayed.
ACCESSORY mode
Some electrical components such
as the audio system can be used.
“Power On” will be displayed on
the multi-information display.
IGNITION ON mode
All electrical components can be
used.
“Power On” will be displayed on the multi-information display.
*: Vehicles with a continuously variable transmission: If the shift lever is in a
position other than P when turning off the engine, the engine switch will be
turned to ACCESSORY mode, not to off.
Changing engine switch modes
177
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
If the engine is stopped with the shift lever in a position other than P,
the engine switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to
ACCESSORY mode. Perform the following procedure to turn the
switch off:
Check that the parking brake is set.
Shift the shift lever to P.
Check that “Power On” and “Turn Off Vehicle”/“TURN POWER
OFF” are displayed alternately on the multi-information display and
then press the engine switch once.
Check that “Power On” and “Turn Off Vehicle”/“TURN POWER
OFF” on the multi-information display are off.
■ Message displays
Message displays used in this section are intended as examples, and may
differ from the image that is actually displayed on the multi-information dis-
play.
■ Auto power off function
Vehicles with a continuously variable transmission
If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than 20 minutes or IGNI-
TION ON mode (the engine is not running) for more than an hour with the
shift lever in P, the engine switch will automatically turn off. However, this
function cannot entirely prevent battery discharge. Do not leave the vehicle
with the engine switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode for long peri-
ods of time when the engine is not running.
Vehicles with a manual transmission
If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than 20 minutes or IGNI-
TION ON mode (the engine is not running) for more than an hour, the engine
switch will automatically turn off. However, this function cannot entirely pre-
vent battery discharge. Do not leave the vehicle with the engine switch in
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode for long periods of time when the
engine is not running.
When stopping the engine with the shift lever in a position other
than P (vehicles with a continuously variable transmission)
1
2
3
4
178
4-2. Driving procedures
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Electronic key battery depletion
P. 105
■ Conditions affecting operation
P. 125
■ Notes for the entry function
P. 126
■ If the engine does not start
● The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 67)
Contact your Toyota dealer.
● Vehicles with a continuously variable transmission: Check that the shift lever
is securely set in P. The engine may not start if the shift lever is displaced
out of P.
“Shift to P position to Start” will be displayed on the multi-information dis-
play.
■ Steering lock
After turning the engine switch off and opening and closing the doors, the
steering wheel will be locked due to the steering lock function. Operating the
engine switch again automatically cancels the steering lock.
■ When the steering lock cannot be released
Vehicles with a manual transmission: Press the engine switch while turning
the steering wheel left and right.
■ Steering lock motor overheating prevention
To prevent the steering lock motor from overheating, the motor may be sus-
pended if the engine is turned on and off repeatedly in a short period of time.
In this case, refrain from operating the engine. After about 10 seconds, the
steering lock motor will resume functioning.
“Steering Lock Active” will be displayed on
the multi-information display.
Vehicles with a continuously variable
transmission: Check that the shift lever is
set in P. Press the engine switch while
turning the steering wheel left and right.
179
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ When “Smart Key System Malfunction See Owner's Manual”/“CHECK
SMART KEY SYSTEM” will be displayed on the multi-information display
The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer immediately.
■ If the electronic key battery is depleted
P. 455
■ Operation of the engine switch
● If the switch is not pressed shortly and firmly, the engine switch mode may
not change or the engine may not start.
● If attempting to restart the engine immediately after turning the engine
switch off, the engine may not start in some cases. After turning the engine
switch off, please wait a few seconds before restarting the engine.
■ If the smart key system has been deactivated in a customized setting
P. 523
WARNING
■ When starting the engine
Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress the
accelerator pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Caution while driving
If engine failure occurs while the vehicle is moving, do not lock or open the
doors until the vehicle reaches a safe and complete stop. Activation of the
steering lock in this circumstance may lead to an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
■ Stopping the engine in an emergency
If you want to stop the engine in an emergency while driving the vehicle,
press and hold the engine switch for more than 2 seconds, or press it briefly
3 times or more in succession. (P. 471)
However, do not touch the engine switch while driving except in an emer-
gency. Turning the engine off while driving will not cause loss of steering or
braking control, but the power assist to these systems will be lost. This will
make it more difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
180
4-2. Driving procedures
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
● Do not leave the engine switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode
for long periods of time without the engine running.
● If “Power On” is displayed on the multi-information display, the engine
switch is not off. When exiting the vehicle, always check that the engine
switch is off.
● Vehicles with a continuously variable transmission:
Do not stop the engine when the shift lever is in a position other than P. If
the engine is stopped in another shift lever position, the engine switch will
not be turned off but instead be turned to ACCESSORY mode. If the vehi-
cle is left in ACCESSORY mode, battery discharge may occur.
■ When starting the engine
● Do not race a cold engine.
● If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have your vehi-
cle checked by your Toyota dealer immediately.
■ Symptoms indicating a malfunction with the engine switch
If the engine switch seems to be operating somewhat differently than usual,
such as the switch sticking slightly, there may be a malfunction. Contact
your Toyota dealer immediately.
181
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Vehicles without a smart key system:
While the engine switch is in the “ON” position, depress the
brake pedal and move the shift lever.
Vehicles with a smart key system:
While the engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode, depress the
brake pedal and move the shift lever.
When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure that the
vehicle is completely stopped.
Continuously variable transmission (vehi-
cles without paddle shift switches)
: If equipped
Shifting the shift lever
182
4-2. Driving procedures
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
*: To improve fuel efficiency and reduce noises, set the shift lever in D for
normal driving.
Press the switch.
Suitable for enhancing the fuel
economy, because the torque cor-
responding to the accelerator
pedal depression amount can be
generated more smoothly than it is
in normal conditions and the oper-
ation of the air conditioning system
(heating/cooling) will be minimized.
Press the switch again to return to
normal mode.
■ When driving with the dynamic radar cruise control activated
Even when performing the following actions with the intent of enabling engine
braking, engine braking will not activate while downshifting to S because the
dynamic radar
cruise control will not be canceled. (P. 235)
■ Shift lock system
The shift lock system is a system to prevent accidental operation of the shift
lever in starting.
The shift lever can be shifted from P only when the engine switch is in the
“ON” position (vehicles without a smart key system) or IGNITION ON mode
(vehicles with a smart key system) and the brake pedal is being depressed.
Shift position purpose
Shift position Objective or function
P Parking the vehicle/starting the engine
R Reversing
N Neutral
D Normal driving*
S Engine braking
B Maximum engine braking
Eco drive mode (if equipped)
183
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
First, check whether the brake pedal is being depressed.
If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake pedal, there may
be a problem with the shift lock system. Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer immediately.
The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that
the shift lever can be shifted.
Releasing the shift lock:
Set the parking brake.
Vehicles without a smart key system: Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK”
position.
Vehicles with a smart key system: Turn the engine switch off.
Depress the brake pedal.
1
2
3
Pry the cover up with a flathead screw-
driver or equivalent tool.
To prevent damage to the cover, cover
the tip of the screwdriver with a rag.
Press the shift lock override button.
The shift lever can be shifted while the
button is pressed.
WARNING
■ When driving on slippery road surfaces
Be careful of downshifting and sudden acceleration, as this could result in
the vehicle skidding to the side or spinning.
■ To prevent an accident when releasing the shift lock
Before pressing the shift lock override button, make sure to set the parking
brake and depress the brake pedal.
If the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed instead of the brake pedal
when the shift lock override button is pressed and the shift lever is shifted
out of P, the vehicle may suddenly start, possibly leading to an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.
4
5
184
4-2. Driving procedures
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Vehicles without a smart key system:
While the engine switch is in the “ON” position, depress the
brake pedal and move the shift lever.
Vehicles with a smart key system:
While the engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode, depress the
brake pedal and move the shift lever.
When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure that the
vehicle is completely stopped.
Continuously variable transmission (vehi-
cles with paddle shift switches)
: If equipped
Shifting the shift lever
185
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
*
1
: To improve fuel efficiency and reduce noises, set the shift lever in D for
normal driving.
*
2
: Selecting gear step using the M position achieves suitable engine braking
forces by operating the shift lever.
Press the switch.
For powerful acceleration and driv-
ing in mountainous regions.
Press the switch again to return to
normal mode.
Shift position purpose
Shift position Objective or function
P Parking the vehicle/starting the engine
R Reversing
N Neutral
D Normal driving*
1
M
7-speed sport sequential shiftmatic mode driving*
2
(P. 186)
Sport mode
186
4-2. Driving procedures
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
To drive in temporary gear steps selection mode, operate the “-” and
“+” paddle shift switches. The gear steps can then be selected by
operating the “-” and “+” paddle shift switches. By selecting gear step
using paddle shift switches, you can control engine braking forces.
Upshifting
Downshifting
The selected gear step, from D1 to
D7, will be displayed in the meter.
To return to normal D position driv-
ing, the “+” paddle shift switch must
be held down for a period of time.
To enter 7-speed sport sequential shiftmatic mode, shift the shift lever
to M. Gear steps can then be selected by operating the shift lever or
paddle shift switches, allowing you to drive in the gear step of your
choosing.
Upshifting
Downshifting
The gear changes once every time
the shift lever is operated.
The selected gear step, from M1 to
M7, will be displayed in the meter.
However, even when in the M position, the gear steps will be auto-
matically changed if the engine speed is too high, or too low.
Temporarily engaged gear steps selection mode in the D posi-
tion
1
2
Changing gear steps in the M position
1
2
187
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Gear step functions
● You can choose from 7 levels of engine braking force.
● A lower gear step will provide greater engine braking force than a higher
gear step, and the engine speed will also increase.
■ If the “M” indicator flashes or a buzzer beeps after shifting the shift lever
to M
This may indicate a malfunction in the continuously variable transmission
system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
(In this situation, the transmission will operate in the same manner as when
the shift lever is in D.)
■ When the vehicle comes to a stop with the shift lever in the M position
● The transmission will automatically downshift to M1 once the vehicle is
stopped.
● After a stop, the vehicle will start off in M1.
● When the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is set at M1.
■ When driving with the dynamic radar cruise control activated
Even when performing the following actions with the intent of enabling engine
braking, engine braking will not activate because the dynamic radar cruise
control will not be canceled.
● While driving in D or 7-speed sport sequential shiftmatic mode, downshifting
to 6, 5 or 4. (P. 186)
● When switching the driving mode to sport mode while driving in D position.
(P. 185)
■ Downshifting restrictions warning buzzer
To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may
sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be
possible even when the shift lever is operated. (A buzzer will sound twice.)
■ Sport mode automatic deactivation
Sport mode is automatically deactivated if the engine switch is turned off after
driving in sport mode.
■ Shift lock system
The shift lock system is a system to prevent accidental operation of the shift
lever in starting.
The shift lever can be shifted from P only when the engine switch is in the
“ON” position (vehicles without a smart key system) or IGNITION ON mode
(vehicles with a smart key system) and the brake pedal is being depressed.
188
4-2. Driving procedures
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
First, check whether the brake pedal is being depressed.
If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake pedal, there may
be a problem with the shift lock system. Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer immediately.
The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that
the shift lever can be shifted.
Releasing the shift lock:
Set the parking brake.
Vehicles without a smart key system: Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK”
position.
Vehicles with a smart key system: Turn the engine switch off.
Depress the brake pedal.
1
2
3
Pry the cover up with a flathead screw-
driver or equivalent tool.
To prevent damage to the cover, cover
the tip of the screwdriver with a rag.
Press the shift lock override button.
The shift lever can be shifted while the
button is pressed.
WARNING
■ When driving on slippery road surfaces
Be careful of downshifting and sudden acceleration, as this could result in
the vehicle skidding to the side or spinning.
■ To prevent an accident when releasing the shift lock
Before pressing the shift lock override button, make sure to set the parking
brake and depress the brake pedal.
If the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed instead of the brake pedal
when the shift lock override button is pressed and the shift lever is shifted
out of P, the vehicle may suddenly start, possibly leading to an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.
4
5
189
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Fully depress the clutch pedal before operating the shift lever, and
then release it slowly.
Shift the shift lever to R while lift-
ing up the ring section.
Manual transmission
: If equipped
Shifting the shift lever
Shifting the shift lever to R
190
4-2. Driving procedures
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Maximum allowable speeds
Observe the following maximum allowable speeds in each gear when maxi-
mum acceleration is necessary.
mph (km/h)
Shift position
Maximum speed
Vehicles with 15-inch and
16-inch tires
Vehicles with 17-inch tires
1 30 (49) 30 (49)
2 56 (91) 56 (90)
3 82 (133) 82 (132)
4 111 (179) 111 (179)
5
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the transmission
● Do not lift up the ring section except when shifting the lever to R.
● Shift the shift lever to R only when the vehicle is stationary.
● Do not shift the shift lever to R without
depressing the clutch pedal.
191
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Right turn
Lane change to the right (move
the lever partway and release
it)
The right hand signals will flash 3
times.
Lane change to the left (move
the lever partway and release
it)
The left hand signals will flash 3
times.
Left turn
■ Turn signals can be operated when
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ If the indicator flashes faster than usual
Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned
out.
■ If the turn signals stop flashing before a lane change has been per-
formed
Operate the lever again.
■ To discontinue flashing of the turn signals during a lane change
Operate the lever in the opposite direction.
■ When the lever is pushed and held partway
The turn signals will keep flashing until the lever is released.
■ Customization
The number of times the turn signals flash during a lane change can be
changed. (Customizable features P. 564)
Turn signal lever
Operating instructions
1
2
3
4
192
4-2. Driving procedures
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
To set the parking brake, fully
pull the parking brake lever
while depressing the brake
pedal.
To release the parking brake,
slightly raise the lever and
lower it completely while press-
ing the button.
*
1
: For U.S.A.
*
2
: For Canada
■ Parking the vehicle
P. 153
■ Parking brake engaged warning buzzer
A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is driven at a speed of approximately 3 mph
(5 km/h) or more with the parking brake engaged. (P. 480, 490)
■ Usage in winter time
P. 263
Parking brake
Operating instructions
*
1
*
2
1
2
NOTICE
■ Before driving
Fully release the parking brake.
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components
overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake
wear.
193
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Turning the end of the lever turns on the lights as follows:
Type A
The headlights, day-
time running lights (P.
195) and all the lights
listed below turn on and
off automatically.
(Vehicles without a
smart key system:
When the engine
switch is in the “ON”
position)
(Vehicles with a smart
key system: When the
engine switch is in
IGNITION ON mode)
The side marker, park-
ing, tail, license plate,
instrument panel lights,
and daytime running
lights (P. 1 9 5) t ur n
on.
The headlights and all the lights listed above (except day-
time running lights) turn on.
The daytime running lights turn off.
Headlight switch
The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.
Operating instructions
1
2
3
4
194
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Type B
The headlights, day-
time running lights (P.
195) and all the lights
listed below turn on and
off automatically.
(Vehicles without a
smart key system:
When the engine
switch is in the “ON”
position)
(Vehicles with a smart
key system: When the
engine switch is in
IGNITION ON mode)
The side marker, park-
ing, tail, license plate,
instrument panel lights,
and daytime running
lights (P. 1 9 5) t ur n
on.
The headlights and all the lights listed above (except day-
time running lights) turn on.
The daytime running lights turn on. (P. 195)
1
2
3
4
195
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
With the headlights on, push
the lever away from you to turn
on the high beams.
Pull the lever toward you to the
center position to turn the high
beams off.
Pull the lever toward you and
release it to flash the high
beams once.
You can flash the high beams with the headlights on or off.
■ Daytime running light system
● Vehicles with daytime running lights that are integrated into the headlights:
The daytime running lights illuminate using the same lights as the headlight
low beams and illuminate darker than the headlight low beams.
● To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers during daytime driving,
the daytime running lights turn on automatically when all of the following
conditions are met. (The daytime running lights are not designed for use at
night.)
• The engine is running
• The parking brake is released
• The headlight switch is in the (type B only), or “AUTO”
*
position
*: When the surroundings are bright
The daytime running lights remain on after they illuminate, even if the park-
ing brake is set again.
● For the U.S.A.: Daytime running lights can be turned off by operating the
switch.
● Compared to turning on the headlights, the daytime running light system
offers greater durability and consumes less electricity, so it can help improve
fuel economy.
■ Headlight control sensor
Turning on the high beam headlights
1
2
The sensor may not function properly if an
object is placed on the sensor, or anything
that blocks the sensor is affixed to the
windshield.
Doing so interferes with the sensor
detecting the level of ambient light and
may cause the automatic headlight sys-
tem to malfunction.
196
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Automatic light off system
Vehicles without a smart key system
● When the headlights are on: The headlights and tail lights turn off 30 sec-
onds after the engine switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position and a
door is opened and closed. (Vehicles with a wireless remote control: The
lights turn off immediately if on the key is pressed after all the doors
are locked.)
● When only the tail lights are on: The tail lights turn off automatically if the
engine switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position and the driver’s
door is opened.
To turn the lights on again, turn the engine switch to “ON” position, or turn the
light switch off once and then back to the or position.
If any of the doors or trunk lid is kept open, the lights automatically turn off
after 20 minutes.
Vehicles with a smart key system
● When the headlights are on: The headlights and tail lights turn off 30 sec-
onds after the engine switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off
and a door is opened and closed. (The lights turn off immediately if on
the key is pressed after all the doors are locked.)
● When only the tail lights are on: The tail lights turn off automatically if the
engine switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off and the driver’s
door is opened.
To turn the lights on again, turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode, or
turn the light switch off once and then back to the or position.
If any of the doors or trunk lid is kept open, the lights automatically turn off
after 20 minutes.
■ Light reminder buzzer
Vehicles without a smart key system
A buzzer sounds when the engine switch is turned to “LOCK” position and the
driver's door is opened while the lights are turned on.
Vehicles with a smart key system
A buzzer sounds when the engine switch is turned off or turned to ACCES-
SORY mode and the driver's door is opened while the lights are turned on.
197
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Battery-saving function
In the following conditions, the headlights and the other remaining lights will
go off automatically after 20 minutes in order to prevent the vehicle battery
from being discharged:
● The headlights and/or tail lights are on.
● Vehicles without a smart key system: The engine switch is in the “ACC” or
“LOCK” position.
● Vehicles with a smart key system: The engine switch is turned to ACCES-
SORY mode or turned off.
This function will be canceled in any of the following situations:
● Vehicles without a smart key system: When the engine switch is turned to
the “ON” position.
● Vehicles with a smart key system: When the engine switch is turned to IGNI-
TION ON mode.
● When the light switch is operated
● When the door or trunk is opened or closed
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 564)
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not
running.
198
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Push the lever away from you with
the headlight switch in the
position.
The Automatic High Beam indica-
tor will come on when the system
is operating.
Automatic High Beam
The Automatic High Beam uses a camera sensor located behind
the upper portion of the windshield to assess the brightness of
the lights of vehicles ahead, streetlights, etc., and automatically
turns the high beams on or off as necessary.
WARNING
■ Limitations of the Automatic High Beam
Do not overly rely on the Automatic High Beam. Always drive safely, taking
care to observe your surroundings and turning the high beams on or off
manually if necessary.
■ To prevent incorrect operation of the Automatic High Beam system
Do not overload the vehicle.
Activating the Automatic High Beam
199
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Switching to the low beams
Pull the lever to its original posi-
tion.
The Automatic High Beam indi-
cator will turn off.
Push the lever away from you to
activate the Automatic High
Beam system again.
■
Switching to the high beams
Turn the light switch to the
position.
The Automatic High Beam indi-
cator will turn off and the high
beam indicator will turn on.
■ Conditions to turn the high beams on/off automatically
● When all of the following conditions are met, the high beams will be turned
on automatically (after approximately 1 second):
• The vehicle speed is approximately 21 mph (34 km/h) or more.
• The area ahead of the vehicle is dark.
• There are no vehicles ahead with headlights or tail lights turned on.
• There are few streetlights on the road ahead.
● If any of the following conditions is met, the high beams will turn off automat-
ically:
• The vehicle speed is below approximately 17 mph (27 km/h).
• The area ahead of the vehicle is not dark.
• Vehicles ahead have their headlights or tail lights turned on.
• There are many streetlights on the road ahead.
Turning the high beams on/off manually
200
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Camera sensor detection information
● The high beams may not be automatically turned off in the following situa-
tions:
• When a vehicle suddenly appears from around a curve
• When the vehicle is cut in front of by another vehicle
• When vehicles ahead cannot be detected due to repeated curves, road
dividers or roadside trees
• When vehicles ahead appear in a faraway lane on a wide road
• When the lights of vehicles ahead are not on
● The high beams may be turned off if a vehicle ahead that is using fog lights
without its headlights turned on is detected.
● House lights, street lights, traffic signals, and illuminated billboards or signs
and other reflective objects may cause the high beams to change to the low
beams, or the low beams to remain on.
● The following factors may affect the amount of time taken for the high
beams to turn on or off:
• The brightness of the headlights, fog lights, and tail lights of vehicles
ahead
• The movement and direction of vehicles ahead
• When a vehicle ahead only has operational lights on one side
• When a vehicle ahead is a two-wheeled vehicle
• The condition of the road (gradient, curve, condition of the road surface,
etc.)
• The number of passengers and amount of luggage in the vehicle
● The high beams may turn on or off unexpectedly.
● Bicycles or similar vehicles may not be detected.
● In the following situations the system may not be able to correctly detect the
surrounding brightness level. This may cause the low beams to remain on
or the high beams to flash or dazzle pedestrians or vehicles ahead. In such
a case, it is necessary to manually switch between the high and low beams.
• When driving in inclement weather (heavy rain, snow, fog, sandstorms,
etc.)
• When the windshield is obscured by fog, mist, ice, dirt, etc.
• When the windshield is cracked or damaged
• When the camera sensor is deformed or dirty
• When the temperature of the camera sensor is extremely high
• When the surrounding brightness level is equal to that of headlights, tail
lights or fog lights
• When headlights or tail lights of vehicles ahead are turned off, dirty,
changing color, or not aimed properly
• When the vehicle is hit by water, snow, dust, etc. from a preceding vehi-
cle
201
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
• When driving through an area of intermittently changing brightness and
darkness
• When frequently and repeatedly driving ascending/descending roads, or
roads with rough, bumpy or uneven surfaces (such as stone-paved
roads, gravel roads, etc.)
• When frequently and repeatedly taking curves or driving on a winding
road
• When there is a highly reflective object ahead of the vehicle, such as a
sign or mirror
• When the back of a preceding vehicle is highly reflective, such as a con-
tainer on a truck
• When the vehicle's headlights are damaged or dirty, or are not aimed
properly
• When the vehicle is listing or titling due to a flat tire, a trailer being towed,
etc.
• When the headlights are changed between the high beams and low
beams repeatedly in an abnormal manner
• When the driver believes that the high beams may be flashing or dazzling
pedestrians or other drivers
■ Temporarily lowering sensor sensitivity
The sensitivity of the sensor can be temporarily lowered.
Turn the engine switch off while the following conditions are met.
• The headlight switch is in .
• The headlight switch lever is in the high beam position.
Turn the engine switch to the “ON” position (vehicles without a smart key
system) or IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with a smart key system).
Within 30 seconds after , repeat pulling the headlight switch lever to the
original position then pushing it to the high beam position quickly 10 times,
then leave the lever in the high beam position.
If the sensitivity is changed, the Automatic High Beam indicator will turn on
and off 3 times.
Automatic High Beam (headlights) may turn on even the vehicle is stopped.
1
2
3 2
4
202
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
The wiper operation is selected by moving the lever as follows. When
intermittent windshield wiper operation is selected, the wiper interval
can be also adjusted.
*
1
or *
2
Intermittent windshield
wiper operation
*
1
or *
2
Low speed windshield
wiper operation
*
1
or *
2
High speed windshield
wiper operation
*
1
or *
2
Temporary operation
*
1
: For the U.S.A.
*
2
: For Canada
Wiper intervals can be adjusted when intermittent operation is
selected.
Increases the intermittent wind-
shield wiper frequency
*
3
Decreases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency
*
3
*
3
: The interval adjuster may not be
equipped depending on the grade.
Windshield wipers and washer
Operating the wiper lever
1
2
3
4
5
6
203
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Washer/wiper dual operation
Wipers will automatically operate a
couple of times after the washer
squirts.
■ The windshield wiper and washer can be operated when
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ If no windshield washer fluid sprays
Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the
windshield washer fluid reservoir.
7
WARNING
■ Caution regarding the use of washer fluid
When it is cold, do not use the washer fluid until the windshield becomes
warm. The fluid may freeze on the windshield and cause low visibility. This
may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ When the windshield is dry
Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.
■ When the washer fluid tank is empty
Do not operate the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may over-
heat.
■ When a nozzle becomes blocked
In this case, contact your Toyota dealer.
Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.
204
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
4-4. Refueling
● Close all the doors and windows, and turn the engine switch off.
● Confirm the type of fuel. (P. 548)
■ Fuel types
P. 548
■ Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline
To help prevent incorrect fueling, your vehicle has a fuel tank opening that
only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.
Opening the fuel tank cap
Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap:
Before refueling the vehicle
WARNING
■ When refueling the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do
so may result in death or serious injury.
● After exiting the vehicle and before opening the fuel door, touch an
unpainted metal surface to discharge any static electricity. It is important to
discharge static electricity before refueling because sparks resulting from
static electricity can cause fuel vapors to ignite while refueling.
● Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.
A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened.
Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot
weather, pressurized fuel may spray out the filler neck and cause injury.
● Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their
body to come close to an open fuel tank.
● Do not inhale vaporized fuel.
Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.
● Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.
Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.
● Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically
charged.
This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition
hazard.
205
4-4. Refueling
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Pull up the opener to open the
fuel filler door.
Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to
remove it and hang it on the
back of the fuel filler door.
WARNING
■ When refueling
Observe the following precautions to prevent fuel overflowing from the fuel
tank:
● Securely insert the fuel nozzle into the fuel filler neck.
● Stop filling the tank after the fuel nozzle automatically clicks off.
● Do not top off the fuel tank.
NOTICE
■ Refueling
Do not spill fuel during refueling.
Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the emission control
system to operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the
vehicle’s painted surface.
Opening the fuel tank cap
1
2
206
4-4. Refueling
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
After refueling, turn the fuel tank
cap until you hear a click. Once
the cap is released, it will turn
slightly in the opposite direction.
Closing the fuel tank cap
WARNING
■ When replacing the fuel tank cap
Do not use anything but a genuine Toyota fuel tank cap designed for your
vehicle. Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in
death or serious injury.
207
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
4-5. Using the driving support systems
◆ PCS (Pre-Collision System)
P. 2 1 4
◆ LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control)
P. 2 2 6
◆ Automatic High Beam
P. 1 9 8
◆ Dynamic radar cruise control
P. 2 3 5
Toyota Safety Sense P
The Toyota Safety Sense P consists of the following drive assist
systems and contributes to a safe and comfortable driving expe-
rience:
WARNING
■ Toyota Safety Sense P
The Toyota Safety Sense P is designed to operate under the assumption
that the driver will drive safely, and is designed to help reduce the impact to
the occupants and the vehicle in the case of a collision or assist the driver in
normal driving conditions.
As there is a limit to the degree of recognition accuracy and control perfor-
mance that this system can provide, do not overly rely on this system. The
driver is always responsible for paying attention to the vehicle's surround-
ings and driving safely.
208
4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
The pre-collision system is equipped with a sophisticated computer
that will record certain data, such as:
• Accelerator status
• Brake status
• Vehicle speed
• Operation status of the pre-collision system functions
• Information (such as the distance and relative speed between your
vehicle and the vehicle ahead or other objects)
• Images from the camera sensor (available only when the pre-colli-
sion braking function or the pre-collision brake assist function was
operating)
The pre-collision system does not record conversations, sounds or
images of the inside of the vehicle.
● Data usage
Toyota may use the data recorded in this computer to diagnose
malfunctions, conduct research and development, and improve
quality.
Toyota will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except:
• With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the
lessee if the vehicle is leased
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a
government agency
• For use by Toyota in a lawsuit
• For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific
vehicle or vehicle owner
● Recorded images can be erased using a specialized device.
The image recording function can be disabled. However, if the func-
tion is disabled, data from when the pre-collision system operates
will not be available.
Vehicle data recording
209
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Two types of sensors, located behind the front grille and windshield,
detect information necessary to operate the drive assist systems.
Radar sensor
Camera sensor
Sensors
1
2
WARNING
■ To avoid malfunction of the radar sensor
Observe the following precautions.
Otherwise, the radar sensor may not operate properly, possibly leading to
an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
● Keep the radar sensor and front grille emblem clean at all times.
● Do not attach accessories, stickers (including transparent stickers) or
other items to the radar sensor, front grille emblem or surrounding area.
● Do not subject the radar sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.
If the radar sensor, front grille, or front bumper has been subjected to a
strong impact, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
● Do not disassemble the radar sensor.
● Do not modify or paint the radar sensor, front grille emblem or surrounding
area.
● If the radar sensor, front grille, or front bumper needs to be removed and
installed, or replaced, contact your Toyota dealer.
Radar sensor
Front grille emblem
If the front of the radar sensor or the
front or back of the front grille emblem
is dirty or covered with water droplets,
snow, etc., clean it.
Clean the radar sensor and front grille
emblem with a soft cloth so you do not
mark or damage them.
1
12
210
4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
■ To avoid malfunction of the camera sensor
Observe the following precautions.
Otherwise, the camera sensor may not operate properly, possibly leading to
an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
● Keep the windshield clean at all times.
• If the windshield is dirty or covered with an oily film, water droplets,
snow, etc., clear the windshield.
• If a glass coating agent is applied to the windshield, it will still be neces-
sary to use the windshield wipers to remove water droplets, etc. from
the area of the windshield in front of the camera sensor.
• If the inner side of the windshield where the camera sensor is installed
is dirty, contact your Toyota dealer.
B: Approximately 7.9 in. (20 cm) (Approximately 4.0 in. [10 cm] to the right
and left from the center of the camera sensor)
● If the part of the windshield in front of the camera sensor is fogged up or
covered with condensation or ice, use the windshield defogger to remove
the fog, condensation or ice. (P. 368, 376)
● If water droplets cannot be properly removed from the area of the wind-
shield in front of the camera sensor by the windshield wipers, replace the
wiper insert or wiper blade.
If the wiper inserts or wiper blades need to be replaced, contact your
Toyota dealer.
● Do not attach window tinting to the windshield.
● Replace the windshield if it is damaged or cracked.
If the windshield needs to be replaced, contact your Toyota dealer.
● Do not get the camera sensor wet.
● Do not allow bright lights to shine into the camera sensor.
● Do not dirty or damage the camera sensor.
When cleaning the inside of the windshield, do not allow glass cleaner to
contact the lens. Also, do not touch the lens.
If the lens is dirty or damaged, contact your Toyota dealer.
● Do not attach objects, such as stickers,
transparent stickers, and so forth, to the
outer side of the windshield in front of
the camera sensor (shaded area in the
illustration).
A: From the top of the windshield to
approximately 0.4 in. (1 cm) below
the bottom of the camera sensor
211
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
● Do not subject the camera sensor to a strong impact.
● Do not change the installation position or direction of the camera sensor or
remove it.
● Do not disassemble the camera sensor.
● Do not modify any components of the vehicle around the camera sensor
(inside rear view mirror, etc.) or ceiling.
● Do not attach any accessories that may obstruct the camera sensor to the
hood, front grille or front bumper. Contact your Toyota dealer for details.
● If a surfboard or other long object is to be mounted on the roof, make sure
that it will not obstruct the camera sensor.
● Do not modify the headlights or other lights.
214
4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
◆ Pre-collision warning
When the system determines
that the possibility of a frontal
collision is high, a buzzer will
sound and a warning message
will be displayed on the multi-
information display to urge the
driver to take evasive action.
◆ Pre-collision brake assist
When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal colli-
sion is high, the system applies greater braking force in relation to
how strongly the brake pedal is depressed.
◆ Pre-collision braking
When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal colli-
sion is high, the system warns the driver. If the system determines
that the possibility of a collision is extremely high, the brakes are
automatically applied to help avoid the collision or reduce the colli-
sion speed.
PCS (Pre-Collision System)
The pre-collision system uses a radar sensor and camera sen-
sor to detect vehicles and pedestrians in front of your vehicle.
When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal col-
lision with a vehicle or pedestrian is high, a warning operates to
urge the driver to take evasive action and the potential brake
pressure is increased to help the driver avoid the collision. If the
system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with
a vehicle or pedestrian is extremely high, the brakes are auto-
matically applied to help avoid the collision or help reduce the
impact of the collision.
The pre-collision system can be disabled/enabled and the warning
timing can be changed. (P. 2 17 )
215
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
■ Limitations of the pre-collision system
● The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking
care to observe your surroundings.
Do not use the pre-collision system instead of normal braking operations
under any circumstances. This system will not prevent collisions or lessen
collision damage or injury in every situation. Do not overly rely on this sys-
tem. Failure to do so may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious
injury.
● Although this system is designed to help avoid a collision or help reduce
the impact of the collision, its effectiveness may change according to vari-
ous conditions, therefore the system may not always be able to achieve
the same level of performance.
Read the following conditions carefully. Do not overly rely on this system
and always drive carefully.
• Conditions under which the system may operate even if there is no pos-
sibility of a collision: P. 219
• Conditions under which the system may not operate properly: P. 222
● Do not attempt to test the operation of the pre-collision system yourself, as
the system may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident.
■ Pre-collision braking
● When the pre-collision braking function is operating, a large amount of
braking force will be applied.
● If the vehicle is stopped by the operation of the pre-collision braking func-
tion, the pre-collision braking function operation will be canceled after
approximately 2 seconds. Depress the brake pedal as necessary.
● The pre-collision braking function may not operate if certain operations are
performed by the driver. If the accelerator pedal is being depressed
strongly or the steering wheel is being turned, the system may determine
that the driver is taking evasive action and possibly prevent the pre-colli-
sion braking function from operating.
● In some situations, while the pre-collision braking function is operating,
operation of the function may be canceled if the accelerator pedal is
depressed strongly or the steering wheel is turned and the system deter-
mines that the driver is taking evasive action.
● If the brake pedal is being depressed, the system may determine that the
driver is taking evasive action and possibly delay the operation timing of
the pre-collision braking function.
216
4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
■ When to disable the pre-collision system
In the following situations, disable the system, as it may not operate prop-
erly, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury:
● When the vehicle is being towed
● When your vehicle is towing another vehicle
● When transporting the vehicle via truck, boat, train or similar means of
transportation
● When the vehicle is raised on a lift with the engine running and the tires
are allowed to rotate freely
● When inspecting the vehicle using a drum tester such as a chassis dyna-
mometer or speedometer tester, or when using an on vehicle wheel bal-
ancer
● When a strong impact is applied to the front bumper or front grille, due to
an accident or other reasons
● If the vehicle cannot be driven in a stable manner, such as when the vehi-
cle has been in an accident or is malfunctioning
● When the vehicle is driven in a sporty manner or off-road
● When the tires are not properly inflated
● When the tires are very worn
● When tires of a size other than specified are installed
● When tire chains are installed
● When a compact spare tire or an emergency tire puncture repair kit is used
● If equipment (snow plow, etc.) that may obstruct the radar sensor or cam-
era sensor is temporarily installed to the vehicle
217
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Enabling/disabling the pre-collision system
The pre-collision system can be enabled/disabled on the settings
display (P. 93) of the multi-information display.
The system is automatically enabled each time the engine switch is
turned to the “ON” position (vehicles without a smart key system) or
IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with a smart key system).
If the system is disabled, the
PCS warning light will turn on
and a message will be dis-
played on the multi-information
display.
■ Changing the pre-collision warning timing
The pre-collision warning timing can be changed on the settings
display (P. 93) of the multi-information display.
The operation timing setting is retained when the engine switch is
turned off.
Far
The warning will begin to oper-
ate earlier than with the default
timing.
Middle
This is the default setting.
Near
The warning will begin to oper-
ate later than with the default
timing.
Changing settings of the pre-collision system
1
2
3
218
4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Operational conditions
The pre-collision system is enabled and the system determines that the pos-
sibility of a frontal collision with a vehicle or pedestrian is high.
Each function is operational at the following speeds:
● Pre-collision warning:
• Vehicle speed is between approximately 7 and 110 mph (10 and 180 km/h).
(For detecting a pedestrian, vehicle speed is between approximately 7 and
50 mph [10 and 80 km/h].)
• The relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian
ahead is approximately 7 mph (10 km/h) or more.
● Pre-collision brake assist:
• Vehicle speed is between approximately 20 and 110 mph (30 and 180 km/h).
(For detecting a pedestrian, vehicle speed is between approximately 20 and
50 mph [30 and 80 km/h].)
• The relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian
ahead is approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) or more.
● Pre-collision braking:
• Vehicle speed is between approximately 7 and 110 mph (10 and 180
km/h). (For detecting a pedestrian, vehicle speed is between approxi-
mately 7 and 50 mph [10 and 80 km/h].)
• The relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian
ahead is approximately 7 mph (10 km/h) or more.
The system may not operate in the following situations:
● If a battery terminal has been disconnected and reconnected and then the
vehicle has not been driven for a certain amount of time
● If the shift lever is in R
● If VSC is disabled (only the pre-collision warning function will be opera-
tional)
219
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Pedestrian detection function
■ Cancelation of the pre-collision braking
If either of the following occurs while the pre-collision braking function is oper-
ating, it will be canceled:
● The accelerator pedal is depressed strongly.
● The steering wheel is turned sharply or abruptly.
■ Conditions under which the system may operate even if there is no pos-
sibility of a collision
● In some situations such as the following, the system may determine that
there is a possibility of a frontal collision and operate.
• When passing a vehicle or pedestrian
• When changing lanes while overtaking a preceding vehicle
• When overtaking a preceding vehicle that is changing lanes
The pre-collision system detects pedestri-
ans based on the size, profile, and motion
of a detected object. However, a pedes-
trian may not be detected depending on
the surrounding brightness and the
motion, posture, and angle of the
detected object, preventing the system
from operating properly. (P. 222)
• When overtaking a preceding vehicle
that is making a left/right turn
• When passing a vehicle in an oncom-
ing lane that is stopped to make a
right/left turn
• When driving on a road where relative
location to vehicle ahead in an adja-
cent lane may change, such as on a
winding road
220
4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
• When rapidly closing on a vehicle ahead
• If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered, such as when the road sur-
face is uneven or undulating
• When approaching objects on the roadside, such as guardrails, utility
poles, trees, or walls
• When driving on a narrow path surrounded by a structure, such as in a
tunnel or on an iron bridge
• When there is a metal object (manhole cover, steel plate, etc.), steps, or a
protrusion on the road surface or roadside
• When rapidly closing on an electric toll gate barrier, parking area barrier,
or other barrier that opens and closes
• When using an automatic car wash
• When there is a vehicle, pedestrian,
or object by the roadside at the
entrance of a curve
• When a crossing pedestrian
approaches very close to the vehicle
• When passing through a place with a
low structure above the road (low ceil-
ing, traffic sign, etc.)
• When passing under an object (bill-
board, etc.) at the top of an uphill road
221
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
• When the vehicle is hit by water, snow, dust, etc. from a vehicle ahead
• When driving through steam or smoke
• When there are patterns or paint on the road or a wall that may be mis-
taken for a vehicle or pedestrian
• When driving near an object that reflects radio waves, such as a large
truck or guardrail
• When driving near a TV tower, broadcasting station, electric power plant,
or other location where strong radio waves or electrical noise may be
present
• When driving through or under
objects that may contact the vehicle,
such as thick grass, tree branches, or
a banner
222
4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Situations in which the system may not operate properly
● In some situations such as the following, a vehicle may not be detected by
the radar sensor and camera sensor, preventing the system from operating
properly:
• If an oncoming vehicle is approaching your vehicle
• If a vehicle ahead is a motorcycle or bicycle
• When approaching the side or front of a vehicle
• If a preceding vehicle has a small rear end, such as an unloaded truck
• If a vehicle ahead is carrying a load which protrudes past its rear bumper
• If a vehicle ahead is irregularly shaped, such as a tractor or side car
• If the sun or other light is shining directly on a vehicle ahead
• If a vehicle cuts in front of your vehicle or emerges from beside a vehicle
• If a vehicle ahead makes an abrupt maneuver (such as sudden swerving,
acceleration or deceleration)
• When suddenly cutting behind a preceding vehicle
• If a preceding vehicle has a low rear
end, such as a low bed trailer
• If a vehicle ahead has extremely high
ground clearance
• When a vehicle ahead is not directly
in front of your vehicle
223
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
• When driving in inclement weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow or a
sandstorm
• When the vehicle is hit by water, snow, dust, etc. from a vehicle ahead
• When driving through steam or smoke
• When driving in a place where the surrounding brightness changes sud-
denly, such as at the entrance or exit of a tunnel
• When a very bright light, such as the sun or the headlights of oncoming
traffic, shines directly into the camera sensor
• When the surrounding area is dim, such as at dawn or dusk, or while at
night or in a tunnel
• After the engine has started the vehicle has not been driven for a certain
amount of time
• While making a left/right turn and for a few seconds after making a left/
right turn
• While driving on a curve and for a few seconds after driving on a curve
• If your vehicle is skidding
• If the wheels are misaligned
• If a wiper blade is blocking the camera sensor
• The vehicle is wobbling.
• The vehicle is being driven at extremely high speeds.
• When driving on a hill
• If the radar sensor or camera sensor is misaligned
● In some situations such as the following, sufficient braking force may not be
obtained, preventing the system from performing properly:
• If the braking functions cannot operate to their full extent, such as when
the brake parts are extremely cold, extremely hot, or wet
• If the vehicle is not properly maintained (brakes or tires are excessively
worn, improper tire inflation pressure, etc.)
• When the vehicle is being driven on a gravel road or other slippery sur-
face
• If the front of the vehicle is raised or
lowered
224
4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
● Some pedestrians such as the following may not be detected by the radar
sensor and camera sensor, preventing the system from operating properly:
• Pedestrians shorter than approximately 3.2 ft. (1 m) or taller than approx-
imately 6.5 ft. (2 m)
• Pedestrians wearing oversized clothing (a rain coat, long skirt, etc.), mak-
ing their silhouette obscure
• Pedestrians who are carrying large baggage, holding an umbrella, etc.,
hiding part of their body
• Pedestrians who are bending forward or squatting
• Pedestrians who are pushing a stroller, wheelchair, bicycle or other vehi-
cle
• Groups of pedestrians which are close together
• Pedestrians who are wearing white and look extremely bright
• Pedestrians in the dark, such as at night or while in a tunnel
• Pedestrians whose clothing appears to be nearly the same color or
brightness as their surroundings
• Pedestrians near walls, fences, guardrails, or large objects
• Pedestrians who are on a metal object (manhole cover, steel plate, etc.)
on the road
• Pedestrians who are walking fast
• Pedestrians who are changing speed abruptly
• Pedestrians running out from behind a vehicle or a large object
• Pedestrians who are extremely close to the side of the vehicle (outside
rear view mirror, etc.)
225
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ If the PCS warning light flashes or illuminates and a warning message is
displayed on the multi-information display
The pre-collision system may be temporarily unavailable or there may be a
malfunction in the system.
● In the following situations, the warning light will turn off, the message will
disappear and the system will become operational when normal operating
conditions return:
• When the radar sensor or camera sensor or the area around either sen-
sor is hot, such as in the sun
• When the radar sensor or camera sensor or the area around either sen-
sor is cold, such as in an extremely cold environment
• When a front sensor is dirty or covered with snow, etc.
• When the part of the windshield in front of the camera sensor is fogged
up or covered with condensation or ice
(Defogging the windshield: P. 368, 376)
• If the camera sensor is obstructed, such as when the hood is open or a
sticker is attached to the windshield near the camera sensor
● If the PCS warning light continues to flash or remains illuminated or the
warning message does not disappear even though the vehicle has returned
to normal, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer immediately.
■ If VSC is disabled
● If VSC is disabled (P. 259), the pre-collision brake assist and pre-collision
braking functions are also disabled.
● The PCS warning light will turn on and “VSC Turned Off Pre-Collision Brake
System Unavailable” will be displayed on the multi-information display.
226
4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
When driving on highways and freeways with white (yellow) lines, this
function alerts the driver when the vehicle might depart from its lane
and provides assistance by operating the steering wheel to keep the
vehicle in its lane.
The LDA system recognizes visi-
ble white (yellow) lines with the
camera sensor on the upper por-
tion of the windshield.
◆ Lane departure alert function
When the system determines
that the vehicle might depart
from its lane, a warning is dis-
played on the multi-information
display and the warning buzzer
sounds to alert the driver.
When the warning buzzer
sounds, check the surrounding
road situation and carefully
operate the steering wheel to
move the vehicle back to the
center of the lane.
LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering
control)
Summary of functions
Functions included in LDA system
227
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
◆ Steering control function
When the system determines
that the vehicle might depart
from its lane, the system pro-
vides assistance as necessary
by operating the steering wheel
in small amounts for a short
period of time to keep the vehi-
cle in its lane.
If the system detects that the
steering wheel has not been
operated for a fixed amount of
time or the steering wheel is not
being firmly gripped, a warning
is displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display and the warning
buzzer sounds.
◆ Vehicle sway warning function
When the vehicle is swaying or
appears as if it may depart from
its lane multiple times, the
warning buzzer sounds and a
message is displayed on the
multi-information display to alert
the driver.
228
4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
■ Before using LDA system
Do not rely solely upon the LDA system. The LDA system does not auto-
matically drive the vehicle or reduce the amount of attention that must be
paid to the area in front of the vehicle. The driver must always assume full
responsibility for driving safely by paying careful attention to the surround-
ing conditions and operating the steering wheel to correct the path of the
vehicle. Also, the driver must take adequate breaks when fatigued, such as
from driving for a long period of time.
Failure to perform appropriate driving operations and pay careful attention
may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
■ To avoid operating LDA by mistake
When not using the LDA system, use the LDA switch to turn the system off.
■ Situations unsuitable for LDA system
Do not use the LDA system in the following situations.
The system may not operate properly and lead to an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
● A spare tire, tire chains, etc. are equipped.
● When the tires have been excessively worn, or when the tire inflation pres-
sure is low.
● Tires which differ by structure, manufacturer, brand or tread pattern are
used.
● Objects or patterns that could be mistaken for white (yellow) lines are
present on the side of the road (guardrails, curbs, reflective poles, etc.).
● Vehicle is driven on a snow-covered road.
● White (yellow) lines are difficult to see due to rain, snow, fog, dust, etc.
● Asphalt repair marks, white (yellow) line marks, etc. are present due to
road repair.
● Vehicle is driven in a temporary lane or restricted lane due to construction
work.
● Vehicle is driven on a road surface which is slippery due to rainy weather,
fallen snow, freezing, etc.
● Vehicle is driven in traffic lanes other than on highways and freeways.
● Vehicle is driven in a construction zone.
● During emergency towing
229
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Press the LDA switch to turn the
LDA system on.
The LDA indicator illuminates and
a message is displayed on the
multi-information display.
Press the LDA switch again to turn
the LDA system off.
When the LDA system is turned on
or off, operation of the LDA system
continues in the same condition
the next time the engine is started.
WARNING
■ Preventing LDA system malfunctions and operations performed by
mistake
● Do not modify the headlights or place stickers, etc. on the surface of the
lights.
● Do not modify the suspension etc. If the suspension etc. needs to be
replaced, contact your Toyota dealer.
● Do not install or place anything on the hood or grille. Also, do not install a
grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar, etc.).
● If your windshield needs repairs, contact your Toyota dealer.
Turning LDA system on
230
4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
LDA indicator
The illumination condition of the
indicator informs the driver of
the system operation status.
Illuminated in white:
LDA system is operating.
Illuminated in green:
Steering wheel assistance of the
steering control function is operat-
ing.
Flashing in orange:
Lane departure alert function is
operating.
Operation display of steering wheel operation support
Indicates that steering wheel assistance of the steering control
function is operating.
Lane departure alert function display
Displayed when the multi-information display is switched to the
driving assist system information screen.
Indications on multi-information display
1
2
3
Inside of displayed white lines
is white
Inside of displayed white lines
is black
Indicates that the system is recog-
nizing white (yellow) lines. When
the vehicle departs from its lane,
the white line displayed on the
side the vehicle departs from
flashes orange.
Indicates that the system is not
able to recognize white (yellow)
lines or is temporarily canceled.
231
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Operation conditions of each function
● Lane departure alert function
This function operates when all of the following conditions are met.
• LDA is turned on.
• Vehicle speed is approximately 32 mph (50 km/h) or more.
• System recognizes white (yellow) lines.
• Width of traffic lane is approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) or more.
• Turn signal lever is not operated.
• Vehicle is driven on a straight road or around a gentle curve with a radius
of more than approximately 492 ft. (150 m).
• No system malfunctions are detected. (P. 480)
● Steering control function
This function operates when all of the following conditions are met in addi-
tion to the operation conditions for the lane departure alert function.
• Setting for the steering control function is set to on. (P. 90)
• Vehicle is not accelerated or decelerated by a certain amount or more.
• Steering wheel is not operated with a steering force level suitable for
changing lanes.
• ABS, VSC, TRAC and PCS are not operating.
• TRAC or VSC is not turned off.
● Vehicle sway warning function
This function operates when all of the following conditions are met.
• Setting for the vehicle sway warning function is set to on. (P. 90)
• Vehicle speed is approximately 32 mph (50 km/h) or more.
• Width of traffic lane is approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) or more.
• No system malfunctions are detected. (P. 480)
■ Temporary cancellation of functions
When the operation conditions are no longer met, a function may be tempo-
rarily canceled. However, when the operation conditions are met again, oper-
ation of the function is automatically restored. (P. 231)
■ Steering control function
Depending on the vehicle speed, lane departure situation, road conditions,
etc., the driver may not feel the function is operating or the function may not
operate at all.
■ Lane departure alert function
The warning buzzer may be difficult to hear due to external noise, audio play-
back, etc.
232
4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Hands off steering wheel warning
■ Vehicle sway warning function
When the system determines that the
driver has removed their hands from the
steering wheel while the steering control
function is operating, a warning message
urging the driver to hold the steering
wheel and the symbol shown in the illus-
tration are displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display.
If the driver continues to keep their hands
off of the steering wheel, a buzzer
sounds and a warning message and the
symbol shown in the illustration are dis-
played on the multi-information display.
This warning also operates in the same
way when the driver continuously oper-
ates the steering wheel only a small
amount. Always keep your hands on the
steering wheel when using this system,
regardless of warnings.
Depending on the vehicle and road con-
ditions, the warning may not operate.
Vehicles with a mono-
chrome display
Vehicles with a color dis-
play
When the system determines that the
vehicle is swaying while the vehicle sway
warning function is operating, a buzzer
sounds and a warning message urging
the driver to rest and the symbol shown
in the illustration are simultaneously dis-
played on the multi-information display.
Depending on the vehicle and road con-
ditions, the warning may not operate.
Vehicles with a mono-
chrome display
Vehicles with a color dis-
play
233
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ White (yellow) lines are only on one side of road
The LDA system will not operate for the side on which white (yellow) lines
could not be recognized.
■ Conditions in which functions may not operate properly
In the following situations, the camera sensor may not detect white (yellow)
lines and various functions may not operate normally.
● There are shadows on the road that run parallel with, or cover, the white
(yellow) lines.
● The vehicle is driven in an area without white (yellow) lines, such as in front
of a tollgate or checkpoint, or at an intersection etc.
● The white (yellow) lines are cracked, “Botts’ dots”, “Raised pavement
marker” or stones are present.
● The white (yellow) lines cannot be seen or are difficult to see due to sand,
etc.
● The vehicle is driven on a road surface that is wet due to rain, puddles, etc.
● The traffic lines are yellow (which may be more difficult to recognize than
lines that are white).
● The white (yellow) lines cross over a curb, etc.
● The vehicle is driven on a bright surface, such as concrete.
● The vehicle is driven on a surface that is bright due to reflected light, etc.
● The vehicle is driven in an area where the brightness changes suddenly,
such as at the entrances and exits of tunnels, etc.
● Light from the headlights of an oncoming vehicle, the sun, etc. enters the
camera.
● The vehicle is driven where the road diverges, merges, etc.
● The vehicle is driven on a slope.
● The vehicle is driven on a road which tilts left or right, or a winding road.
● The vehicle is driven on an unpaved or rough road.
● The vehicle is driven around a sharp curve.
● The traffic lane is excessively narrow or wide.
● The vehicle is extremely tilted due to carrying heavy luggage or having
improper tire pressure.
● The distance to the preceding vehicle is extremely short.
● The vehicle is moving up and down a large amount due to road conditions
during driving (poor roads or road seams).
● The headlight lenses are dirty and emit a faint amount of light at night, or the
beam axis has deviated.
● The vehicle is struck by a crosswind.
● The vehicle has just changed lanes or crossed an intersection.
● Snow tires, etc. are equipped.
234
4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Warning message
Warning messages are used to indicate a system malfunction or to inform the
driver of the need for caution while driving. (P. 489)
■ Customization
The following settings can be changed.
For how to change settings, refer to P. 564
Function Setting details
Lane departure alert function Adjust alert sensitivity
Steering control function Turn steering wheel assistance on and off
Vehicle sway warning function
Turn function on and off
Adjust alert sensitivity
235
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
In vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle automatically
accelerates and decelerates to match the speed changes of the pre-
ceding vehicle even if the accelerator pedal is not depressed. In con-
stant speed control mode, the vehicle runs at a fixed speed.
Use the dynamic radar cruise control on freeways and highways.
● Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode (P. 238)
● Constant speed control mode (P. 243)
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch
Set speed
Display
Indicators
Cruise control switch
Dynamic radar cruise control
Summary of functions
Vehicles with a monochrome
display
Vehicles with a color display
1
2
3
4
5
236
4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
■ Before using dynamic radar cruise control
Driving safely is the sole responsibility of the driver. Do not rely solely on the
system, and drive safely by always paying careful attention to your sur-
roundings.
The dynamic radar cruise control provides driving assistance to reduce the
driver's burden. However, there are limitations to the assistance provided.
Set the speed appropriately depending on the speed limit, traffic flow, road
conditions, weather conditions, etc. The driver is responsible for checking
the set speed.
Even when the system is functioning normally, the condition of the preced-
ing vehicle as detected by the system may differ from the condition
observed by the driver. Therefore, the driver must always remain alert,
assess the danger of each situation and drive safely. Relying on this system
or assuming the system ensures safety while driving can lead to an acci-
dent, resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Cautions regarding the driving assist systems
Observe the following precautions, as there are limitations to the assistance
provided by the system.
Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
● Assisting the driver to measure following distance
The dynamic radar cruise control is only intended to help the driver in
determining the following distance between the driver’s own vehicle and a
designated vehicle traveling ahead. It is not a mechanism that allows care-
less or inattentive driving, and it is not a system that can assist the driver in
low-visibility conditions. It is still necessary for driver to pay close attention
to the vehicle’s surroundings.
● Assisting the driver to judge proper following distance
The dynamic radar cruise control determines whether the following dis-
tance between the driver’s own vehicle and a designated vehicle traveling
ahead is within a set range. It is not capable of making any other type of
judgement. Therefore, it is absolutely necessary for the driver to remain
vigilant and to determine whether or not there is a possibility of danger in
any given situation.
● Assisting the driver to operate the vehicle
The dynamic radar cruise control has limited capability to prevent or avoid
a collision with a vehicle traveling ahead. Therefore, if there is ever any
danger, the driver must take immediate and direct control of the vehicle
and act appropriately in order to ensure the safety of all involved.
■ To avoid inadvertent dynamic radar cruise control activation
Switch the dynamic radar cruise control off using the “ON-OFF” button
when not in use.
237
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
■ Situations unsuitable for dynamic radar cruise control
Do not use dynamic radar cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in inappropriate speed control and could cause an acci-
dent resulting in death or serious injury.
● Roads where there are pedestrians, cyclers, etc.
● In heavy traffic
● On roads with sharp bends
● On winding roads
● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
● On steep downhills, or where there are sudden changes between sharp up
and down gradients
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
● At entrances to freeways and highways
● When weather conditions are bad enough that they may prevent the sen-
sors from detecting correctly (fog, snow, sandstorm, heavy rain, etc.)
● When there is rain, snow, etc. on the front surface of the radar sensor or
camera sensor
● In traffic conditions that require frequent repeated acceleration and decel-
eration
● During emergency towing
● When an approach warning buzzer is heard often
238
4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
This mode employs a radar sensor to detect the presence of vehicles
up to approximately 328 ft. (100 m) ahead, determines the current
vehicle-to-vehicle following distance, and operates to maintain a suit-
able following distance from the vehicle ahead.
Note that vehicle-to-vehicle distance will close in when traveling on long
downhill slopes.
Example of constant speed cruising
When there are no vehicles ahead
The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver. The desired vehicle-to-
vehicle distance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance switch.
Example of deceleration cruising and follow-up cruising
When a preceding vehicle driving slower than the set speed
appears
When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, the system automatically
decelerates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in vehicle speed is
necessary, the system applies the brakes (the stop lights will come on at
this time). The system will respond to changes in the speed of the vehicle
ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance set by the driver.
Approach warning warns you when the system cannot decelerate suffi-
ciently to prevent your vehicle from closing in on the vehicle ahead.
Example of acceleration
When there are no longer any preceding vehicles driving slower
than the set speed
The system accelerates until the set speed is reached. The system then
returns to constant speed cruising.
Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
1
2
3
239
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Press the “ON-OFF” button to
activate the cruise control.
Radar cruise control indicator will
come on and a message will be
displayed on the multi-information
display.
Press the button again to deacti-
vate the cruise control.
If the “ON-OFF” button is pressed
and held for 1.5 seconds or more,
the system turns on in constant
speed control mode. (P. 243)
Accelerate or decelerate, with accelerator pedal operation, to the
desired vehicle speed (at or above approximately 30 mph [50 km/h])
and push the lever down to set the speed.
Cruise control “SET” indicator will come on.
The vehicle speed at the moment the lever is released becomes the set
speed.
Setting the vehicle speed (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode)
1
2
Vehicles with a monochrome
display
Vehicles with a color display
240
4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set speed
is displayed.
Increases the speed
Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Momentarily
move the lever in the desired
direction.
Large adjustment: Hold the lever
up or down to change the speed,
and release when the desired
speed is reached.
In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the set speed will be
increased or decreased as follows:
Type A
Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h)*
1
or 1 km/h (0.6 mph)*
2
each time
the lever is operated
Large adjustment: Increases or decreases in 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
*
1
or 1 km/h
(0.6 mph)
*
2
increments for as long as the lever is held
Type B
Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h)*
1
or 1 km/h (0.6 mph)*
2
each time
the lever is operated
Large adjustment: Increases or decreases in 5 mph (8 km/h)
*
1
or 5 km/h
(3.1 mph)
*
2
increments for as long as the lever is held
In the constant speed control mode (P. 243), the set speed will be
increased or decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h)*
1
or 1 km/h (0.6 mph)*
2
each time
the lever is operated
Large adjustment: The speed will continue to change while the lever is
held.
*
1
: When the set speed is shown in “MPH”
*
2
: When the set speed is shown in “km/h”
Adjusting the set speed
1
2
241
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Pressing the switch changes the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance as fol-
lows:
Long
Medium
Short
The vehicle-to-vehicle distance is
set automatically to long mode
when the engine switch is turned to
the “ON” position (vehicles without
a smart key system) or IGNITION
ON mode (vehicles with a smart
key system).
If a vehicle is running ahead of you, the preceding vehicle mark will also be
displayed.
Select a distance from the table below. Note that the distances shown
correspond to a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Vehicle-to-vehicle
distance increases/decreases in accordance with vehicle speed.
Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle distance (vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance control mode)
Preceding
vehicle mark
1
2
3
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings (vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode)
Distance options Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
Long Approximately 160 ft. (50 m)
Medium Approximately 130 ft. (40 m)
Short Approximately 100 ft. (30 m)
242
4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Pulling the lever toward you
cancels the speed control.
The speed setting is also canceled
when the brake pedal is depressed
or the clutch pedal is depressed
(vehicles with a manual transmis-
sion) for some seconds.
Pushing the lever up resumes
the cruise control and returns
vehicle speed to the set speed.
However, cruise control does not resume when the vehicle speed is
approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or less.
When your vehicle is too close to
a vehicle ahead, and sufficient
automatic deceleration via the
cruise control is not possible, the
display will flash and the buzzer
will sound to alert the driver. An
example of this would be if
another driver cuts in front of you
while you are following a vehicle.
Depress the brake pedal to
ensure an appropriate vehicle-to-
vehicle distance.
■ Warnings may not occur when
In the following instances, warnings may not occur even when the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is small.
● When the speed of the preceding vehicle matches or exceeds
your vehicle speed
● When the preceding vehicle is traveling at an extremely slow
speed
● Immediately after the cruise control speed was set
● When depressing the accelerator pedal
Canceling and resuming the speed control
1
2
Approach warning (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)
243
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
When constant speed control mode is selected, your vehicle will main-
tain a set speed without controlling the vehicle-to-vehicle distance.
Select this mode only when vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
does not function correctly due to a dirty radar sensor, etc.
With the cruise control off,
press and hold the “ON-OFF”
button for 1.5 seconds or more.
Immediately after the “ON-OFF”
button is pressed, the radar cruise
control indicator will come on.
Afterwards, it switches to the cruise
control indicator.
Switching to constant speed con-
trol mode is only possible when
operating the lever with the cruise
control off.
Accelerate or decelerate, with accelerator pedal operation, to the
desired vehicle speed (at or above approximately 25 mph [40 km/h])
and push the lever down to set the speed.
Cruise control “SET” indicator will come on.
The vehicle speed at the moment the lever is released becomes the set
speed.
Adjusting the speed setting: P. 240
Canceling and resuming the speed setting: P. 242
Selecting constant speed control mode
1
2
Vehicles with a monochrome
display
Vehicles with a color display
244
4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Dynamic radar cruise control can be set when
Vehicles with a continuously variable transmission
● The shift lever is in D or range 4 or higher of S has been selected.
(vehicles without paddle shift switches)
● The shift lever is in D.
(vehicles with paddle shift switches)
● Range 4 or higher of D has been selected by using the paddle shift switch.
(vehicles with paddle shift switches)
● Vehicle speed is at or above approximately 30 mph (50 km/h).
Vehicles with a manual transmission
● The shift lever is in the position 2 or higher.
● Vehicle speed is at or above approximately 30 mph (50 km/h).
■ Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed
The vehicle can accelerate by operating the accelerator pedal. After acceler-
ating, the set speed resumes. However, during vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode, the vehicle speed may decrease below the set speed in order
to maintain the distance to the preceding vehicle.
■ Automatic cancelation of vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is automatically canceled in the fol-
lowing situations:
● Actual vehicle speed falls at or below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
● VSC is activated.
● TRAC is activated for a period of time.
● When the VSC or TRAC system is turned off.
● The sensor cannot detect correctly because it is covered in some way.
● Pre-collision braking is activated.
● The engine speed is too high, or too low. (vehicles with a manual transmis-
sion)
If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is automatically canceled for any
other reason, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Toyota
dealer.
245
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Automatic cancelation of constant speed control mode
Constant speed control mode is automatically canceled in the following situa-
tions:
● Actual vehicle speed is more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below
the set vehicle speed.
● Actual vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
● VSC is activated.
● TRAC is activated for a period of time.
● When the VSC or TRAC system is turned off.
● Pre-collision braking is activated.
● The engine speed is too high, or too low. (vehicles with a manual transmis-
sion)
If constant speed control mode is automatically canceled for any other rea-
son, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Toyota dealer.
■ Brake system operation sound
If the brakes are applied automatically while the vehicle is in vehicle-to-
vehicle distance control mode, a brake system operation sound may be
heard. This dose not indicate a malfunction.
■ Warning messages and buzzers for dynamic radar cruise control
Warning messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or
to inform the driver of the need for caution while driving. If a warning message
is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the
instructions. (P. 489)
■ When the sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead
In the case of the following and depending on the conditions, operate the
brake pedal when deceleration of the system is insufficient or operate the
accelerator pedal when acceleration is required.
As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect these types of vehicles, the
approach warning (P. 242) may not be activated.
● Vehicles that cut in suddenly
● Vehicles traveling at low speeds
● Vehicles that are not moving in the same lane
● Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board, etc.)
● Motorcycles traveling in the same lane
246
4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
● When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the
detecting of the sensor
■ Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
may not function correctly
In the case of the following conditions, operate the brake pedal (or accelera-
tor pedal, depending on the situation) as necessary.
As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect vehicles ahead, the system
may not operate properly.
● When the vehicle ahead of you decelerates suddenly
● When driving on a road surrounded by a structure, such as in a tunnel or on
a bridge
● While the vehicle speed is decreasing to the set speed after the vehicle
accelerates by depressing the accelerator pedal
● When your vehicle is pointing upwards
(caused by a heavy load in the luggage
compartment, etc.)
● Preceding vehicle has an extremely
high ground clearance
● When the road curves or when the
lanes are narrow
● When steering wheel operation or your
position in the lane is unstable
247
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Vehicles without a smart key sys-
tem: The rear view image is dis-
played when the shift position is in
R and the engine switch is in the
“ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system:
The rear view image is displayed
when the shift position is in R and
the engine switch is in IGNITION
ON mode.
The rear view monitor system will
be deactivated when the shift lever
is in any position other than R.
Rear view monitor system
The rear view monitor system assists the driver by displaying
guide lines and an image of the view behind the vehicle while
backing up, for example while parking.
The screen illustrations used in this text are intended as examples,
and may differ from the image that is actually displayed on the
screen.
248
4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Screen description
Vehicle width guide lines
The line indicates a guide path when the vehicle is being backed
straight up.
The displayed width is wider than the actual vehicle width.
Vehicle center guide line
The line indicates the estimated vehicle center on the ground.
Distance guide line
The line shows points approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red) from the edge
of the bumper.
Distance guide line
The line shows distance behind the vehicle, a point approximately 3 ft.
(1 m) (blue) from the edge of the bumper.
Using the rear view monitor system
1
2
3
4
249
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Area displayed on screen
The rear view monitor system
displays an image of the view
from the bumper of the rear
area of the vehicle.
To adjust the image on the rear
view monitor system screen.
(P. 282)
• The area displayed on the
screen may vary according to
vehicle orientation conditions.
• Objects which are close to either
corner of the bumper or under
the bumper cannot be dis-
played.
• The camera uses a special lens.
The distance of the image that
appears on the screen differs
from the actual distance.
• Items which are located higher than the camera may not be displayed
on the monitor.
Rear view monitor system precautions
Corners of bumper
250
4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Rear view monitor system camera
The camera for the rear view
monitor system is located
above the license plate.
● Using the camera
If dirt or foreign matter (such as water droplets, snow, mud etc.)
is adhering to the camera, it cannot transmit a clear image. In
this case, flush it with a large quantity of water and wipe the cam-
era lens clean with a soft and wet cloth.
■ Differences between the screen and the actual road
The distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines may not
actually be parallel with the dividing lines of the parking space, even
when they appear to be so. Be sure to check visually.
The distances between the vehicle width guide lines and the left
and right dividing lines of the parking space may not be equal, even
when they appear to be so. Be sure to check visually.
The distance guide lines give a distance guide for flat road sur-
faces. In any of the following situations, there is a margin of error
between the fixed guide lines on the screen and the actual dis-
tance/course on the road.
251
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
● When the ground behind the vehicle slopes up sharply
The distance guide lines will
appear to be closer to the
vehicle than the actual dis-
tance. Because of this,
objects will appear to be far-
ther away than they actually
are. In the same way, there
will be a margin of error
between the guidelines and
the actual distance/course on
the road.
● When the ground behind the vehicle slopes down sharply
The distance guide lines will
appear to be farther from the
vehicle than the actual dis-
tance. Because of this,
objects will appear to be
closer than they actually are.
In the same way, there will be
a margin of error between
the guidelines and the actual
distance/course on the road.
252
4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
● When any part of the vehicle sags
When any part of the vehicle
sags due to the number of
passengers or the distribu-
tion of the load, there is a
margin of error between the
fixed guide lines on the
screen and the actual dis-
tance/course on the road.
■ When approaching three-dimensional objects
The distance guide lines are displayed according to flat surfaced
objects (such as the road). It is not possible to determine the posi-
tion of three-dimensional objects (such as vehicles) using the vehi-
cle width guide lines and distance guide lines. When approaching a
three-dimensional object that extends outward (such as the flatbed
of a truck), be careful of the following.
● Distance guide lines
Visually check the surround-
ings and the area behind the
vehicle. On the screen, it
appears that a truck is
parked at point . However,
in reality if you back up to
point , you will hit the
truck. On the screen, it
appears that is closest
and is farthest away.
However, in reality, the dis-
tance to and is the
same, and is farther than
and .
A margin of error
2
1
1
3
1 3
2
1 3
253
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Vehicle width guide lines
Visually check the surroundings and the area behind the vehicle. In
the case shown below, the truck appears to be outside of the vehi-
cle width guide lines and the vehicle does not look as if it hits the
truck. However, the rear body of the truck may actually cross over
the vehicle width guide lines. In reality if you back up as guided by
the vehicle width guide lines, the vehicle may hit the truck.
Vehicle width guide lines
1
254
4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
If you notice any symptoms
If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the likely cause
and the solution, and re-check.
If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer.
Things you should know
Likely cause Solution
The image is difficult to see
• The vehicle is in a dark area
• The temperature around the lens
is either high or low
• The outside temperature is low
• There are water droplets on the
camera
• It is raining or humid
• Foreign matter (mud etc.) is
adhering to the camera
• Sunlight or headlights are shining
directly into the camera
• The vehicle is under fluorescent
lights, sodium lights, mercury
lights etc.
If this happens due to these causes,
it does not indicate a malfunction.
Back up while visually checking the
vehicle’s surroundings. (Use the
monitor again once conditions have
been improved.)
To adjust the image on the rear view
monitor system screen. (P. 282)
The image is blurry
Dirt or foreign matter (such as water
droplets, snow, mud etc.) is adher-
ing to the camera.
Flush the camera with a large quan-
tity of water and wipe the camera
lens clean with a soft and wet cloth.
The image is out of alignment
The camera or surrounding area has
received a strong impact.
Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
The fixed guide lines are very far out of alignment
• The vehicle is tilted (there is a
heavy load on the vehicle, tire
pressure is low due to a tire punc-
ture, etc.)
• The vehicle is used on an incline.
If this happens due to these causes,
it does not indicate a malfunction.
Back up while visually checking the
vehicle's surroundings.
The camera position is out of align-
ment.
Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
255
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
■ When using the rear view monitor system
The rear view monitor system is a supplemental device intended to assist
the driver when backing up. When backing up, be sure to visually check all
around the vehicle both directly and using the mirrors before proceeding. If
you do not, you may hit another vehicle, and could possibly cause an acci-
dent.
Pay attention to the following precautions when using the rear view monitor
system.
● Never depend on the rear view monitor system entirely when backing up.
The image and the position of the guide lines displayed on the screen may
differ from the actual state.
Use caution, just as you would when backing up any vehicle.
● Be sure to back up slowly, depressing the brake pedal to control vehicle
speed.
● The instructions given are only guidelines.
When and how much to turn the steering wheel will vary according to traf-
fic conditions, road surface conditions, vehicle condition, etc. when park-
ing. It is necessary to be fully aware of this before using the rear view
monitor system.
● When parking, be sure to check that the parking space will accommodate
your vehicle before maneuvering into it.
● Do not use the rear view monitor system in the following cases:
• On icy or slick road surfaces, or in snow
• When using tire chains or the compact spare tire
• When the trunk lid is not closed completely
• On roads that are not flat or straight, such as curves or slopes.
● In low temperatures, the screen may darken or the image may become
faint. The image could distort when the vehicle is moving, or you may
become unable to see the image on the screen. Be sure to visually check
all around the vehicle both directly and using the mirrors before proceed-
ing.
● If the tire sizes are changed, the position of the fixed guide lines displayed
on the screen may change.
● The camera uses a special lens. The distances between objects and
pedestrians that appear in the image displayed on the screen will differ
from the actual distances. (P. 250)
256
4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
NOTICE
■ How to use the camera
● The rear view monitor system may not operate properly in the following
cases.
• If the back of the vehicle is hit, the position and mounting angle of the
camera may change.
• As the camera has a water proof construction, do not detach, disassem-
ble or modify it. This may cause incorrect operation.
• When cleaning the camera lens, flush the camera with a large quantity
of water and wipe it with a soft and wet cloth. Strongly rubbing the cam-
era lens may cause the camera lens to be scratched and unable to
transmit a clear image.
• Do not allow organic solvent, car wax, window cleaner or glass coating
to adhere to the camera. If this happens, wipe it off as soon as possible.
• If the temperature changes rapidly, such as when hot water is poured
on the vehicle in cold weather, the system may not operate normally.
• When washing the vehicle, do not apply intensive bursts of water to the
camera or camera area. Doing so may result in the camera malfunc-
tioning.
● Do not expose the camera to strong impact as this could cause a malfunc-
tion. If this happens, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer as
soon as possible.
257
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
◆ ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly,
or if the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface
◆ Brake assist
Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal
is depressed when the system detects a panic stop situation
◆ VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)
Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or
turning on slippery road surfaces
◆ TRAC (Traction Control)
Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the drive wheels from
spinning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads
◆ Hill-start assist control
Helps to reduce the backward movement of the vehicle when start-
ing on an uphill
◆ EPS (Electric Power Steering)
Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to
turn the steering wheel
Driving assist systems
To keep driving safety and performance, the following systems
operate automatically in response to various driving situations.
Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and
should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehi-
cle.
258
4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
The slip indicator light will flash
while the TRAC/VSC systems are
operating.
If the vehicle gets stuck in mud, dirt or snow, the TRAC system may
reduce power from the engine to the wheels. Pressing to turn the
system off may make it easier for you to rock the vehicle in order to
free it.
To turn the TRAC system off, quickly press and release .
Press again to turn the system back on.
When the TRAC/VSC systems are operating
Disabling the TRAC system
Vehicles with a monochrome
display
The “TRAC OFF” indicator light
will come on.
Vehicles with a color display
“Traction Control Turned Off” will
be shown.
259
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Turning off both TRAC and VSC systems
To turn the TRAC and VSC systems off, press and hold for more than 3
seconds while the vehicle is stopped.
The “TRAC OFF” indicator light and VSC OFF indicator light will come on.
*
(vehicles with a monochrome display)
“Traction Control Turned Off” will be shown and VSC OFF indicator light will
come on.
* (vehicles with a color display)
Press again to turn the systems back on.
*: Pre-collision brake assist and pre-collision braking will also be disabled.
The pre-collision system warning light will come on and the message will be
shown on the multi-information display. (P. 225)
■ When the “TRAC OFF” indicator light comes on even if has not been
pressed (vehicles with a monochrome display)
TRAC cannot be operated. Contact your Toyota dealer.
■ When “Traction Control Turned Off” is shown even if has not been
pressed (vehicles with a color display)
TRAC cannot be operated. Contact your Toyota dealer.
■ Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, VSC, TRAC and
hill-start assist control systems
● A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the brake pedal
is depressed repeatedly, when the engine is started or just after the vehicle
begins to move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has
occurred in any of these systems.
● Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are
operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.
• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
• A motor sound may be heard also after the vehicle comes to a stop.
• The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated.
• The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.
■ EPS operation sound
When the steering wheel is operated, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be
heard. This does not indicate a malfunction.
■ Automatic reactivation of TRAC and VSC systems
After turning the TRAC and VSC systems off, the systems will be automati-
cally re-enabled in the following situations:
● Vehicles without a smart key system: When the engine switch is turned to
the “LOCK” position
Vehicles with a smart key system: When the engine switch is turned off
● If only the TRAC system is turned off, the TRAC will turn on when vehicle
speed increases
If both the TRAC and VSC systems are turned off, automatic re-enabling will
not occur when vehicle speed increases.
260
4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Reduced effectiveness of the EPS system
The effectiveness of the EPS system is reduced to prevent the system from
overheating when there is frequent steering input over an extended period of
time. The steering wheel may feel heavy as a result. Should this occur, refrain
from excessive steering input or stop the vehicle and turn the engine off. The
EPS system should return to normal within 10 minutes.
■ Operating conditions of hill-start assist control
When the following four conditions are met, the hill-start assist control will
operate:
● Vehicles with a continuously variable transmission: The shift lever is in a
position other than P or N (when starting off forward/backward on an upward
incline)
● Vehicles with a manual transmission: The shift lever is in a position other
than R when starting off forward on an upward incline, or the shift lever is in
R when starting off backward on an upward incline.
● The vehicle is stopped
● The accelerator pedal is not depressed
● The parking brake is not engaged
■ Automatic system cancelation of hill-start assist control
The hill-start assist control will turn off in any of the following situations:
● Vehicles with a continuously variable transmission: The shift lever is shifted
to P or N
● Vehicles with a manual transmission: The shift lever is shifted to R when
starting off forward on an upward incline, or the shift lever is shifted to other
than R when starting off backward on an upward incline.
● The accelerator pedal is depressed
● The parking brake is engaged
● 2 seconds at maximum elapsed after the brake pedal is released
261
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
■ The ABS does not operate effectively when
● The limits of tire gripping performance have been exceeded (such as
excessively worn tires on a snow covered road).
● The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on wet or slick roads.
■ Stopping distance when the ABS is operating may exceed that of nor-
mal conditions
The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always
maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you, especially in the
following situations:
● When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads
● When driving with tire chains
● When driving over bumps in the road
● When driving over roads with potholes or uneven surfaces
■ TRAC/VSC may not operate effectively when
Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slip-
pery road surfaces, even if the TRAC/VSC system is operating.
Drive the vehicle carefully in conditions where stability and power may be
lost.
■ Hill-start assist control does not operate effectively when
● Do not overly rely on hill-start assist control. Hill-start assist control may
not operate effectively on steep inclines and roads covered with ice.
● Unlike the parking brake, hill-start assist control is not intended to hold the
vehicle stationary for an extended period of time. Do not attempt to use
hill-start assist control to hold the vehicle on an incline, as doing so may
lead to an accident.
■ When the TRAC/VSC is activated
The slip indicator light flashes. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may
cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes.
■ When the TRAC/VSC systems are turned off
Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road condi-
tions. As these are the systems to help ensure vehicle stability and driving
force, do not turn the TRAC/VSC systems off unless necessary.
262
4-5. Using the driving support systems
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
■ Replacing tires
Make sure that all tires are of the specified size, brand, tread pattern and
total load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the
recommended tire inflation pressure level.
The ABS, TRAC and VSC systems will not function correctly if different tires
are installed on the vehicle.
Contact your Toyota dealer for further information when replacing tires or
wheels.
■ Handling of tires and the suspension
Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect
the driving assist systems, and may cause a system to malfunction.
263
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
4-6. Driving tips
● Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside tempera-
tures.
• Engine oil
• Engine coolant
• Washer fluid
● Have a service technician inspect the condition of the battery.
● Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of tire
chains for the front tires.
Ensure that all tires are the same size and brand, and that chains match
the size of the tires.
Perform the following according to the driving conditions:
● Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen.
Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe away
the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.
● To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan,
remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in
front of the windshield.
● Check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have accu-
mulated on the exterior lights, vehicle’s roof, chassis, around the
tires or on the brakes.
● Remove any snow or mud from the bottom of your shoes before
getting in the vehicle.
Winter driving tips
Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before
driving the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a man-
ner appropriate to the prevailing weather conditions.
Preparation for winter
Before driving the vehicle
264
4-6. Driving tips
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Accelerate the vehicle slowly, keep a safe distance between you and
the vehicle ahead, and drive at a reduced speed suitable to road con-
ditions.
● Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P (continuously variable
transmission), 1 or R (manual transmission) without setting the
parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from
being released. If the vehicle is parked without setting the parking
brake, make sure to block the wheels.
Failure to do so may be dangerous because it may cause the vehi-
cle to move unexpectedly, possibly leading to an accident.
● Vehicles with a continuously variable transmission: If the vehicle is
parked without setting the parking brake, confirm that the shift lever
cannot be moved out of P
*.
*: The shift lever will be locked if it is attempted to be shifted from P to any
other position without depressing the brake pedal. If the shift lever can be
shifted from P, there may be a problem with the shift lock system. Have the
vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately
When driving the vehicle
When parking the vehicle
265
4-6. Driving tips
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Vehicles with 15-inch tires
Use the tire chains of correct size and type.
Use SAE Class “S” type radial tire chains except radial cable chains or
V-bar type chains.
Vehicles with 16-inch and 17-inch tires
Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the snow chains.
Chain size is regulated for each tire size.
Side chain:
0.12 in. (3 mm) in diameter
0.39 in. (10 mm) in width
1.18 in. (30 mm) in length
Cross chain:
0.16 in. (4 mm) in diameter
0.55 in. (14 mm) in width
0.98 in. (25 mm) in length
Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary depending on loca-
tion and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing
chains.
■ Tire chain installation
Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains:
● Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.
● Install tire chains on the front tires. Do not install tire chains on the rear tires.
● Install tire chains on front tires as tightly as possible. Retighten chains after
driving 1/4 1/2 mile (0.5 1.0 km).
● Install tire chains following the instructions provided with the tire chains.
Selecting tire chains
1
2
3
4
5
6
Regulations on the use of tire chains
266
4-6. Driving tips
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
■ Driving with snow tires
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or
serious injury.
● Use tires of the size specified.
● Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.
● Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of
snow tires being used.
● Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.
■ Driving with tire chains
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failure to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely,
and may cause death or serious injury.
● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being
used, or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.
● Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.
● Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting
operations that cause sudden engine braking.
● Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle con-
trol is maintained.
● Do not use LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control) system.
NOTICE
■ Repairing or replacing snow tires (vehicles with a tire pressure
warning system)
Request repairs or replacement of snow tires from Toyota dealers or
legitimate tire retailers.
This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the
operation of the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.
■ Fitting tire chains (vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)
The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function cor-
rectly when tire chains are fitted.
267
4-6. Driving tips
4
Driving
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
268
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
5-1. Basic Operations
Audio system types........... 270
Steering wheel audio
switches .......................... 271
AUX port/USB port............ 272
Entune Audio .................... 273
Basic audio operations...... 276
5-2. Setup
Setup menu....................... 278
General settings................ 279
Audio settings ................... 281
Display settings................. 282
Voice settings.................... 283
5-3. Using Entune Audio
Selecting the audio
source ............................. 284
List screen operation......... 285
Optimal use of
Entune Audio .................. 287
5-4. Using the radio
Radio operation................. 288
5-5. Playing an audio CD and
MP3/WMA/AAC discs
CD player operation .......... 290
5
Audio system
269
5
Audio system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
5-6. Using an external
device
Listening to an iPod .......... 296
Listening to a USB
memory device................ 301
Using the AUX port ........... 305
5-7. Connecting Bluetooth
®
Preparations to use
wireless
communication................ 306
Registering a Bluetooth
®
audio player for the
first time .......................... 310
Registering a Bluetooth
®
phone for the first time .... 311
Registering a Bluetooth
®
device.............................. 312
Connecting a Bluetooth
®
device.............................. 315
Displaying a Bluetooth
®
device details .................. 318
Detailed Bluetooth
®
system settings ............... 319
5-8. Bluetooth
®
Audio
Listening to Bluetooth
®
Audio............................... 320
5-9. Bluetooth
®
phone
Using a Bluetooth
®
Phone ............................. 322
Making a call ..................... 325
Receiving a call................. 328
Speaking on the phone..... 329
Bluetooth
®
phone
message function............ 333
Using the steering wheel
switches .......................... 338
Bluetooth
®
phone
settings ........................... 339
Contact/
Call History Settings ....... 341
What to do if...
(Troubleshooting)............ 351
5-10. Bluetooth
®
Bluetooth
®
......................... 355
5-11. Using the voice
command system
Voice command system.... 359
271
5-1. Basic Operations
5
Audio system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Volume switch
• Increases/decreases volume
• Press and hold: Continuously increases/decreases volume
Cursor switch
• Selects (radio stations/radio presets/tracks/files/songs)
• Moves cursor
• Press and hold: Seeks up/down (radio stations)
• Fast up/down (tracks/files)
“MODE/HOLD” switch:
• Changes audio source
• Press and hold: Mutes or pauses the current operation.
To cancel the mute or pause, press and hold again.
Steering wheel audio switches
Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on
the steering wheel.
Operation may differ depending on the type of audio system or
navigation system. For details, refer to the manual provided with
the audio system or navigation system.
Operating the audio system using the steering wheel switches
Type A Type B
WARNING
■ To reduce the risk of an accident
Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.
1
2
3
272
5-1. Basic Operations
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
iPod
Open the cover and connect an
iPod using an iPod cable.
Turn on the power of the iPod if
it is not turned on.
■
USB memory
Open the cover and connect a USB memory device.
Turn on the power of the USB memory device if it is not turned on.
■
Portable audio player
Open the cover and connect a portable audio player.
Turn on the power of the portable audio player if it is not turned on.
■ AUX port
The AUX port only supports audio input.
AUX port/USB port
Connect an iPod, USB memory device or portable audio player
to the AUX port/USB port as indicated below. Select “iPod”,
“USB” or “AUX” on the audio source selection screen and the
device can be operated via audio system.
Connecting using the AUX port/USB port
WARNING
■ While driving
Do not connect a device or operate the device controls.
273
5-1. Basic Operations
5
Audio system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Entune Audio
: If equipped
With an Entune Audio
Operations such as listening to audio, using the hands-free
phone and changing Entune Audio settings are started by using
the following buttons.
With an Entune Audio Plus
Owners of this system should refer to the “NAVIGATION AND
MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL”.
Entune Audio operation buttons
Display the “Select Audio Source”
screen or audio top screen.
(P. 284)
Press this button to access the
Bluetooth
®
hands-free system.
(P. 322)
Press this button to access the fuel consumption screen.
(P. 96)
Press this button to customize the function settings. (P. 278)
274
5-1. Basic Operations
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
By touching the screen with your finger, you can control Entune Audio,
etc.
■ Drag*
Touch the screen with your finger, and move the screen to the
desired position.
● Scrolling the lists
■ Flick*
Touch the screen with your finger and quickly move the screen by
flicking your finger.
● Scrolling the main screen page
*: The above operations may not be performed on all screens.
■ Capacitive touch switches
The control panel uses capacitive touch sensors.
● In the following cases, incorrect operation or non-response may occur.
• If the operating section is dirty or has liquid attached to it, incorrect opera-
tion or non-response may occur.
• If the operating section receives electromagnetic waves, incorrect opera-
tion or non-response may occur.
• If wearing gloves during operation, non-response may occur.
• If fingernails are used to operate the system, non-response may occur.
• If a touch pen is used to operate the system, non-response may occur.
• If the palm of your hand touches the operating section during operation,
incorrect operation may occur.
• If the palm of your hand touches the operating section, incorrect opera-
tion may occur.
• If operations are performed quickly, non-response may occur.
● Please do not reach your hand to the part of button when Entune Audio turn
on. Because the button may become unresponsive for a while. But it will be
back to normal for a given time even if Entune Audio turned on under the
condition.
■ When using the touch screen
● If the screen is cold, the display may be dark, or the system may seem to be
operating slightly slower than normal.
● The screen may seem dark and hard to see when viewed through sun-
glasses. Change your angle of viewing, adjust the display on the “Display
Settings” screen (P. 282) or remove your sunglasses.
● Flick operations may not be performed smoothly in high altitudes.
Operating the touch screen
275
5-1. Basic Operations
5
Audio system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
NOTICE
■ To avoid damaging the touch screen
● To prevent damaging the screen, lightly touch the screen buttons with your
finger.
● Do not use objects other than your finger to touch the screen.
● Wipe off fingerprints using a glass cleaning cloth. Do not use chemical
cleaners to clean the screen, as they may damage the touch screen.
276
5-1. Basic Operations
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Basic audio operations
Basic audio operations and functions common to each mode are
explained in this section.
Operating Entune Audio
Press the “” or “” button to
seek up or down for a radio
station, or to access a desired
track or file.
Press this knob to turn Entune Audio on and off,
and turn it to adjust the volume.
Press this button
to eject a disc
Press to pause or
resume playing music.
Insert a disc into
the disc slot
:Select to pause music.
Turn this knob to select radio
station bands, tracks and files.
Also the knob can be used to
select items in the list display.
:Select to resume playing music.
277
5-1. Basic Operations
5
Audio system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Select to change on/off.
Select to change on/off.
■ Using cellular phones
Interference may be heard through Entune Audio’s speakers if a cellular
phone is being used inside or close to the vehicle while Entune Audio is oper-
ating.
Random playback
Repeat play
WARNING
■ Laser product
This product is a class 1 laser product.
Do not open the cover of the player or attempt to repair the unit yourself.
Refer servicing to qualified personnel.
● Laser products
• Do not take this unit apart or attempt to make any changes yourself.
This is an intricate unit that uses a laser pickup to retrieve information
from the surface of compact discs. The laser is carefully shielded so
that its rays remain inside the cabinet. Therefore, never try to disassem-
ble the player or alter any of its parts since you may be exposed to laser
rays and dangerous voltages.
• This product utilizes a laser.
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than
those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH THIS PRODUCT WILL
INCREASE EYE HAZARD.
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave Entune Audio on longer than necessary when the engine is off.
■ To avoid damaging Entune Audio
Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids on Entune Audio.
278
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
5-2. Setup
Press the “SETUP” button to display the “Setup” screen.
Select to adjust the settings for
operation sounds, screen ani-
mation, etc. (P. 279)
Select to set the voice settings.
(P. 283)
Select to adjust the settings for
contrast and brightness of the
screen. (P. 28 2 )
Select to adjust the settings for registering, removing, connecting
and disconnecting Bluetooth
®
devices. (P. 3 19 )
Select to adjust the settings for phone sound, contact, etc.
(P. 341)
Select to set audio settings. (P. 2 8 1)
Select to turn the screen off.
Select to set the vehicle customization (P. 564).
Setup menu
You can adjust Entune Audio to your desired settings.
Display “Setup” screen
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
279
5-2. Setup
5
Audio system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Press the “SETUP” button.
Select “General” on the “Setup”
screen.
“English”, “Français” or
“Español” can be selected.
On/off can be selected to
sound beeps.
Select to change the screen
color.
Select to change the key-
board layout.
Select to change the capaci-
tive touch button sensor sen-
sitivity.
The animation effect for the screen can be set to on/off.
Select to delete personal data (P. 2 80 )
Select to update program versions. For details, contact your
Toyota dealer.
Select to display the software information. Notices related to third
party software used in this product are enlisted. (This includes
instructions for obtaining such software, where applicable.)
■ To return to the default volume settings
Select “Default”, and then “Yes”.
General settings
Settings are available for adjusting the operation sounds,
screen animation, etc.
Screen for general settings
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
280
5-2. Setup
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Select “Delete Personal Data” on the “General Settings” screen.
Select “Delete”.
Check carefully beforehand, as data cannot be retrieved once deleted.
A confirmation screen will be displayed. Select “Yes”.
The following personal data will be deleted or changed to its default
settings.
• General settings
• Audio settings
• Phone settings
Delete personal data
1
2
3
281
5-2. Setup
5
Audio system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Press the “SETUP” button.
Select “Audio” on the “Setup” screen.
Number of Radio Presets
Select the number of radio
preset stations.
Display Cover Art on/off
Automatic Sound Levelizer
Select “Automatic Sound Levelizer”.
Select “High”, “Mid”, “Low” or “Off”.
■ About Automatic Sound Leveliser (ASL)
ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to the vehi-
cle speed.
Audio settings
Settings are available for adjusting the radio operation, cover
art, etc.
Screen for audio settings
1
2
1
2
3
Automatic sound leveliser (ASL)
1
2
282
5-2. Setup
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Press the “SETUP” button.
Select “Display” on the “Setup” screen.
Adjust screen contrast/bright-
ness
Adjust screen contrast/bright-
ness of the rear view monitor
camera
Changes to day mode.
Select “General” on the “Display Settings” screen.
Adjust the display as desired by selecting “+” or “-”.
When the headlights are turned on, the screen dims.
However, the screen can be switched to day mode by selecting “Day
Mode”.
The screen will stay in day mode when the headlights are turned on until
“Day Mode” is selected again.
Display settings
Settings are available for adjusting the contrast and brightness
of the screen.
Screen for display settings
1
2
1
2
3
Adjusting the screen contrast/brightness
Day mode
1
2
283
5-2. Setup
5
Audio system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Adjust the voice guidance vol-
ume setting.
Set the voice recognition
prompts “High”, “Low” or “Off”.
Set the train voice recognition.
Set the voice prompt interrupt
on/off.
Set the voice recognition tuto-
rial.
■ To return to the default volume settings
Select “Default”, and then “Yes”.
Voice settings
This screen is used for guidance for voice command systems
setting.
1
2
3
4
5
284
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
5-3. Using Entune Audio
Press the “AUDIO” button to display the audio source selection
screen.
If the audio source selection screen is not displayed, press the “AUDIO”
button again.
Select the desired audio
source.
Select the desired audio
source then or to
reorder.
The audio source changes as follows each time the “MODE/HOLD”
switch is pressed.
Selecting the audio source
Switching between audio sources such as radio and CD are
explained in this section.
Changing audio source
1
2
1
Using the steering wheel switches to change audio source
285
5-3. Using Entune Audio
5
Audio system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
: Select to scroll to the next
or previous page.
: If appears to the right of
titles, the complete titles are
too long for the display. Select
this button to scroll the title.
Turn the “TUNE·SCROLL” knob
to move the cursor box to select a
desired item from the list, and
press the “TUNE·SCROLL” knob
to play it. The track that is being
played is highlighted.
To return to the top screen, select “Now Playing” on the list screen.
List screen operation
When a list screen is displayed, use the appropriate buttons to
scroll through the list.
How to scroll
286
5-3. Using Entune Audio
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Selecting a track/file/song
Press the “” or “” button on “SEEK·TRACK” or turn the
“TUNE·SCROLL” knob to select the desired track/file/song number.
To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold the “” or “” button on
“SEEK·TRACK”.
■ Selecting a track/file/song from the track/file/song list
Select “Browse” or cover art.
Select the desired track/file/
song.
When an MP3/WMA/AAC disc or USB memory device is being used,
the folder can be selected. When a Bluetooth
®
device or iPod is being
used, the album can be selected.
According to the audio device, the following is displayed.
Selecting, fast-forwarding and reversing tracks/files/songs
1
2
Audio source List name
Audio CD Track
MP3/WMA/AAC disc Folder, File
Bluetooth
®
Album, Track
USB
Artists, Albums, Songs, Genres,
Composers
iPod
Artists, Albums, Songs, Genres,
Composers, Audiobooks, Videos
287
5-3. Using Entune Audio
5
Audio system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Select “-” or “+” to adjust
the treble, mid or bass to
a level between -5 and 5.
Select “Front” or “Rear” to
adjust the front/rear audio
balance.
Select “L” or “R” to adjust the
left/right audio balance.
■ The sound quality level is adjusted individually
The treble, mid and bass levels can be adjusted for each audio mode sepa-
rately.
Optimal use of Entune Audio
On the “Sound Settings” screen, sound quality (Treble/Mid/
Bass), volume balance can be adjusted.
How to adjust the sound settings and sound quality
1 2 3
4 5
6 7
288
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
5-4. Using the radio
Pressing the “AUDIO” button displays the audio control screen from
any screens of the selected source.
Audio source selection screen
appears
Preset stations
Select to display RBDS text
messages
*
Scanning for receivable station
Select to display a list of receiv-
able stations
Setting the sound (P. 2 87 )
*:FM only
Tune in to the desired station using one of the following methods.
■ Seek tuning
Press the “” or “” button on “SEEK·TRACK”.
The radio will begin seeking up or down for a station of the nearest
frequency and will stop when a station is found.
■ Manual tuning
Turn the “TUNE·SCROLL” knob.
■ Preset stations
Select the desired preset station.
Radio operation
Select “AM” or “FM” on the audio source selection screen to
begin listening to the radio.
Audio control screen
1
2
3
4
5
6
Selecting a station
289
5-4. Using the radio
5
Audio system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Search for desired stations by turning the “TUNE·SCROLL” knob or
pressing the “” or “” button on “SEEK·TRACK”.
Select “(add new)”.
To change the preset station to a different one, select and hold the preset
station.
Select “Yes”.
Select “OK” after setting the new preset station.
■ Refreshing the station list
Select “Refresh” on the “Station List” screen.
To cancel the refresh, select “Cancel Refresh”.
■ Reception sensitivity
● Maintaining perfect radio reception at all times is difficult due to the continu-
ally changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength and sur-
rounding objects, such as trains, transmitters, etc.
● The radio antenna is mounted inside the rear window. To maintain clear
radio reception, do not attach metallic window tinting or other metallic
objects to the antenna wire mounted inside the rear window.
Setting station presets
1
2
3
4
1
290
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
5-5. Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA/AAC discs
Pressing the “AUDIO” button displays the audio control screen from
any screens of the selected source.
Audio source selection screen
appears
Displaying the track/file list
MP3/WMA/AAC: Displaying the
folder list
Random playback (P. 277)
Repeat play (
P. 277)
Pause
Select to resume play
Setting the sound (
P. 287)
CD player operation
Insert disc or select “CD” on the audio source selection screen
with a disc inserted to begin listening to a CD.
Audio control screen
1
2
3
4
5
6
291
5-5. Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA/AAC discs
5
Audio system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Displaying the title and artist name
If a CD-TEXT disc is inserted, the title of the disc and track will be displayed.
■ Error messages
If an error message is displayed, refer to the following table and take the
appropriate measures. If the problem is not rectified, take the vehicle to your
Toyota dealer.
■ Discs that can be used
Discs with the marks shown below can be used.
Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc fea-
tures, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.
CDs with copy-protection features may not play correctly.
■ CD player protection feature
To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a
problem is detected.
■ If a disc is left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for
extended periods
Disc may be damaged and may not play properly.
■ Lens cleaners
Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.
Message Cause Correction procedures
“Check DISC”
• The disc is dirty or
damaged.
• The disc is inserted
upside down.
• The disc is not play-
able with the player.
• Clean the disc.
• Insert the disc cor-
rectly.
• Confirm the disc is
playable with the
player.
“Disc Error”
There is a malfunction
within the system.
Eject the disc.
“No music files found.”
No playable data is
included on the disc.
Eject the disc.
292
5-5. Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA/AAC discs
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ MP3, WMA and AAC files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using
MP3 compression.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 for-
mat.
AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and refers to an audio compression
technology standard used with MPEG2 and MPEG4.
MP3, WMA and AAC file and media/formats compatibility are limited.
● MP3 file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32-320 (kbps)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 8-160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and mon-
aural
● WMA file compatibility
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback)
Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48-192 (kbps)
Ver. 9: CBR 48-320 (kbps)
293
5-5. Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA/AAC discs
5
Audio system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
● AAC file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MPEG4/AAC-LC
• Compatible sampling frequencies
11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates
16-320 (kbps)
Compatible channel modes: 1ch and 2ch
● Compatible media
Media that can be used for MP3, WMA and AAC playback are CD-Rs and
CD-RWs.
Playback in some instances may not be possible if the CD-R or CD-RW is
not finalized. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the
disc is scratched or marked with fingerprints.
● Compatible disc formats
The following disc formats can be used.
• Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2
CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2
• File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet)
UDF (2.01 or lower)
MP3, WMA and AAC files written in any format other than those listed
above may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may
not be displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows.
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels (including the root)
• Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters
• Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files per disc: 255
● File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA/AAC and played are
those with the extension .mp3, .wma or .m4a.
● Discs containing multi-session recordings
As Entune Audio is compatible with multi session discs, it is possible to play
discs that contain MP3, WMA and AAC files. However, only the first session
can be played.
294
5-5. Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA/AAC discs
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
● ID3, WMA and AAC tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track
title, artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags.
(The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the
track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
AAC tags can be added to AAC files, making it possible to record the track
title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
● MP3, WMA and AAC playback
When a disc containing MP3, WMA or AAC files is inserted, all files on the
disc are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3, WMA or
AAC file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recom-
mend you do not write any files to the disc other than MP3, WMA or AAC
files or create any unnecessary folders.
Discs that contain a mixture of music data and MP3, WMA or AAC format
data cannot be played.
● Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3, .wma and .m4a are used for files other than
MP3, WMA and AAC files, they may be mistakenly recognized and played
as MP3, WMA and AAC files. This may result in large amounts of interfer-
ence and damage to the speakers.
● Playback
• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit
rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances,
depending on the characteristics of the disc.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3,
WMA and AAC files on the market, and depending on the status of the
encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of
playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• When files other than MP3, WMA or AAC files are recorded on a disc, it
may take more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback
may not be possible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks
of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
295
5-5. Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA/AAC discs
5
Audio system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
NOTICE
■ Discs and adapters that cannot be used
Do not use the following types of CDs.
Also, do not use 3 in. (8 cm) CD adapters, Dual Discs or printable discs.
Doing so may damage the CD player and/or the CD insert/eject function.
● Discs that have a diameter that is not 4.7 in. (12 cm).
● Low-quality or deformed discs.
● Discs with a transparent or translucent recording area.
● Discs that have tape, stickers or CD-R labels attached to them, or that
have had the label peeled off.
■ Player precautions
Failure to follow the precautions below may result in damage to the discs or
the player itself.
● Do not insert anything other than discs into the disc slot.
● Do not apply oil to the player.
● Store discs away from direct sunlight.
● Never try to disassemble any part of the player.
296
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
5-6. Using an external device
P. 2 7 2
Pressing the “AUDIO” button displays the audio control screen from
any screens of the selected source.
Audio source selection screen
appears
Displays cover art
Selecting the play mode
Shuffle play
Repeat play
Pause
Select to resume playback
Setting the sound (P. 2 87 )
Listening to an iPod
Connecting an iPod enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle
speakers.
Select “iPod” on the audio source selection screen.
When the iPod connected to the system includes iPod video, the
system can only output the sound by selecting the browse
screen.
Connecting an iPod
Audio control screen
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
297
5-6. Using an external device
5
Audio system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Select “Browse” on the screen.
Select the desired play mode. Then select a song to begin using
the selected play mode.
Select to change on/off.
Select to change on/off.
Selecting a play mode
Shuffle play
Repeat play
1
2
298
5-6. Using an external device
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ About iPod
● “Made for iPod”, “Made for iPhone” and “Made for iPad” mean that an elec-
tronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod or
iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to
meet Apple performance standards.
● Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance
with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this acces-
sory with iPod, iPhone or iPad may affect wireless performance.
● iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, and iPod touch are trademarks
of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Lightning is a trade-
mark of Apple Inc.
■ iPod cover art
● Depending on the iPod and songs in the iPod, iPod cover art may be dis-
played.
● This function can be changed to on/off. (P. 281)
● It may take time to display iPod cover art, and the iPod may not be operated
while the cover art display is in process.
● Only iPod cover art that is saved in JPEG format can be displayed.
■ iPod functions
● When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod mode,
the iPod will resume play from the same point in which it was last used.
● Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions
may not be available. If a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as
opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device and recon-
necting it may resolve the problem.
● While connected to the system, the iPod cannot be operated with its own
controls. It is necessary to use the controls of the vehicle's Entune Audio
instead.
● When the battery level of an iPod is very low, the iPod may not operate. If
so, charge the iPod before use.
● Compatible models (P. 3 00 )
299
5-6. Using an external device
5
Audio system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ iPod problems
To resolve most problems encountered when using your iPod, disconnect
your iPod from the vehicle iPod connection and reset it. For instructions on
how to reset your iPod, refer to your iPod Owner's Manual.
■ Error messages
Message Cause/Correction procedures
“Connection error. Please
consult your Owner’s Man-
ual for instructions on how
to connect the iPod.”
This indicates a problem in the iPod or its con-
nection.
“No music files found.”
This indicates that there is no music data in
the iPod.
“No videos found.”
This indicates that no video files are included
in the iPod.
“There are no songs avail-
able for playback. Please
add compatible files to
your iPod.”
This indicates that songs are not found in a
selected playlist.
“iPod authorization unsuc-
cessful.”
This indicates that the display Entune Audio
failed to authorize the iPod.
Please check your iPod.
300
5-6. Using an external device
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Compatible models
The following iPod
®
, iPod nano
®
, iPod classic
®
, iPod touch
®
and iPhone
®
devices can be used with this system.
● Made for
• iPod touch (5th generation)
• iPod touch (4th generation)
• iPod touch (3rd generation)
• iPod touch (2nd generation)
• iPod touch (1st generation)
• iPod classic
• iPod with video
• iPod nano (7th generation)
• iPod nano (6th generation)
• iPod nano (5th generation)
• iPod nano (4th generation)
• iPod nano (3rd generation)
• iPod nano (2nd generation)
• iPod nano (1st generation)
• iPhone 5s
• iPhone 5c
• iPhone 5
• iPhone 4S
• iPhone 4
• iPhone 3GS
• iPhone 3G
• iPhone
This system only supports audio playback.
Depending on differences between models or software versions etc., some
models might be incompatible with this system.
WARNING
■ While driving
Do not connect an iPod or operate the controls.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the iPod or its terminals
● Do not leave the iPod in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle
may become high, resulting in damage to the iPod.
● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the iPod while it is
connected.
● Do not insert foreign objects into the port.
301
5-6. Using an external device
5
Audio system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
P. 2 7 2
Pressing the “AUDIO” button displays the audio control screen from
any screens of the selected source.
Audio source selection screen
appears
Displaying the folder list
Random playback (P. 277)
Repeat play (P. 277)
Pause
Select to resume playback
Setting the sound (P. 2 87 )
Select “Browse” on the screen.
Select the desired play mode. Then select a song to begin using
the selected play mode.
■ Displaying the now playing list
Touch the cover art display.
Listening to a USB memory device
Connecting a USB memory device enables you to enjoy music
from the vehicle speakers.
Touch “USB” on the audio source selection screen.
Connecting a USB memory device
Audio control screen
1
2
3
4
5
6
Selecting a play mode
1
2
302
5-6. Using an external device
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ USB memory functions
● Depending on the USB memory device that is connected to the system, the
device itself may not be operable and certain functions may not be avail-
able. If the device is inoperable or a function is unavailable due to a mal-
function (as opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device
and reconnecting it may resolve the problem.
● If the USB memory device still does not begin operation after being discon-
nected and reconnected, format the memory.
■ Error messages for USB memory
■ USB memory
● Compatible devices
USB memory device that can be used for MP3, WMA and AAC playback.
● Compatible device formats
The following device format can be used:
• USB communication format: USB2.0 HS (Mbps) and FS (12 Mbps)
• File system format: FAT16/32 (Windows)
• Correspondence class: Mass storage class
MP3, WMA and AAC files written to a device with any format other than
those listed above may not play correctly, and their file names and folder
names may not be displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
• Maximum number of folders in a device: 3000 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files in a device: 9999
• Maximum number of files per folder: 255
● MP3, WMA and AAC files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size using
MP3 compression.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format. This
format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.
AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and refers to an audio compression
technology standard used with MPEG2 and MPEG4.
MP3, WMA and AAC file and media/formats compatibility are limited.
Message Cause/Correction procedures
“Connection error. Please
consult your Owner’s Man-
ual for instructions on how
to connect the USB device.”
This indicates a problem with the USB mem-
ory device or its connection.
“No music files found.”
This indicates that no MP3/WMA/AAC files
are included on the USB memory device.
303
5-6. Using an external device
5
Audio system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
● MP3 file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III, MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-320 (kbps)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 8-160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and mon-
aural
● WMA file compatibility
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
HIGH PROFILE 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates
HIGH PROFILE 48-320 (kbps, VBR)
● AAC file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MPEG4/AAC-LC
• Compatible sampling frequencies
11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates
16-320 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: 1 ch and 2 ch
● File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA/AAC and played are
those with the extension .mp3, .wma or .m4a.
● ID3, WMA and AAC tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track
title, artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags.
(The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the
track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
AAC tags can be added to AAC files, making it possible to record the track
title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
304
5-6. Using an external device
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
● MP3, WMA and AAC playback
• When a device containing MP3, WMA and AAC files is connected, all
files in the USB memory device are checked. Once the file check is fin-
ished, the first MP3, WMA and AAC file is played. To make the file check
finish more quickly, we recommend that you do not include any files other
than MP3, WMA and AAC files or create any unnecessary folders.
• When a USB memory device is connected and the audio source is
changed to USB memory mode, the USB memory device will start play-
ing the first file in the first folder. If the same device is removed and
reconnected (and the con- tents have not been changed), the USB mem-
ory device will resume play from the same point in which it was last used.
● Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3, .wma and .m4a are used for files other than
MP3, WMA and AAC files, they will be skipped (not played).
● Playback
• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit
rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3,
WMA and AAC files on the market, and depending on the status of the
encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of
playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks
of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
WARNING
■ While driving
Do not connect a USB memory device or operate the device controls.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the USB memory device or its terminals
● Do not leave the USB memory device in the vehicle. The temperature
inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the USB
memory device.
● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the USB memory
device while it is connected.
● Do not insert foreign objects into the port.
305
5-6. Using an external device
5
Audio system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
P. 2 7 2
■ Operating portable audio players connected to Entune Audio
The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle's audio controls. All other
adjustments must be made on the portable audio player itself.
■ When using a portable audio player connected to the power outlet
Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable
audio player.
Using the AUX port
To use the AUX port, connect a portable player, press the
“AUDIO” button, then select “AUX” to display the audio control
screen.
Connecting a portable audio player
WARNING
■ While driving
Do not connect a portable audio player or operate the device controls.
306
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
5-7. Connecting Bluetooth
®
■ About Bluetooth
®
Preparations to use wireless communica-
tion
The following can be performed using Bluetooth
®
wireless com-
munication:
■ A portable audio player can be operated and listened to via
Entune Audio
■ Hands-free phone calls can be made via a cellular phone
In order to use wireless communication, register and connect a
Bluetooth
®
device by performing the following procedures.
The Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos are
registered trademarks owned Bluetooth
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by
Fujitsu Ten Limited is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names are
those of their respective owners.
WARNING
■ Certifications for the Bluetooth
FCC ID: BABFT0077A
● CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for
uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Expo-
sure Guidelines.
This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply
without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desir-
able that it should be installed and operated with at least 20cm and more
between the radiator and person's body in normal use position.
• Co-location: This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in con-
junction with any other antenna or transmitter.
• This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is sub-
ject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
307
5-7. Connecting Bluetooth
®
5
Audio system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
● FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsi-
ble for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equip-
ment.
● IC: 2024B-FT0077A
• This device complies with Industry Canada’s licence-exempt RSSs.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may
not cause interference; and (2) This device must accept any interfer-
ence, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the
device.
● CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure
This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for
uncontrolled equipment and meets RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency
(RF) Exposure rules.
This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply
without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE).
But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated with at least
20cm and more between the radiator and person's body (excluding
extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
● IC: 2024B-FT0077A
• Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada appli-
cables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autori-
sée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire
de brouillage; (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
● ATTENTION: l'exposition aux rayonnements radiofréquence
- Cet équipement se conforme aux limites d’exposition aux radiations éta-
blies par Industrie Canada pour un environnement non contrôlé ainsi
qu’aux directives d’exposition aux fréquences radioélectriques (RF)
émises par Industrie Canada dans la norme CNR-102. Cet équipement
émet un niveau d’énergie RF faible à un point tel qu’il se conforme sans
devoir effectuer d’évaluation d’exposition maximum admissible (EMA).
Lorsque l’équipement est utilisé, il est toutefois souhaitable de laisser au
moins 20cm entre l’antenne et le corps (à l’exception des extrémités :
mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles).
308
5-7. Connecting Bluetooth
®
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Device registration/connection flow
1. Register the Bluetooth
®
device to be used with Entune
Audio (P. 310, 311, 312)
2. Connect the Bluetooth
®
device to be used
(P. 3 1 5)
To be used for audio To be used for hands-free
phone
3. Start Bluetooth
®
connec-
tion (P. 3 1 5)
3. Start Bluetooth
®
connec-
tion (P. 31 5 )
4. Check connection status
(P. 3 2 0)
4. Check connection status
(P. 323)
5. Use Bluetooth
®
audio
(P. 3 2 0)
5. Use Bluetooth
®
phone
(P. 322)
309
5-7. Connecting Bluetooth
®
5
Audio system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
To display the screen shown below, press the “SETUP” button and
select “Bluetooth
*” on the “Setup” screen.
Select to connect the device to
be used with Entune Audio.
(P. 315)
Select to register a Bluetooth
®
device to be used with Entune
Audio. (P. 312)
Select to set detailed
Bluetooth
®
system settings.
(P. 319)
Select to delete registered devices. (P. 314)
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
Registering and connecting from the “Bluetooth* Setup” screen
1
2
3
4
310
5-7. Connecting Bluetooth
®
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Turn the Bluetooth
®
connection setting of your audio player on.
Press the “AUDIO” button.
Select “ Audio”.
Select “Select Device”.
Follow the steps in “How to registering a Bluetooth
®
device” from
step . (P. 312)
Registering a Bluetooth
®
audio player for
the first time
To use the Bluetooth
®
Audio, it is necessary to register an audio
player with the system.
Once the player has been registered, it is possible to use the
Bluetooth
®
Audio.
For details about registering a Bluetooth
®
device (P. 312)
1
2
3
4
5
2
311
5-7. Connecting Bluetooth
®
5
Audio system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Turn the Bluetooth
®
connection setting of your cellular phone on.
Press the “ ” button.
Select “OK” to register a phone.
Follow the steps in “How to registering a Bluetooth
®
device” from
step . (P. 312)
Registering a Bluetooth
®
phone for the first
time
To use the hands-free system, it is necessary to register a
Bluetooth
®
phone with the system.
Once the phone has been registered, it is possible to use the
hands-free system.
For details about registering a Bluetooth
®
device (P. 312)
1
2
3
4
3
312
5-7. Connecting Bluetooth
®
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Display the “Bluetooth* Setup” screen. (P. 309)
Select “Add”.
When this screen is displayed,
search for the device name dis-
played on this screen on the
screen of your Bluetooth
®
device.
For details about operating the
Bluetooth
®
device, see the manual
that comes with it.
To cancel the registration, select
“Cancel”.
Register the Bluetooth
®
device using your Bluetooth
®
device.
A PIN-code is not required for SSP (Secure Simple Pairing) compatible
Bluetooth
®
devices. Depending on the type of Bluetooth
®
device being
connected, a message confirming registration may be displayed on the
Bluetooth
®
device’s screen. Respond and operate the Bluetooth
®
device
according to the confirmation message.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
Registering a Bluetooth
®
device
Bluetooth
®
compatible phones (HFP) and portable audio players
(AVP) can be registered simultaneously. You can register up to 5
Bluetooth
®
devices.
How to registering a Bluetooth
®
device
1
2
3
4
313
5-7. Connecting Bluetooth
®
5
Audio system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Check that this screen is dis-
played when registration is
complete.
Select “OK” when the connection status changes from “Connect-
ing...” to “Connected”.
If an error message is displayed, follow the guidance on the screen to try
again.
Registration can be performed from screens other than the
“Bluetooth
* Setup” screen.
■ When registering from the “Bluetooth* Audio” screen
Display the “Bluetooth
* Audio” screen. (P. 28 4 )
Select “Select Device”.
Follow the steps in “How to registering a Bluetooth
®
device” from
step . (P. 312)
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
5
6
1
2
3
2
314
5-7. Connecting Bluetooth
®
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Display the “Bluetooth* Setup” screen. (P. 309)
Select “Remove”.
Select the desired device.
A confirmation message will be displayed, select “Yes” to delete the
device.
Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is
complete.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
Deleting a Bluetooth
®
device
1
2
3
4
5
315
5-7. Connecting Bluetooth
®
5
Audio system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Press the “SETUP” button.
Select “Bluetooth
*”.
Select the device to be con-
nected.
Supported profile icons will be dis-
played.
Phone
Audio player
Supported profile icons for cur-
rently connected devices will illumi-
nate.
Dimmed icons can be selected to connect to the function directly.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
Connecting a Bluetooth
®
device
Up to 5 Bluetooth
®
devices (Phones (HFP) and audio players
(AVP)) can be registered.
If more than 1 Bluetooth
®
device has been registered, select
which device to connect to.
1
2
3
1
2
316
5-7. Connecting Bluetooth
®
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
To turn auto connection mode on, set “Bluetooth* Power” to on.
(P. 319)
When you register a phone, auto connection will be activated. Always
set it to this mode and leave the Bluetooth
®
phone in a place where a
connection can be established.
When the engine switch is turned to the “ACC” or “ON” position (vehicles
without a smart key system) or ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode
(vehicles with a smart key system), the system will search for a nearby cel-
lular phone you have registered.
Next, the system automatically connects with the most recent of the
phones connected to in the past. Then, the connection result is displayed.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
When auto connection has failed or “Bluetooth* Power” is turned off,
you must connect the Bluetooth
®
device manually.
Follow the steps in “Connecting a Bluetooth
®
device” from step .
(P. 315)
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
Registering an additional device
Select “Select Device” on the Bluetooth
®
audio control screen.
For more information: P. 3 1 2
Selecting a registered device
Select “Select Device” on the Bluetooth
®
audio control screen.
For more information: P. 3 1 5
Auto connection
Manual connection
Connecting a Bluetooth
®
audio player
1 1
1
2
1
2
317
5-7. Connecting Bluetooth
®
5
Audio system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Reconnecting a Bluetooth
®
phone
If the system cannot connect due to poor signal strength with the engine
switch in the “ACC” or “ON” position (vehicles without a smart key system) or
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with a smart key system), the
system will automatically attempt to reconnect.
If the system is attempting to connect to a Bluetooth
®
phone and the
Bluetooth
®
phone is turned off and then back on, the system will attempt to
reconnect.
318
5-7. Connecting Bluetooth
®
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Display the “Bluetooth* Setup” screen. (P. 309)
Select the device.
Select “Device Info”.
Following screen is displayed:
Device Name
Change connection method
Bluetooth
®
Address
Display your telephone num-
ber
The number may not be dis-
played depending on the
model of phone.
Compatibility profile of the
device
Restore default settings
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
Select “Connect Audio Player from”.
Select “Vehicle” or “Device”.
“Vehicle”: Connect Entune Audio to the portable audio player.
“Device”: Connect the portable audio player to Entune Audio
Displaying a Bluetooth
®
device details
You can confirm and change the registered device details.
Bluetooth
®
device registration status
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
Changing connection method
1
2
319
5-7. Connecting Bluetooth
®
5
Audio system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Display the “Bluetooth* Setup” screen. (P. 309)
Select “System Settings”.
The following screen is displayed:
Bluetooth
* Power on/off
You can change Bluetooth*
function on/off
Bluetooth* Name
Change PIN-code
Bluetooth
* Address
Display Phone Status
You can set the system to show
the status confirmation display
when connecting a telephone
Display Audio Player Status
You can set the system to show
the status confirmation display
when connecting an audio
player
Compatibility profile of the system
Restore default settings
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
You can change the PIN-code that is used to register your Bluetooth
®
devices in the system.
Select “Bluetooth
* PIN”.
Input a PIN-code, and select “OK”.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
Detailed Bluetooth
®
system settings
You can confirm and change the detailed Bluetooth
®
settings.
How to check and change detailed Bluetooth
®
settings
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
Editing the Bluetooth* PIN
7
8
1
2
320
5-8. Bluetooth
®
Audio
You can check such indicators as signal strength and battery charge
on the screen.
Connection status
Battery charge
Listening to Bluetooth
®
Audio
The Bluetooth
®
audio system enables the user to enjoy music
played on a portable player from the vehicle speakers via wire-
less communication.
When a Bluetooth
®
device cannot be connected, check the connec-
tion status on the “Bluetooth
* Audio” screen. If the device is not con-
nected, either register or reconnect the device. (P. 31 5 )
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
Status display
1
2
Indicators Conditions
Connection status
Good Not connected
Battery charge
Full Empty
321
5-8. Bluetooth
®
Audio
5
Audio system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Select or to Play/Pause.
For details on “Bluetooth
* Audio” screen operation methods, refer to
Basic Audio Operations. (P. 276)
For details on how to select a track or album, refer to selecting, fast-
forwarding and reversing tracks/files/songs. (P. 286)
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
Playing Bluetooth
®
audio
322
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
5-9. Bluetooth
®
phone
To display the screen shown below, press the off-hook switch on the
steering wheel or the button.
Several functions are available to operate on each screen that is dis-
played by selecting the 4 tabs.
Device name
Bluetooth
®
connection status
Using a Bluetooth
®
Phone
The hands-free system is a function that allows you to use your
cellular phone without touching it.
This system supports Bluetooth
®
. Bluetooth
®
is a wireless data
system that allows the cellular phone to wirelessly connect to
the hands-free system and make/receive calls.
Before making a phone call, check the connection status, battery
charge, call area and signal strength. (P. 3 23 )
If a Bluetooth
®
device cannot be connected, check the connection
status on the phone screen. If the device is not connected, either
register or reconnect it. (P. 31 5 )
Phone screen
1
2
323
5-9. Bluetooth
®
phone
5
Audio system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Telephone switch (P. 338)
■ Microphone
The vehicle’s built in microphone is used when talking on the
phone.
The person you are speaking to can be heard from the front speak-
ers.
To use the hands-free system, you must register your Bluetooth
®
phone in the system. (P. 312)
You can check indicators such as signal strength and battery charge
on the phone screen.
Connection status
Signal strength
Battery charge
Type A Type B
Status display
1
2
3
324
5-9. Bluetooth
®
phone
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Indicators Conditions
Connection status
Good Not connected
Battery charge
Full Empty
Call area
“Rm”: Roaming area
Signal strength
Excellent Poor
325
5-9. Bluetooth
®
phone
5
Audio system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Display the phone screen. (P. 32 2 )
Select the “Dial Pad” tab and enter a phone number.
To delete the input phone number, select .
For the first digit, you can enter “+” by selecting “” for a while.
Press the off-hook switch on the steering wheel or select .
You can dial a number from the contact data imported from your cellu-
lar phone. The system has one contact for each registered phone. Up
to 2500 contacts may be stored in each contact.
Display the phone screen. (P. 32 2 )
Select “Contacts” tab.
Choose the desired contact to call from the list.
Choose the number and then press the off-hook switch on the
steering wheel or select .
You can transfer the phone numbers in a Bluetooth
®
phone to the sys-
tem.
Operation methods differ between PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile)
compatible and PBAP incompatible Bluetooth
®
phones. If the cellular
phone does not support either PBAP or OPP (Object Push Profile)
service, you cannot transfer contacts.
Making a call
Once a Bluetooth
®
phone is registered, you can make a call
using the following procedure:
Dialing
Dialing from the contacts list
When the contact is empty
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
326
5-9. Bluetooth
®
phone
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Press the off-hook switch on the steering wheel.
If the phonebook is empty, a message will be displayed.
For a PBAP compatible Bluetooth
®
phone and “Automatic Transfer”
is off
Select the desired item.
Select to transfer new con-
tacts from a cellular phone,
select “Always” and then
enable “Automatic Transfer”.
Select to transfer all the con-
tacts from a connected cellu-
lar phone only once.
Select to cancel transferring.
For PBAP incompatible but OPP compatible Bluetooth
®
phones
Select the desired item.
Select to transfer the con-
tacts from the connected cel-
lular phone.
Follow the steps in “Update con-
tacts from phone” from step .
(P. 342)
Select to add a new contact
manually.
Follow the steps in “Registering
a new contact to the contacts
list” from step . (P. 344)
Select to cancel transferring.
1
2
1
2
3
2
1
2
2
2
3
327
5-9. Bluetooth
®
phone
5
Audio system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
You can make a call using numbers registered in the contact.
Display the phone screen. (P. 32 2 )
Select “Favorites” tab.
Select the desired number to make a call.
You can make a call using the call history, which has the 3 functions
below.
: calls which you missed
: calls which you received
: calls which you made
Display the phone screen. (P. 32 2 )
Select “Call History” tab.
Select or the desired entry from the list.
When is selected
Check that the “Call” screen is displayed.
When the desired contact is selected
Select the desired number.
Check that the “Call” screen is displayed.
■ Call history list
● If you make a call to or receive a call from a number registered in the con-
tact, the name is displayed in the call history.
● If you make multiple calls to the same number, only the last call made is dis-
played in the call history.
■ International calls
You may not be able to make international calls, depending on the mobile
phone in use.
Calling using favorites list
Dialing from call history
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
4
5
328
5-9. Bluetooth
®
phone
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Press the off-hook switch on the
steering wheel or select .
Press the on-hook switch on the steering wheel or select .
Turn the “PWR·VOL” knob. You can also adjust the volume using the
steering switches.
■ International calls
Received international calls may not be displayed correctly depending on the
cellular phone in use.
Receiving a call
When a call is received, the following screen is displayed
together with a sound.
To answer the phone
To refuse a call
To adjust the incoming call volume
329
5-9. Bluetooth
®
phone
5
Audio system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Select “-” or “+”. You can also adjust the volume using the steering
switches or the volume knob.
Select “Mute”.
When using phone services such as an answering service or a bank,
you can store phone numbers and code numbers in the contact.
Select “0-9”.
Input the number.
■ Release Tones
“Release Tones” appear when a continuous tone signal(s) contain-
ing a (w) is registered in the contact list.
Select “Release Tones”.
Speaking on the phone
The following screen is displayed when speaking on the phone.
To adjust the call volume
To prevent the other party from hearing your voice
Inputting tones
1
2
1
330
5-9. Bluetooth
®
phone
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Release Tones
● A continuous tone signal is a character string that consists of numbers and
the characters p or w. (e.g.056133w0123p#1)
● When the “p” pause tone is used, the tone data up until the next pause tone
will be automatically sent after 2 seconds have elapsed. When the “w”
pause tone is used, the tone data up until the next pause tone will be auto-
matically sent after a user operation is performed.
● Release tones can be used when automated operation of a phone based
service such as an answering machine or bank phone service is desired. A
phone number with continuous tone signals can be registered in the contact
list.
● Tone data after a “w” pause tone can be operated on voice command during
a call.
331
5-9. Bluetooth
®
phone
5
Audio system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Select “Handset Mode” to on from a hands-free call to a cellular
phone call.
Select “Handset Mode” to off from a cellular phone call to a hands-free
call.
Select “Transmit Volume”.
Select the desired level for the transmit volume.
Select “OK”.
Press the on-hook switch on the steering wheel or select .
When a call is interrupted by a third party while talking, an incoming
call message will be displayed.
To talk with the other party:
• Press the off-hook switch on
the steering wheel.
• Select .
To refuse the call:
• Press the on-hook switch on
the steering wheel.
• Select .
Every time you press the off-hook switch on the steering wheel or
select during call waiting, you will be switched to the other party.
To transfer a call
Transmit volume setting
To hang up
Call waiting
1
2
3
332
5-9. Bluetooth
®
phone
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Transferring calls
● If you transfer from the cellular phone to hands-free, the hands-free screen
will be displayed, and you can operate the system using the screen.
● Transfer method and operation may vary according to the cellular phone
used.
● For operation of the cellular phone in use, see the phone's manual.
■ Call waiting operation
Call waiting operation may differ depending on your phone company and cel-
lular phone.
333
5-9. Bluetooth
®
phone
5
Audio system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Press the “ ” button.
Select .
When an e-mail/SMS/MMS is received, the incoming message screen
pops up with sound and is ready to be operated on the screen.
Select to check the message.
Select to refuse the message.
Select to call the message
sender.
Bluetooth
®
phone message function
Received messages can be forwarded from the connected
Bluetooth
®
phone, enabling checking and replying using Entune
Audio.
Depending on the type of Bluetooth
®
phone connected, received
messages may not be transferred to the message inbox.
If the phone does not support the message function, this func-
tion cannot be used.
Displaying message inbox screen
Receiving a message
1
2
1
2
3
334
5-9. Bluetooth
®
phone
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Receiving a message
● Depending on the cellular phone used for receiving messages, or its regis-
tration status with the system, some information may not be displayed.
● The pop up screen is separately available for incoming e-mail and SMS/
MMS messages under the following conditions:
E-mail:
• “Incoming E-mail Display” is set to “Full Screen”. (P. 349)
• “E-mail Notification Popup” is set to on. (P. 349)
SMS/MMS:
• “Incoming SMS/MMS Display” is set to “Full screen”. (P. 349)
• “SMS/MMS Notification Popup” is set to on. (P. 349)
335
5-9. Bluetooth
®
phone
5
Audio system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Display the message inbox screen. (P. 333)
Select the desired message from the list.
Check that the message is displayed.
E-mails: Select “Mark
Unread” or “Mark Read” to
mark mail unread or read on
the message inbox screen.
This function is available when
“Update Read Status on Phone”
is set to on (P. 349)
Select to make a call to the
sender.
Select to have messages read out. To cancel this function, select
“Stop”.
Select to display the previous or next message.
Select to reply the message.
Checking the messages
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
336
5-9. Bluetooth
®
phone
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Check the messages
● Depending on the type of Bluetooth
®
phone being connected, it may be nec-
essary to perform additional steps on the phone.
● Messages are displayed in the appropriate connected Bluetooth
®
phone’s
registered mail address folder.
Select the tab of the desired folder to be displayed.
● Only received messages on the connected Bluetooth
®
phone can be dis-
played.
● The text of the message is not displayed while driving.
● When “Automatic Message Readout” is set to on, messages will be auto-
matically read out. (P. 349)
● Turn the “PWR·VOL” knob, or use the volume switch on the steering wheel
to adjust the message read out volume.
● The message read out function is available even while driving.
Display the message inbox screen. (P. 333)
Select the desired message from the list.
Select “Quick Message”.
Select the desired message.
Select “Send”.
■ Editing quick reply message
Select “Quick Message”.
Select corresponding to the desired message to edit.
Select “OK” when editing is completed.
Replying to a message
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
337
5-9. Bluetooth
®
phone
5
Audio system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Calls can be made to an e-mail/SMS/MMS message sender's phone
number.
Display the message inbox screen. (P. 333)
Select the desired message.
Select .
Check that the “Call” screen is displayed.
■ Calling from a number within a message
Calls can be made to a number identified in a message's text area.
Display the message inbox screen. (P. 333)
Select the desired message.
Select the text area.
Select corresponding to the desired number.
Check that the “Call” screen is displayed.
■ Calling from the incoming message screen
P. 331
Calling the message sender
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
338
5-9. Bluetooth
®
phone
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Volume switch
• Increase/Decrease the volume
• Press and hold:
Continuously increase/decrease the volume
Off-hook switch
• Make a call
• Receive a call
• Display “Phone” screen
On-hook switch
• End a call
• Refuse a call
Using the steering wheel switches
The steering wheel switches can be used to operate a connected
cellular phone.
Operating a telephone using the steering wheel switches
Type A Type B
1
2
3
339
5-9. Bluetooth
®
phone
5
Audio system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
To display the screen shown below, press the “SETUP” button, and
select “Phone” on the “Setup” screen.
Set the phone connection
(P. 312)
Setting the sound (P. 3 40 )
Contact/Call History Settings
(P. 341)
Set the message settings
(P. 349)
Set the phone display
(P. 350)
Bluetooth
®
phone settings
You can adjust the hands-free system to your desired settings.
“Phone/Message Settings” screen
1
2
13
14
5
340
5-9. Bluetooth
®
phone
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Display the “Phone/Message Settings” screen. (P. 339)
Select “Sound Settings” on the “Phone/Message Settings” screen.
Set the desired ringtone.
Adjust the ringtone volume.
Adjust the message readout
volume.
Set the desired incoming
SMS/MMS tone.
Adjust the incoming SMS/
MMS tone volume.
Set the incoming e-mail tone.
Adjust the incoming e-mail
tone volume.
Adjust the default volume of the other party's voice.
■ To return to the default volume settings
Select “Default”, and then “Yes”.
Sound setting
1
2
1
2
13
4
5
6
7
8
341
5-9. Bluetooth
®
phone
5
Audio system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
The contact can be transferred from a Bluetooth
®
phone to the sys-
tem. The contact also can be added, edited and deleted.
The call history can be deleted and contact and favorites can be
changed.
Display the “Phone/Message Settings” screen. (P. 339)
Select “Contact/Call History Settings”.
Select the desired item to be set.
For PBAP compatible
Bluetooth
®
phones, select to
set “Automatic Transfer” on/
off. When set to on, the
phone’s contact data and his-
tory are automatically trans-
ferred.
Select to update contacts
from the connected phone.
(P. 342)
Select to sort contacts by the
first name or last name field.
Select to add contacts to the favorites list. (P. 3 4 6)
Select to delete contacts from the favorites list. (P. 34 8 )
Select to display contact images.
Select to clear contacts from the call history.
*
Select to add new contacts to the contact list.* (P. 344)
Select to edit contacts in the contact list.
* (P. 345)
Select to delete contacts from the contact list.
* (P. 34 6)
Select to reset all setup items.
*: For PBAP compatible Bluetooth
®
phones only, this function is available
when “Automatic Transfer” is set to off.
Contact/Call History Settings
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
342
5-9. Bluetooth
®
phone
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Operation methods differ between PBAP compatible and PBAP
incompatible but OPP compatible Bluetooth
®
phones.
If your cellular phone is neither PBAP nor OPP compatible, the con-
tacts cannot be transferred.
■ For PBAP Compatible Bluetooth
®
Phones
Select “Update Contacts from Phone”.
Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the opera-
tion is complete.
This operation may be unnecessary depending on the type of cellular
phone.
Depending on the type of cellular phone, OBEX authentication may be
required when transferring contact data. Enter “1234” into the
Bluetooth
®
phone.
If another Bluetooth
®
device is connected when transferring contact
data, depending on the phone, the connected Bluetooth
®
device may
need to be disconnected.
Depending on the type of Bluetooth
®
phone being connected, it may be
necessary to perform additional steps on the phone.
Update contacts from phone
1
2
343
5-9. Bluetooth
®
phone
5
Audio system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
For PBAP Incompatible but OPP compatible Bluetooth
®
Phones
Select “Update Contacts from Phone”.
Transfer the contact data to the system using a Bluetooth
®
phone.
This operation may be unnecessary depending on the type of cellular
phone.
Depending on the type of cellular phone, OBEX authentication may be
required when transferring contact data. Enter “1234” into the
Bluetooth
®
phone.
To cancel this function, select “Cancel”.
Select “Done” when it appears on the screen.
Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the opera-
tion is complete.
■ Updating the contacts in a different way (From the “Call His-
tory” screen)
For PBAP compatible Bluetooth
®
phones, this function is available
when “Automatic Transfer” is set to off. (P. 341)
Display the phone screen. (P. 32 2 )
Select the “Call History” tab and select a contact not yet regis-
tered in the contact list.
Select “Update Contact”.
Select the desired contact.
Select a phone type for the phone number.
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
344
5-9. Bluetooth
®
phone
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
New contact data can be registered. Up to 4 numbers per person can
be registered. For PBAP compatible Bluetooth
®
phones, this function
is available when “Automatic Transfer” is set to off. (P. 341)
Select “New Contact”.
Enter the name and select “OK”.
Enter the phone number and select “OK”.
Select the phone type for the phone number.
To add another number to this contact, select “Yes”.
■ Registering a new contact in a different way (From the “Call
History” screen)
Display the phone screen. (P. 32 2 )
Select the “Call History” tab and select a contact not yet regis-
tered in the contact list.
Select “Add to Contacts”.
Follow the steps in “Registering a new contact to the contacts
list” from step .
Registering a new contact to the contact list
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
3
345
5-9. Bluetooth
®
phone
5
Audio system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
For PBAP compatible Bluetooth
®
phones, this function is available
when “Automatic Transfer” is set to off. (P. 341)
Select “Edit Contact”.
Select the desired contact.
Select corresponding to the desired name or number.
For editing the name
Follow the steps in “Registering a new contact to the contacts list”
from step . (P. 3 44 )
For editing the number
Follow the steps in “Registering a new contact to the contacts list”
from step . (P. 3 44 )
■ Editing the contacts in a different way (From the “Contact
Details” screen)
Display the phone screen. (P. 32 2 )
Select the “Contacts”, “Call History” tab or the “Favorites” tab and
select the desired contact.
Select “Edit Contact”.
“E-mail Addresses”: Select to display all registered e-mail addresses for
the contact.
Follow the steps in “Editing the contact data” from step .
Editing the contact data
1
2
3
4
3
4
4
1
2
3
4 4
346
5-9. Bluetooth
®
phone
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
For PBAP compatible Bluetooth
®
phones, this function is available
when “Automatic Transfer” is set to off. (P. 341)
Select “Delete Contacts”.
Select the desired contact and select “Delete”.
Select “Yes” when the confirmation screen appears.
■ Deleting the contact in a different way (From the “Contact
Details” screen)
Display the phone screen. (P. 32 2 )
Select the “Contacts”, “Call History” tab or the “Favorites” tab and
select the desired contact.
Select “Edit Contact”.
Select “Yes” when the confirmation screen appears.
Up to 15 contacts (maximum of 4 numbers per contact) can be regis-
tered in the favorites list.
■ Registering the contacts in the favorites list
Select “Add Favorite”.
Select the desired contact to add to the favorites list.
Dimmed contacts are already stored as a favorite.
Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the opera-
tion is complete.
Deleting the contact data
Favorites list setting
1
2
13
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
347
5-9. Bluetooth
®
phone
5
Audio system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
When 15 contacts have already been registered to the favorites
list
When 15 contacts have already been registered to the favorites
list, a registered contact needs to be replaced.
Select “Yes” when the confirmation screen appears to replace a
contact.
Select the contact to be replaced.
Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the opera-
tion is complete.
Registering contacts in the favorites list in a different way (from
the “Contacts” screen)
Display the phone screen. (P. 32 2 )
Select the “Contacts” tab.
Select at the beginning of the desired contact list name to be
registered in the favorites list.
When selected, is changed to , and the contact is registered in
the favorites list.
Registering contacts in the favorites list in a different way (from
the “Contact Details” screen)
Display the phone screen. (P. 32 2 )
Select the “Contacts” tab or the “Call History” tab and select the
desired contact.
Select “Add Favorite”.
Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the opera-
tion is complete.
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
348
5-9. Bluetooth
®
phone
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Deleting the contacts in the favorites list
Select “Remove Favorite”.
Select the desired contacts and select “Remove”.
Select “Yes” when the confirmation screen appears.
Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the opera-
tion is complete.
Deleting contacts in the favorites list in a different way (from the
“Contacts” screen)
Display the phone screen. (P. 32 2 )
Select the “Contacts” tab.
Select at the beginning of the contact list name to be deleted
from the favorites. list.
When selected, is changed to , and the data is deleted from the
list.
Deleting contacts in the favorites list in a different way (from the
“Contact Details” screen)
Display the phone screen. (P. 32 2 )
Select the “Contacts”, “Call History” tab or the “Favorites” tab and
select the desired contact to delete.
Select “Remove Favorite”.
Select “Yes” when the confirmation screen appears.
Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the opera-
tion is complete.
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
349
5-9. Bluetooth
®
phone
5
Audio system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Display the “Phone/Message Settings” screen. (P. 339)
Select “Messaging Settings”.
Select the desired item to be set.
Set automatic message
transfer on/off.
Set automatic message
readout on/off.
Set the SMS/MMS notifica-
tion popup on/off.
Set the e-mail notification
popup on/off.
Set adding the vehicle signa-
ture to outgoing messages
on/off.
Set updating message read status on phone on/off.
Change the incoming SMS/MMS display.
“Full Screen”: When an SMS/MMS message is received, the incoming
SMS/MMS display screen is displayed and can be operated on the
screen.
“Drop-Down”: When an SMS/MMS message is received, a message is
displayed on the upper side of the screen.
Change the incoming e-mail display.
“Full Screen”: When an e-mail is received, the incoming e-mail display
screen is the displayed and can be operated on the screen.
“Drop-Down”: When an e-mail is received, a message is displayed on
the upper side of the screen.
Set display of messaging account names on the inbox tab on/off.
When set to on, messaging account names used on the cellular phone
will be displayed.
■ To return to the default volume settings
Select “Default”, and then “Yes”.
Message Settings
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
350
5-9. Bluetooth
®
phone
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Displaying the “Messaging Settings” screen in a different way
Display the phone screen. (P. 32 2 )
Select .
Select “Settings”.
Display the “Phone/Message Settings” screen. (P. 339)
Select “Phone Display Settings”.
Select the desired item to be set.
Change the incoming call
display.
“Full Screen”: When a call is
received, the hands-free screen
is displayed and can be oper-
ated on the screen.
“Drop-Down”: A message is dis-
played on the upper side of the
screen.
Set display of the contact/
history transfer completion
message on/off.
Phone Display Settings
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
351
5-9. Bluetooth
®
phone
5
Audio system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
If there is a problem with the hands-free system or a Bluetooth
®
device, first check the table below.
When using the hands-free system with a Bluetooth
®
device
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
The hands-free system or Bluetooth
®
device does not work.
The connected device may not be a compatible Bluetooth
®
cellular phone.
For a list of specific devices which operation has been confirmed
on this system, check with your Toyota dealer or the following web-
site: http://www.toyota.com/entune.html
The Bluetooth version of the connected cellular phone may be older than
the specified version.
Use a cellular phone with Bluetooth version 2.0 or higher (recom-
mended: Ver. 3.0 with EDR or higher). (P. 355)
352
5-9. Bluetooth
®
phone
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
When registering/connecting a cellular phone
When making/receiving a call
A cellular phone cannot be registered.
An incorrect passcode was entered on the cellular phone.
Enter the correct passcode on the cellular phone.
The registration operation has not been completed on the cellular phone
side.
Complete the registration operation on the cellular phone (approve
registration on the phone).
Old registration information remains on either this system or the cellular
phone.
Delete the existing registration information from both this system
and the cellular phone, then register the cellular phone you wish to
connect to this system. (P. 314)
A Bluetooth
®
connection cannot be made.
Another Bluetooth
®
device is already connected.
Manually connect the cellular phone you wish to use to this sys-
tem. (P. 316)
Bluetooth
®
function is not enabled on the cellular phone.
Enable the Bluetooth
®
function on the cellular phone.
“Please check your device settings.” message is displayed.
Bluetooth
®
function is not enabled on the cellular phone.
Enable the Bluetooth
®
function on the cellular phone.
Old registration information remains on either this system or the cellular
phone.
Delete the existing registration information from both this system
and the cellular phone, then register the cellular phone you wish to
connect to this system. (P. 314)
A call cannot be made/received.
Your vehicle is in a “Out of cellular service area. Please try again later.”
area.
Move to where “Out of cellular service area. Please try again later.”
no longer appears on the display.
353
5-9. Bluetooth
®
phone
5
Audio system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
When using the phonebook
When using the Bluetooth
®
message function
Phonebook data cannot be transferred manually/automatically.
The profile version of the connected cellular phone may not be compatible
with transferring phonebook data.
For a list of specific devices which operation has been confirmed
on this system, check with your Toyota dealer or the following web-
site: http://www.toyota.com/entune.html
Automatic phonebook transfer function on this system is set to off.
Set automatic phonebook transfer function on this system to on.
(P. 341)
Passcode has not been entered on the cellular phone.
Enter the passcode on the cellular phone if requested (default pass-
code: 1234).
Transfer operation on the cellular phone has not completed.
Complete transfer operation on the cellular phone (approve trans-
fer operation on the phone).
Phonebook data cannot be edited.
Automatic phonebook transfer function on this system is set to on.
Set automatic phonebook transfer function on this system to off.
(P. 341)
Messages cannot be viewed.
Message transfer is not enabled on the cellular phone.
Enable message transfer on the cellular phone (approve message
transfer on the phone).
Automatic transfer function on this system is set to off.
Set automatic transfer function on this system to on. (P. 349)
New message notifications are not displayed.
Notification of SMS/MMS/E-mail reception on this system is set to off.
Set notification of SMS/MMS/E-mail reception on this system to on.
(P. 349)
Automatic message transfer function is not enabled on the cellular phone.
Enable automatic transfer function on the cellular phone.
354
5-9. Bluetooth
®
phone
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
In other situations
Even though all conceivable measures have been taken, the symptom sta-
tus does not change.
The cellular phone is not close enough to this system.
Bring the cellular phone closer to this system.
The cellular phone is the most likely cause of the symptom.
Turn the cellular phone off, remove and reinstall the battery pack,
and then restart the cellular phone.
Enable the cellular phone’s Bluetooth
®
connection.
Stop the cellular phone’s security software and close all applica-
tions.
Before using an application installed on the cellular phone, care-
fully check its source and how its operation might affect this sys-
tem.
355
5
Audio system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
5-10. Bluetooth
®
■ When using the Bluetooth
®
audio system
● In the following conditions, the system may not function.
• If the portable audio player is turned off
• If the portable audio player is not connected
• If the portable audio player’s battery is low
● There may be a delay if a cellular phone connection is made during
Bluetooth
®
audio play.
● Depending on the type of portable audio player that is connected to the sys-
tem, operation may differ slightly and certain functions may not be available.
■ When using the hands-free system
● Entune Audio is muted when making a call.
● If both parties speak at the same time, it may be difficult to hear.
● If the received call volume is overly loud, an echo may be heard.
If the Bluetooth
®
phone is too close to the system, quality of the sound may
deteriorate and connection status may deteriorate.
● In the following circumstances, it may be difficult to hear the other party:
• When driving on unpaved roads
• When driving at high speeds
• If a roof or window is open
• If the air conditioning is blowing directly on the microphone
• If there is interference from the network of the cellular phone
■ Conditions under which the system will not operate
● If using a cellular phone that does not support Bluetooth
®
● If the cellular phone is turned off
● If you are outside of cellular phone service coverage
● If the cellular phone is not connected
● If the cellular phone’s battery is low
● When outgoing calls are controlled, due to heavy traffic on telephone lines,
etc.
● When the cellular phone itself cannot be used
● When transferring contact data from the cellular phone
Bluetooth
®
356
5-10. Bluetooth
®
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Bluetooth
®
antenna
The antenna is built into the display.
If the portable audio player is behind the seat or in the glove box or console
box, or is touching or covered by metal objects, the connection status may
deteriorate.
If the cellular phone is behind the seat or in the console box, or touching or
covered by metal objects, the connection status may deteriorate.
■ Battery charge/signal status
● This display may not correspond exactly with the portable audio player or
cellular phone itself.
● This system does not have a charging function.
● The portable audio player or cellular phone battery will be depleted quickly
when the device is connected to Bluetooth
®
.
■ When using the Bluetooth
®
audio and hands-free system at the same
time
The following problems may occur.
● The Bluetooth
®
audio connection may be interrupted.
● Noise may be heard during Bluetooth
®
audio playback.
■ About the contact in this system
The following data is stored for every registered cellular phone. When
another phone is connecting, you cannot read the registered data.
● Contact data
● Call history
● Favorite
● Message
When removing a Bluetooth
®
phone from the system, the above-mentioned
data is also deleted.
357
5-10. Bluetooth
®
5
Audio system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Compatible models
The Bluetooth
®
audio system supports portable audio players with the follow-
ing specifications
● Bluetooth
®
specifications:
Ver. 2.0, or higher (Recommended: Ver. 3.0+EDR or higher)
● Profiles:
• A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Ver. 1.0, or higher
(Recommended: Ver. 1.2 or higher)
This is a profile to transmit stereo audio or high quality sound to Entune
Audio.
• AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher
(Recommended: Ver. 1.4 or higher)
This is a profile to allow remote control the A/V equipment.
However, please note that some functions may be limited depending on the
type of portable audio player connected.
The hands-free system supports cellular phones with the following specifica-
tions.
● Bluetooth
®
specification:
Ver. 2.0 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 3.0+EDR or higher)
● Profiles:
• HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.6 or
higher)
This is a profile to allow hands-free phone calls using a cellular phone or
head set. It has outgoing and incoming call functions.
• OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.2)
This is a profile to transfer contact data. When a Bluetooth
®
compatible
cellular phone has both PBAP and OPP, OPP cannot be used.
• PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Recommended:
Ver. 1.1)
This is a profile to transfer contact data.
• MAP (Message Access Profile) Ver.1.0 or higher
This is a profile to using phone message.
If the cellular phone does not support HFP, you cannot register it with the
hands-free system. OPP, PBAP or MAP services must be selected individu-
ally.
358
5-10. Bluetooth
®
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Reconnecting the portable audio player
If the portable audio player is disconnected due to poor reception when the
engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position (vehicles without a smart key
system) or ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with a smart key
system), the system automatically reconnects the portable audio player.
If you have switched off the portable audio player yourself, follow the instruc-
tions below to reconnect:
● Select the portable audio player again
● Enter the portable audio player
■ When you sell your car
Be sure to delete your personal data. (P. 280)
WARNING
■ While driving
Do not use the portable audio player, cellular phone or connect a device to
the Bluetooth
®
system.
■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
● Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth
®
antennas. People with implantable
cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or
implantable cardioverter defibrillators should maintain a reasonable dis-
tance between themselves and the Bluetooth
®
antennas. The radio waves
may affect the operation of such devices.
● Before using Bluetooth
®
devices, users of any electrical medical device
other than implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization
therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should con-
sult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation
under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected
effects on the operation of such medical devices.
NOTICE
■ When leaving the vehicle
Do not leave your portable audio player or cellular phone in the vehicle. The
inside of the vehicle may become hot, causing damage to the portable
audio player or cellular phone.
359
5
Audio system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
5-11. Using the voice command system
Press the talk switch.
Select to train voice recogni-
tion.
Select to start the voice rec-
ognition tutorial.
Select “OK” and say the desired command.
On the list screen, you can select the desired command.
To cancel the voice command system, press and hold the talk switch.
Voice command system
The voice command system enables the hands-free system to
be operated using voice commands.
Operations of the voice command system can be performed by
selecting the menu corresponding to each function on the
screen. Even if any menu is selected, commands displayed on
all menus can be operated.
Using the voice command system
1
Type A Type B
1
2
2
360
5-11. Using the voice command system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Microphone
P. 323
■ When using the microphone
● It is unnecessary to speak directly into the microphone when giving a com-
mand.
● When “Voice Prompt Interrupt” set to on, it is not necessary to wait for the
confirmation beep before speaking a command. (P. 283)
● Voice commands may not be recognized if:
• Spoken too quickly.
• Spoken at a low or high volume.
• The roof or windows are open.
• Passengers are talking while voice commands are spoken.
• The air conditioning speed is set high.
• The air conditioning vents are turned towards the microphone.
● In the following conditions, the system may not recognize the command
properly and using voice commands may not be possible:
• The command is incorrect or unclear. Note that certain words, accents or
speech patterns may be difficult for the system to recognize.
• There is excessive background noise, such as wind noise.
Due to natural language speech recognition technology, this system
enables recognition of a command when spoken naturally. However,
the system cannot recognize every variation of each command.
In some situations, it is possible to omit the command for the proce-
dure and directly state the desired operation.
Not all voice commands are displayed in the short cut menu.
This function is available in English, Spanish and French.
■ Expression examples for each function
Casual speech recognization
Command Expression examples
“Call (name)
(type)”
Get me (Robert Brown).
I need to call (Robert Brown) at (Work) right away.
“Dial (number)”
Please dial the number (3334445555).
Ring (3334445555).
361
5-11. Using the voice command system
5
Audio system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Some recognizable voice commands and their actions are shown
below as examples.
Basic
Phone
Command list
Command Action
“Help”
Prompts voice guidance to offer examples of com-
mands or operation methods
“Go Back” Returns to the previous screen
Command Action
“Redial”
Places a call to the phone number of the latest outgo-
ing call
“Call Back”
Places a call to the phone number of latest incoming
call
“Show Recent
Calls”
Displays the call history screen
“Dial (phone num-
ber)”
Places a call to the said phone number
“Call (contacts)
(phonetypes)”
Place a call to the said phone type of the contact from
the phone book
362
5-11. Using the voice command system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
The Mobile Assistant feature will activate Apple’s Siri
®
Eyes Free
mode via the steering wheel switches. To operate the Mobile Assis-
tant, a compatible cellular phone must be registered and connected to
this system via Bluetooth
®
. (P. 3 12 )
Press and hold the off-hook on the steering wheel until you hear the
beeps.
The Mobile Assistant can be
used only when the following
screen is displayed.
To cancel the Mobile Assistant,
select “Cancel”, or press and hold
the off-hook on the steering wheel.
To restart the Mobile Assistant for
additional commands, press the
off-hook on the steering wheel.
• Mobile Assistant can only be restarted after the system responds to a
voice command.
• After some phone and music commands, the Mobile Assistant feature will
automatically end to complete the requested action.
■
Adjusting the Mobile Assistant volume
The volume of the Mobile Assistant can be adjusted using the
“PWR·VOL” knob or steering wheel volume switches. The Mobile
Assistant and phone call volumes are synchronized.
Mobile Assistant
1
Type A Type B
2
363
5-11. Using the voice command system
5
Audio system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Notes about Mobile Assistant
● The available features and functions may vary based on the iOS version
installed on the connected device.
● Some Siri features are limited in Eyes Free mode. If you attempt to use an
unavailable function, Siri will inform you that the function is not available.
● If Siri is not enabled on the cellular phone connected via Bluetooth
®
, an
error message will be displayed on the screen.
● While a phone call is active, the Mobile Assistant cannot be used.
● If using the navigation feature of the cellular phone, ensure the active audio
source is Bluetooth
®
audio or iPod in order to hear turn by turn direction
prompts.
364
5-11. Using the voice command system
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
365
6
Interior features
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
6-1. Using the air
conditioning system
and defogger
Manual air conditioning
system............................. 366
Automatic air conditioning
system............................. 373
Heated steering wheel/
seat heaters .................... 382
6-2. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list ................ 384
• Front interior light/
personal lights............... 385
• Rear interior light .......... 386
6-3. Using the storage
features
List of storage features ..... 387
• Glove box...................... 388
• Console box.................. 388
• Bottle holders................ 389
• Cup holders .................. 390
6-4. Other interior features
Other interior features ....... 392
• Sun visors..................... 392
• Vanity mirrors................ 392
• Clock............................. 392
• O
utside temperature
display........................... 393
• Power outlet.................. 394
• Assist grips ................... 395
Garage door opener.......... 396
Compass........................... 403
366
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■ Adjusting the temperature setting
Heater
To adjust the temperature setting, turn the dial clockwise to
increase the temperature.
Air conditioning system
To adjust the temperature setting, turn the dial clockwise
(warm) or counterclockwise (cool).
If is not pressed, the system will blow ambient temperature air or
heated air.
■
Fan speed setting
To adjust the fan speed, turn the dial clockwise (increase) or
counterclockwise (decrease).
Turning the dial to “0” turns off the fan.
Manual air conditioning system
: If equipped
Air conditioning controls
Heater Air conditioning system
367
6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
6
Interior features
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Changing airflow modes
To change the airflow mode, set
the dial to the desired
position.
Air flows to the upper body.
Air flows to the upper body
and feet.
Air flows to the feet.
Air flows to the feet and the windshield defogger operates.
Air flows to the windshield.
1
2
3
4
5
368
6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Press .
The mode switches between outside air mode (indicator off) and recir-
culated air mode (indicator on) each time is pressed.
■
Defogging the windshield
Defoggers are used to defog the windshield and front side win-
dows.
Set the air outlet selector dial to the position.
Set the outside/recirculated air mode button to outside air mode if the
recirculated air mode is used. (It may switch automatically.)
To defog the windshield and the side windows early, turn the air flow and
temperature up.
Vehicles with the air conditioning system: If the dehumidification
function is not operating, press to operate the dehumidifica-
tion function.
■ Defogging the rear window and outside rear view mirrors
Vehicles without outside rear view mirror defoggers
Defoggers are used to defog the rear window.
Press .
The defoggers will automatically turn off after a period of time.
Vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers
Defoggers are used to defog the rear window, and to remove rain-
drops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors.
Press .
The defoggers will automatically turn off after a period of time.
Other functions
369
6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
6
Interior features
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Location of air outlets
The air outlets and air volume
changes according to the
selected airflow mode.
■ Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air out-
lets
Front center outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Air outlets
370
6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Front side outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Open the vent
Close the vent
1
2
371
6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
6
Interior features
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ For quick cooling (vehicles with an air conditioning system)
Turn the dial to the “MAX A/C” position and select the recirculated air
mode.
■ Fogging up of the windows
● Vehicles with the button: The windows will easily fog up when the
humidity in the vehicle is high. Turning on will dehumidify the air from
the outlets and defog the windshield effectively.
● Vehicles with the button: If you turn off, the windows may fog
up more easily.
● The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used.
■ Outside/recirculated air mode
When driving on dusty roads such as tunnels or in heavy traffic, set the out-
side/recirculated air mode button to the recirculated air mode. This is effective
in preventing outside air from entering the vehicle interior. During cooling
operation, setting the recirculated air mode will also cool the vehicle interior
effectively.
■ When the outside temperature is low (vehicles with the button)
The air conditioning system may not operate even when
is pressed.
■ Ventilation and air conditioning odors
● To let fresh air in, set the air conditioning system to the outside air mode.
● During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into
and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to
be emitted from the vents.
● To reduce potential odors from occurring:
It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air
mode prior to turning the vehicle off.
■ Air conditioning filter
P. 453
372
6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up
● Do not set the air outlet selector dial to during cool air operation in
extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the
outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the
windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.
■ To prevent burns (vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers)
Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces when the outside rear view mirror
defoggers are on.
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the
engine is stopped.
● Do not place anything on the instrument
panel which may cover the air outlets.
Otherwise, air flow may be obstructed,
preventing the windshield defoggers
from defogging.
373
6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
6
Interior features
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Adjusting the temperature setting
Increases the temperature
Decreases the temperature
If is not pressed, the sys-
tem will blow ambient tempera-
ture air or heated air.
Automatic air conditioning system
: If equipped
Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according
to the temperature setting.
Air conditioning controls
1
2
374
6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Fan speed setting
Increases the fan speed
Decreases the fan speed
■ Change the airflow mode
To change the airflow mode,
move the airflow change knob
upward or downward.
The air outlets used are
changed each time the knob is
operated.
Air flows to the upper body.
Air flows to the upper body
and feet.
Air flows to the feet.
Air flows to the feet and the
windshield defogger oper-
ates.
■ Other functions
● Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
(P. 375)
● Defogging the windshield (P. 37 6 )
● Defogging the rear window and outside rear view mirrors
(P. 376)
1
2
Airflow change knob
1
2
3
4
375
6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
6
Interior features
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Press .
The dehumidification function begins to operate. Air outlets and fan
speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature set-
ting.
Adjust the temperature setting.
To stop the operation, press .
■ Automatic mode indicator
If the fan speed setting or air flow modes are operated, the auto-
matic mode indicator goes off. However, automatic mode for func-
tions other than that operated is maintained.
■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Press to change to recirculated air mode.
Press to change to outside air mode.
When recirculated air mode is selected, the indicator on illu-
minates.
When outside air mode is selected, the indicator on illumi-
nates.
Using automatic mode
Other functions
1
2
3
376
6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Defogging the windshield
Defoggers are used to defog the windshield and front side win-
dows.
Press .
The dehumidification function operates and fan speed increases.
Set the outside/recirculated air mode button to the outside air mode if the
recirculated air mode is used. (It may switch automatically.)
To defog the windshield and the front side windows early, turn the air flow
and temperature up.
To return to the previous mode, press again when the windshield is
defogged.
■
Defogging the rear window and outside rear view mirrors
Defoggers are used to defog the rear window, and to remove rain-
drops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors.
Press .
The defoggers will automatically turn off after a period of time.
■
Windshield wiper de-icer (if equipped)
This feature is used to prevent ice from building up on the wind-
shield and wiper blades.
Press the switch to turn the sys-
tem on/off.
The indicator comes on when
the windshield wiper de-icer is
on.
The windshield de-icer will auto-
matically turn off after a period
of time.
377
6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
6
Interior features
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Location of air outlets
The air outlets and air volume
changes according to the
selected airflow mode.
■ Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air out-
lets
Front center outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Air outlets
378
6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Front side outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Open the vent
Close the vent
■ Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode (if equipped)
In Eco drive mode, the air conditioning system is controlled as follows to pri-
oritize fuel efficiency:
● Engine speed controlled to restrict heating/cooling capacity.
● Outside/recirculated air mode may automatically switch depending on the
temperature setting or the inside temperature.
● Fan speed restricted when automatic mode is selected
To improve air conditioning performance, perform the following operations:
● Adjust the fan speed.
● Turn off Eco drive mode. (P. 182)
■ Using automatic mode
Fan speed is adjusted automatically according to the temperature setting and
the ambient conditions.
Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow
immediately after is pressed.
1
2
379
6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
6
Interior features
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Fogging up of the windows
● The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high.
Turning on will dehumidify the air from the outlets and defog the wind-
shield effectively.
● If you turn off, the windows may fog up more easily.
● The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used.
■ Outside/recirculated air mode
● When driving on dusty roads such as tunnels or in heavy traffic, set the out-
side/recirculated air mode button to recirculated air mode. This is effective in
preventing outside air from entering the vehicle interior. During cooling oper-
ation, setting the recirculated air mode will also cool the vehicle interior
effectively.
● Outside/recirculated air mode may automatically switch depending on the
temperature setting or the inside temperature.
380
6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ When the outside temperature exceeds 75°F (24°C) and the air condition-
ing system is on
● In order to reduce the air conditioning power consumption, the air condition-
ing system may switch to recirculated air mode automatically. This may also
reduce fuel consumption.
Vehicles without a smart key system
● Recirculated air mode is selected as a default mode when the engine switch
is turned to the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
● Recirculated air mode is selected as a default mode when the engine switch
is turned to IGNITION ON mode.
● It is possible to switch to outside air mode at any time by pressing .
■ When the outside temperature is low
The dehumidification function may not operate even when is pressed.
■ Ventilation and air conditioning odors
● To let fresh air in, set the air conditioning system to the outside air mode.
● During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into
and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to
be emitted from the vents.
● To reduce potential odors from occurring:
• It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air
mode prior to turning the vehicle off.
• The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time
immediately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic
mode.
■ Air conditioning filter
P. 453
■ Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. air conditioning setting) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 564)
381
6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
6
Interior features
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up
● Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather.
The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the
windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, block-
ing your vision.
■ To prevent burns
● Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces when the outside rear view mir-
ror defoggers are on.
● Do not touch the glass at lower part of the windshield or to the side of the
front pillars when the windshield wiper de-icer is on. (if equipped)
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the
engine is stopped.
● Do not place anything on the instrument
panel which may cover the air outlets.
Otherwise, air flow may be obstructed,
preventing the windshield defoggers
from defogging.
382
6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Heated steering wheel
/seat heaters
: If equipped
The heated steering wheel and seat heaters heat the side grips
of the steering wheel and seats, respectively.
WARNING
● Care should be taken to prevent injury if anyone in the following categories
comes in contact with the steering wheel or seats when the heater is on:
• Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically chal-
lenged
• Persons with sensitive skin
• Persons who are fatigued
• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping
drugs, cold remedies, etc.)
● Observe the following precautions to prevent the minor burns or overheat-
ing
• Do not cover the seat with a blanket or cushion when using the seat
heater.
• Do not use the seat heaters more than necessary.
NOTICE
● Do not put heavy objects that have an uneven surface on the seat and do
not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.
● To prevent battery discharge, do not use the functions when the engine is
stopped.
383
6-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
6
Interior features
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Turn the heated steering wheel on/off
The indicator light comes on when
the heated steering wheel is oper-
ating.
■ The heated steering wheel can be used when
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
Press the switch.
High temperature
Low temperature
The indicator light comes on when
the switch is on.
■ The seat heaters can be used when
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ When not in use
Put the switch in the neutral position. The indicator will turn off.
Heated steering wheel
Seat heaters
1
2
385
6-2. Using the interior lights
6
Interior features
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Front interior light
Off
Door position
On
■ Personal lights
When a light is on due to its door link switch, the light will not turn off
even if the lens or switch is pressed.
Front interior light/personal lights
Type A Type B
1
2
3
Type A Type B
On/off On
Off
1
2
386
6-2. Using the interior lights
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
On
Door position
Off
■ Illuminated entry system
Vehicles without a smart key system
When the interior light switch is in the door position, the interior light automat-
ically turns on/off according to the engine switch position, whether the doors
are locked/unlocked and whether the doors are open/closed.
Vehicles with a smart key system
When the interior light switch is in the door position, the interior light and
engine switch light automatically turn on/off according to engine switch mode,
the presence of the electronic key, whether the doors are locked/unlocked
and whether the doors are open/closed.
■ To prevent battery discharge
The following lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes:
● Front interior light/personal lights
● Rear interior light
● Trunk light
■ Customization
Setting (e.g. the time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 564)
Rear interior light
1
2
3
387
6
Interior features
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
6-3. Using the storage features
List of storage features
Glove box (P. 3 8 8)
Bottle holders (P. 38 9 )
Console box (P. 388)
Cup holders (P. 390)
WARNING
■ Items that should not be left in the storage spaces
Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this
may cause the following when cabin temperature becomes high:
● Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact
with other stored items.
● Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other
stored items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas,
causing a fire hazard.
■ When driving or when the storage compartments are not in use
Keep the lids closed.
In the event of sudden braking or sudden swerving, an accident may occur
due to an occupant being struck by an open lid or the items stored inside.
1
2
3
4
388
6-3. Using the storage features
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Pull up the lever to open the glove
box.
Console box
Lift the lid while pulling up the
knob on the right side.
Upper level box
Lift the lid while pulling up the
knob on the left side.
Glove box
Console box
389
6-3. Using the storage features
6
Interior features
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Front
■ Rear
■ When using the holder as a bottle holder
● When storing a bottle, close the cap.
● The bottle may not be stored depending on its size or shape.
Bottle holders
WARNING
■ Items unsuitable for the bottle holder
Do not place anything other than a bottle in the bottle holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or
sudden braking and cause injury.
NOTICE
■ Items that should not be stowed in the bottle holders
Put the cap on before stowing a bottle. Do not place open bottles in the bot-
tle holders, or glass or paper cups containing liquid. The contents may spill
and glass cups may break.
390
6-3. Using the storage features
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Front
■ Rear (if equipped)
Pull the armrest down.
Cup holders
391
6-3. Using the storage features
6
Interior features
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Adjusting the size of the cup holder (front)
■ Removing the cup holder insert (front)
Remove the cup holder insert.
Change the cup holder insert position.
The cup holder insert may be removed for
cleaning.
WARNING
■ Items unsuitable for the cup holders
Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or
sudden braking, causing injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent
burns.
1
2
392
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
6-4. Other interior features
To set the visor in the forward
position, flip it down.
To set the visor in the side posi-
tion, flip down, unhook, and
swing it to the side.
To use the side extender, place
the visor in the side position,
then slide it backward. (if
equipped)
Slide the cover to open.
The vanity light turns on when the
cover is opened.
If the vanity lights remain on for 20 minutes while the engine is off, the lights
will turn off automatically.
The clock can be adjusted.
Adjusts the hours
Adjusts the minutes
Rounds to the nearest hour
*
*
: e.g.1:00 to 1:29 1:00
1:30 to 1:59 2:00
Other interior features
Sun visors
1
2
3
Vanity mirrors
Clock
1
2
3
393
6-4. Other interior features
6
Interior features
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
The temperature display shows temperatures within the range of -40F
(-40C) to 122F (50C).
■ The outside temperature is displayed when
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Display
In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be dis-
played, or the display may take longer than normal to change.
● When the vehicle is stopped, or moving at low speeds (less than 9 mph [15
km/h]).
● When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit
of a garage, tunnel, etc.)
■ When “--F” or “--C” is displayed
The system may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.
Outside temperature display
Type A Type B
Type C Type D
394
6-4. Other interior features
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Please use as a power supply for electronic goods that use less than
12 VDC/10 A (power consumption of 120 W).
Open the lid.
■ The power outlet can be used when
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
Power outlet
NOTICE
● To avoid damaging the power outlet, close the power outlet lid when the
power outlet is not in use. Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power
outlet may cause a short circuit.
● To prevent battery discharge, do not use the power outlet longer than nec-
essary when the engine is off.
395
6-4. Other interior features
6
Interior features
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
An assist grip installed on the ceil-
ing can be used to support your
body while sitting on the seat.
Assist grips
WARNING
Do not use the assist grip when getting in or out of the vehicle or rising from
your seat.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the assist grip, do not put a heavy load on the assist
grip.
396
6-4. Other interior features
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
The HomeLink
®
wireless control system in your vehicle has 3 buttons
which can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the
programming methods on the following pages to determine the
method which is appropriate for the device.
HomeLink
®
indicator light
Garage door operation indica-
tors
Buttons
■ Before programming the HomeLink
®
● During programming, it is possible that garage doors, gates, or
other devices may operate. For this reason, make sure that peo-
ple and objects are clear of the garage door or other devices to
prevent injury or other potential harm.
● It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the remote
control transmitter for more accurate programming.
● Garage door opener motors manufactured after 1995 may be
equipped with rolling code protection. If this is the case, you may
need a stepladder or other sturdy, safe device to reach the
“learn” or “smart” button on the garage door opener motor.
Garage door opener
: If equipped
The garage door opener can be programmed to operate garage
doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems,
security systems, and other devices.
HomeLink
®
1
2
3
397
6-4. Other interior features
6
Interior features
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Programming the HomeLink
®
Steps through must be performed within 60 seconds, other-
wise the indicator light will stop flashing and programming will not
be able to be completed.
Press and release the HomeLink
®
button you want to program
and check that the HomeLink
®
indicator light flashes orange.
Point the remote control
transmitter for the device at
the rear view mirror, 1 to 3 in.
(25 to 75 mm) from the
HomeLink
®
buttons.
Keep the HomeLink
®
indicator
light in view while programming.
Program a device.
Programming a device
other than an entry gate
(for U.S.A. owners)
Press and hold the remote
control transmitter button
until the HomeLink
®
indicator
light changes from slowly
flashing orange to rapidly
flashing green (rolling code)
or continuously lit green
(fixed code), then release the
button.
Programming an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)/Programming
a device in the Canadian market
Press and release the remote control transmitter button at 2 sec-
ond intervals, repeatedly, until the HomeLink
®
indicator light
changes from slowly flashing orange to rapidly flashing green
(rolling code) or continuously lit green (fixed code).
1 3
1
2
3
398
6-4. Other interior features
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Test the HomeLink
®
operation by pressing the newly pro-
grammed button and observing the indicator light:
● Indicator light illuminates: Programming of a fixed code device
has completed. The garage door or other device should operate
when a HomeLink
®
button is pressed and released.
● Indicator light flashes rapidly: The garage door opener motor or
other device is equipped with a rolling code. To complete pro-
gramming, firmly press and hold the HomeLink
®
button for 2 sec-
onds then release it.
● If the garage door or other device does not operate, proceed to
“Programming a rolling code system”.
Repeat the steps above to program another device for any of the
remaining HomeLink
®
buttons.
■ Programming a rolling code system
2 or more people may be necessary to complete rolling code pro-
gramming.
Locate the “Learn” or “Smart”
button on the garage door
opener motor in the garage.
This button can usually be found
where the hanging antenna wire
is attached to the unit. The
name and color of the button
may vary by manufacturer.
Refer to the Owner’s manual
supplied with the garage door
opener motor for details.
Press and release the
“Learn” or “Smart” button.
Perform within 30 sec-
onds after performing .
4
5
1
2
3
2
399
6-4. Other interior features
6
Interior features
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Press and hold the desired
HomeLink
®
button (inside the
vehicle) for 2 seconds and
release it. Repeat this
sequence (press/hold/
release) up to 3 times to
complete programming.
If the garage door opener
motor operates when the
HomeLink
®
button is
pressed, the garage door
opener motor recognizes the
HomeLink
®
signal.
■ Enabling 2-way communication with a garage door (only avail-
able for compatible devices)
When enabled, 2-way communication allows you to check the sta-
tus of the opening and closing of a garage door through indicators
in your vehicle.
2-way communication is only available if the garage door opener
motor used is a compatible device. (To check device compatibility,
refer to www.HomeLink.com.)
Within 5 seconds after programming the garage door opener has
been completed, if the garage door opener motor is trained to
HomeLink
®
, both garage door operation indicators will flash rap-
idly green and the light on the garage door opener motor will
blink twice, indicating that 2-way communication is enabled.
If the indicators do not flash, perform and within the first 10
presses of the HomeLink
®
button after programming has been
completed.
Press a programmed HomeLink
®
button to operate a garage
door.
Within 1 minute of pressing the HomeLink
®
button, after the
garage door operation has stopped, press the “Learn” or “Smart”
button on the garage door opener motor. Within 5 seconds of the
establishment of 2-way communication with the garage door
opener, both garage door operation indicators in the vehicle will
flash rapidly green and the light on the garage door opener motor
will blink twice, indicating that 2-way communication is enabled.
3
1
2 3
2
3
400
6-4. Other interior features
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Reprogramming a single HomeLink
®
button
When the following procedure is performed, buttons which already
have devices registered to them can be overwritten:
With one hand, press and hold the desired HomeLink
®
button.
When the HomeLink
®
indicator starts flashing orange, continue
to hold the HomeLink
®
button and perform “Programming Home-
Link
®
” (it takes 20 seconds for the HomeLink
®
indicator to
start flashing).
Press the appropriate HomeLink
®
button. The HomeLink
®
indicator
light should turn on.
The status of the opening and
closing of a garage door is shown
by the indicators.
Opening
Closing
This function is only available if the
garage door opener motor used is
a compatible device. (To check
device compatibility, refer to
www.HomeLink.com.)
The indicators can operate within approximately 820 ft. (250 m) of
the garage door. However, if there are obstructions between the
garage door and the vehicle, such as houses and trees, feedback
signals from the garage door may not be received. To recall the pre-
vious door operation status, press and release either HomeLink
®
buttons and or and simultane-
ously. The last recorded status will be displayed for 3 seconds.
Operating the HomeLink
®
Garage door operation indicators
1
2
1
1
2
Color Status
Orange (flashing) Currently opening/closing
Green Opening/closing has completed
Red (flashing) Feedback signals cannot be received
401
6-4. Other interior features
6
Interior features
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Press and hold the 2 outside but-
tons for 10 seconds until the
HomeLink
®
indicator light
changes from continuously lit
orange to rapidly flashing green.
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to
erase the programs stored in the
HomeLink
®
memory.
■ Codes stored in the HomeLink
®
memory
● The registered codes are not erased even if the battery cable is discon-
nected.
● If learning failed when registering a different code to a HomeLink
®
button
that already has a code registered to it, the already registered code will not
be erased.
■ Before programming
● Install a new battery in the transmitter.
● The battery side of the transmitter must be pointed away from the Home-
Link
®
.
■ Certification for the garage door opener
For the U.S.A.
FCC ID: NZLAECHL5
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada
NOTE:
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
REMARQUE:
Le present appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables
aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisee aux deux
conditions suivantes: (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2)
l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioelectrique subi,
meme si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
Erasing the entire HomeLink
®
memory (all three codes)
402
6-4. Other interior features
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ When support is necessary
Visit on the web at www.homelink.com/toyota or call 1-800-355-3515.
WARNING
■ When programming a garage door or other remote control device
The garage door or other device may operate, so ensure people and
objects are out of danger to prevent potential harm.
■ Conforming to federal safety standards
Do not use the HomeLink
®
compatible transceiver with any garage door
opener or device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by
federal safety standards. This includes any garage door that cannot detect
an interfering object. A door or device without these features increases the
risk of death or serious injury.
■ When operating or programming HomeLink
®
Never allow a child to operate or play with the HomeLink
®
buttons.
403
6-4. Other interior features
6
Interior features
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
To turn the compass on or off,
press the button for more than 3
seconds.
Compass
: If equipped
The compass on the inside rear view mirror indicates the direc-
tion in which the vehicle is heading.
Operation
Displays and directions
Display Direction
N North
NE Northeast
E East
SE Southeast
S South
SW Southwest
W West
NW Northwest
404
6-4. Other interior features
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
The direction display deviates from the true direction determined by
the earth’s magnetic field. The amount of deviation varies according to
the geographic position of the vehicle.
If you cross over a map boundary shown in illustration, the compass will
deviate.
To obtain higher precision or perfect calibration, refer to the following.
■
Deviation calibration
Stop the vehicle.
Press and hold the button for
6 seconds.
A number (1 to 15) appears on
the compass display.
Press the switch and referring to the map above, select the num-
ber of the zone where you are.
If the direction is displayed several seconds after adjustment, the cali-
bration is complete.
Calibrating the compass
1
2
3
405
6-4. Other interior features
6
Interior features
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Circling calibration
Stop the vehicle in a place where it is safe to drive in a circle.
Press and hold the button for
9 seconds.
C appears on the compass dis-
play.
Drive the vehicle at 5 mph
(8 km/h) or less in a circle
until a direction is displayed.
If there is not enough space to
drive in a circle, drive around the
block until the direction is dis-
played.
1
2
3
406
6-4. Other interior features
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Conditions unfavorable to correct operation
The compass may not show the correct direction in the following conditions:
● The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning.
● The vehicle is on an inclined surface.
● The vehicle is in a place where the earth's magnetic field is subject to inter-
ference by artificial magnetic fields (underground car park/parking lot, under
a steel tower, between buildings, roof car park/parking lot, near an intersec-
tion, near a large vehicle, etc.).
● The vehicle has become magnetized.
(There is a magnet or metal object near the inside rear view mirror.)
● The battery has been disconnected.
● A door is open.
WARNING
■ While driving the vehicle
Do not adjust the display. Adjust the display only when the vehicle is
stopped.
■ When doing the circling calibration
Secure a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles in the neigh-
borhood. Do not violate any local traffic rules while performing circling cali-
bration.
NOTICE
■ To avoid compass malfunctions
Do not place magnets or any metal objects near the inside rear view mirror.
Doing this may cause the compass sensor to malfunction.
■ To ensure normal operation of the compass
● Do not perform circling calibration of the compass in a place where the
earth's magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields.
● During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon roof, power win-
dows, etc.) as they may interfere with the calibration.
407
7
Maintenance and care
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
7-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior.......... 408
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior........... 411
7-2. Maintenance
Maintenance
requirements................... 414
General maintenance........ 417
Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M)
programs......................... 421
7-3. Do-it-yourself
maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions ..................... 422
Hood ................................. 425
Positioning a floor jack ...... 427
Engine compartment......... 429
Tires .................................. 440
Tire inflation pressure ....... 448
Wheels .............................. 451
Air conditioning filter.......... 453
Wireless remote control/
electronic key battery...... 455
Checking and replacing
fuses ............................... 458
Light bulbs......................... 461
408
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
7-1. Maintenance and care
● Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle
body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt
and dust.
● Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a
chamois.
● For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly
with water.
● Wipe away any water.
● Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.
If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle
body is cool.
■ Automatic car washes
● Fold the mirrors before washing the vehicle. Start washing from the front of
the vehicle. Make sure to extend the mirrors before driving.
● Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and
harm your vehicle's paint.
● Vehicles with a rear spoiler: In certain automatic car washes, the rear spoiler
may interfere with machine operation. This may prevent the vehicle from
being cleaned properly or result in damage to the rear spoiler.
■ High pressure car washes
● Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of
the windows.
● Before using the car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is
closed properly.
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle
exterior
Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in
prime condition:
409
7-1. Maintenance and care
7
Maintenance and care
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ When using a car wash (vehicles with a smart key system)
If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective
range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case, follow the fol-
lowing correction procedures to wash the vehicle:
● Place the key in a position 6 ft. (2 m) or more separate from the vehicle
while the vehicle is being washed. (Take care to ensure that the key is not
stolen.)
● Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart key sys-
tem. (P. 124)
■ Aluminum wheels (if equipped)
● Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent.
● Wash detergent off with water immediately after use.
● To protect the paint from damage, make sure to observe the following pre-
cautions.
• Do not use acidic, alkaline or abrasive detergent
• Do not use hard brushes
• Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, such as after driv-
ing or parking in hot weather
■ Bumpers
Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.
WARNING
■ When washing the vehicle
Do not apply water to the inside of the engine compartment. Doing so may
cause the electrical components etc. to catch fire.
■ Precautions regarding the exhaust pipe
Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot.
When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipe until it has
cooled sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.
410
7-1. Maintenance and care
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
NOTICE
■ To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and compo-
nents (aluminum wheels etc.)
● Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:
• After driving near the sea coast
• After driving on salted roads
• If coal tar or tree sap is present on the paint surface
• If dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings are present on the
paint surface
• After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust,
iron powder or chemical substances
• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled with dust or mud
• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface
● If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.
● To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place
with low humidity when storing the wheels.
■ Cleaning the exterior lights
● Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.
This may damage the surfaces of the lights.
● Do not apply wax to the surfaces of the lights.
Wax may cause damage to the lenses.
■ To prevent damage to the windshield wiper arms
When lifting the wiper arms away from the windshield, pull the driver side
wiper arm upward first, and then the passenger side. When returning the
wipers to their original position, do so from the passenger side first.
■ When using a high pressure car wash
Do not bring the nozzle tip close to boots (rubber or resin manufactured
cover), connectors or the following parts. The parts may be damaged if they
come into contact with high-pressure water.
• Traction related parts
• Steering parts
• Suspension parts
• Brake parts
411
7-1. Maintenance and care
7
Maintenance and care
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces
with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.
● If dirt cannot be removed, wipe it off with a soft cloth dampened with
neutral detergent diluted to approximately 1%.
Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off
remaining traces of detergent and water.
● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
● Wipe it off with a soft cloth dampened with neutral detergent diluted
to approximately 1%.
● Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off
remaining traces of detergent and water.
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle
interior
The following procedures will help protect your vehicle’s interior
and keep it in top condition:
Protecting the vehicle interior
Cleaning the synthetic leather areas
412
7-1. Maintenance and care
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Shampooing the carpets
There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge
or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not use water.
Wipe dirty surfaces and let them dry. Excellent results are obtained by keep-
ing the carpet as dry as possible.
■ Seat belts
Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also
check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
WARNING
■ Water in the vehicle
● Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle.
Doing so may cause electrical components etc. to malfunction or catch
fire.
● Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.
(P. 36)
An electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function
properly, resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel)
Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect
off the windshield, obstructing the driver’s view and leading to an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
413
7-1. Maintenance and care
7
Maintenance and care
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
NOTICE
■ Cleaning detergents
● Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may discolor the vehi-
cle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces:
• Non-seat portions: Organic substances such as benzene or gasoline,
alkaline or acidic solutions, dye, and bleach
• Seats: Alkaline or acidic solutions, such as thinner, benzene, and alco-
hol
● Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel’s or other
interior part’s painted surface may be damaged.
■ Preventing damage to leather surfaces
Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of
leather surfaces:
● Remove any dust or dirt from leather surfaces immediately.
● Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time.
Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.
● Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or containing wax on the uphol-
stery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats
up significantly.
■ Water on the floor
Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.
Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes
into contact with electrical components such as the audio system above or
under the floor of the vehicle. Water may also cause the body to rust.
■ When cleaning the inside of the windshield
Do not allow glass cleaner to contact the lens. Also, do not touch the lens.
(P. 226).
■ Cleaning the inside of the rear window
● Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause
damage to the rear window defogger heater wires or antenna. Use a cloth
dampened with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the
window in strokes running parallel to the heater wires or antenna.
● Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or antenna.
414
7-2. Maintenance
General maintenance should be performed on a daily basis. This can
be done by yourself or by a Toyota dealer.
Scheduled maintenance should be performed at specified intervals
according to the maintenance schedule.
For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the “Sched-
uled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
You can perform some maintenance procedures by yourself.
Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect warranty
coverage.
The use of Toyota Repair Manuals is recommended.
For details about warranty coverage, refer to the separate “Owner’s War-
ranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
Maintenance requirements
To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and reg-
ular maintenance are essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to
perform regular checks. Toyota recommends the following main-
tenance:
General maintenance
Scheduled maintenance
Do-it-yourself maintenance
415
7-2. Maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Repair and replacement
It is recommended that genuine Toyota parts be used for repairs to ensure
performance of each system. If non-Toyota parts are used in replacement or if
a repair shop other than a Toyota dealer performs repairs, confirm the war-
ranty coverage.
■ Resetting the message indicating maintenance is required (U.S.A. only)
After the required maintenance is performed according to the maintenance
schedule, please reset the message.
To reset the message, follow the procedure described below:
Vehicles with a monochrome display
Vehicles without a smart key system: Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK”
position with the trip meter A reading shown. (P. 77)
Vehicles with a smart key system: Turn the engine switch off with the trip
meter A reading shown. (P. 77)
Vehicles without a smart key system:
While pressing the display change button (P. 77), turn the engine switch
to the “ON” position (do not start the engine because reset mode will be
canceled).
Vehicles with a smart key system:
While pressing the display change button (P. 77), turn the engine switch
to the IGNITION ON mode (do not start the engine because otherwise the
reset mode will be canceled).
Continue to press and hold the button until the trip meter displays “000000”.
Vehicles with a color display
While the engine is running, switch the multi-information display to the “Set-
tings” screen. (P. 93)
Select “Reset Scheduled Maint. Data” on the “Settings” screen.
Select “Yes” when “Reset Data?” is displayed on the multi-information dis-
play.
“The Data Has Been Reset” will be displayed when the reset procedure has
been completed.
■ Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Toyota dealer
● Toyota technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with
the latest service information. They are well informed about the operations
of all systems on your vehicle.
● Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has
been performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise
while your vehicle is under warranty, your Toyota dealer will promptly take
care of it.
1
2
3
1
2
3
416
7-2. Maintenance
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
■ If your vehicle is not properly maintained
Improper maintenance could result in serious damage to the vehicle and
possible death or serious injury.
■ Handling of the battery
● Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile
components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a
well ventilated area.
● Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by
component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of Califor-
nia to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid
exposure and wash any affected area immediately.
● Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead
compounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands
after handling. (P. 437)
417
7-2. Maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
General maintenance
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be
performed at the intervals specified in the “Owner’s Warranty
Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement/Sched-
uled Maintenance Guide”. It is recommended that any problem
you notice should be brought to the attention of your Toyota
dealer or qualified service shop for advice.
Engine compartment
Items Check points
Battery
Check the battery fluid level and
connections. (P. 437)
Brake fluid
Is the brake fluid at the correct
level? (P. 435)
Engine coolant
Is the engine coolant at the correct
level? (P. 433)
Engine oil
Is the engine oil at the correct level?
(P. 430)
Exhaust system
There should not be any fumes or
strange sounds.
Radiator/condenser
The radiator and condenser should
be free from foreign objects.
(P. 435)
Washer fluid
Is there sufficient washer fluid?
(P. 439)
418
7-2. Maintenance
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Vehicle interior
Items Check points
Accelerator pedal
• The accelerator pedal should
move smoothly (without uneven
pedal effort or catching).
Continuously variable transmission
“Park” mechanism
• When parked on a slope and the
shift lever is in P, is the vehicle
securely stopped?
Brake pedal
• Does the brake pedal move
smoothly?
• Does the brake pedal have appro-
priate clearance from the floor?
(P. 545)
• Does the brake pedal have the
correct amount of free play?
(P. 545)
Brakes
• The vehicle should not pull to one
side when the brakes are applied.
• The brakes should work effec-
tively.
• The brake pedal should not feel
spongy.
• The brake pedal should not get
too close to the floor when the
brakes are applied.
Clutch pedal
• Does the clutch pedal move
smoothly?
• Does the clutch pedal have appro-
priate clearance from the floor?
• Does the clutch pedal have the
correct amount of free play?
(P. 544)
419
7-2. Maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Head restraints
• Do the head restraints move
smoothly and lock securely?
Indicators/buzzers
• Do the indicators and buzzers
function properly?
Lights • Do all the lights come on?
Parking brake
• Moves smoothly?
• When parked on a slope and the
parking brake is on, is the vehicle
securely stopped?
Seat belts
• Do the seat belts operate
smoothly?
• The seat belts should not be dam-
aged.
Seats
• Do the seat controls operate prop-
erly?
Steering wheel
• Does the steering wheel rotate
smoothly?
• Does the steering wheel have the
correct amount of free play?
• There should not be any strange
sounds coming from the steering
wheel.
Items Check points
420
7-2. Maintenance
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Vehicle exterior
Items Check points
Doors/trunk
• Do the doors/trunk operate
smoothly?
Engine hood
• Does the engine hood lock system
work properly?
Fluid leaks
• There should not be any signs of
fluid leakage after the vehicle has
been parked.
Tires
• Is the tire inflation pressure cor-
rect?
• The tires should not be dam-
aged or excessively worn.
• Have the tires been rotated
according to the maintenance
schedule?
• The wheel nuts should not be
loose.
Windshield wipers
• The wiper blades should not show
any signs of cracking, splitting,
wear, contamination or deforma-
tion.
• The wiper blades should clear the
windshield without streaking or
skipping.
WARNING
■ If the engine is running
Turn the engine off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before per-
forming maintenance checks.
421
7-2. Maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in the
emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test and
may need to be repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer to service the
vehicle.
● When the battery is disconnected or discharged
Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased.
Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may
not be completely set.
● When the fuel tank cap is loose
The malfunction indicator lamp comes on indicating a temporary
malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.
The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the vehi-
cle is driven 40 or more times.
Contact your Toyota dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.
Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M)
programs
Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which
include OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system
monitors the operation of the emission control system.
If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test in the following situations:
When the malfunction indicator lamp still remains on after sev-
eral driving trips
If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test
422
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service precautions
If you perform maintenance by yourself, be sure to follow the
correct procedure as given in these sections.
Items Parts and tools
Battery condition (P. 437)
•Warm water
• Baking soda
• Grease
• Conventional wrench
(for terminal clamp bolts)
Brake fluid level (P. 435)
• FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE
J1703 brake fluid
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding
brake fluid)
Engine coolant level (P. 433)
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
or a similar high quality ethylene
glycol-based non-silicate, non-
amine, non-nitrite and non-borate
coolant with long-life hybrid
organic acid technology
For the U.S.A.:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
is pre-mixed with 50% coolant and
50% deionized water.
For Canada:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
is pre-mixed with 55% coolant and
45% deionized water.
• Funnel (used only for adding
engine coolant)
Engine oil level (P. 430)
• “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or
equivalent
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding
engine oil)
Fuses (P. 458)
• Fuse with same amperage rating
as original
423
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Light bulbs (P. 461)
• Bulb with same number and watt-
age rating as original
• Phillips-head screwdriver
• Flathead screwdriver
• Wrench
Radiator/condenser (P. 435)
Tire inflation pressure (P. 448)
• Tire pressure gauge
• Compressed air source
Washer fluid (P. 439)
• Water or washer fluid containing
antifreeze (for winter use)
• Funnel (used only for adding
water or washer fluid)
WARNING
The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may
move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death
or serious injury, observe the following precautions.
■ When working on the engine compartment
● Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the moving fan and engine
drive belt.
● Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right
after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.
● Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper and rags, in the
engine compartment.
● Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the bat-
tery. Fuel and battery fumes are flammable.
● Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous
and corrosive sulfuric acid.
Items Parts and tools
424
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
■ When working near the electric cooling fan or radiator grille
Vehicles without a smart key system: Be sure the engine switch is off. With
the engine switch in the “ON” position, the electric cooling fan may automat-
ically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature
is high. (P. 435)
Vehicles with a smart key system: Be sure the engine switch is off. With the
engine switch in IGNITION ON mode, the electric cooling fan may automat-
ically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature
is high. (P. 435)
■ Safety glasses
Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc.
from getting in your eyes.
NOTICE
■ If you remove the air cleaner filter
Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear
due to dirt in the air.
425
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Pull the hood lock release lever.
The hood will pop up slightly.
Pull up the auxiliary catch lever
and lift the hood.
Hold the hood open by inserting
the support rod into the slot.
Hood
Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.
1
2
3
426
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
■ Pre-driving check
Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.
If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion
and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.
■ After installing the support rod into the slot
Make sure the rod supports the hood securely preventing it from falling
down onto your head or body.
NOTICE
■ When closing the hood
Be sure to return the support rod to its clip before closing the hood. Closing
the hood with the support rod not clipped could cause the hood to bend.
427
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
◆ Front
◆ Rear
Take out the jack attachment.
Positioning a floor jack
When using a floor jack, follow the instructions in the manual
provided with the jack and perform the operation safely.
When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack cor-
rectly. Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause
injury.
1
428
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Set the jack attachment on
the floor jack and position the
jack.
Before raising the vehicle,
make sure that the floor jack
is positioned so that the pro-
trusion on the jack attach-
ment fits securely into the
hole of the jack point.
2
3
WARNING
Make sure to set the protrusion on the
jack attachment properly into the hole of
the jack point.
Raising the vehicle with an improperly
positioned floor jack will damage the
vehicle and may cause the vehicle to fall
off the floor jack.
429
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Engine compartment
Washer fluid tank (P. 439)
Engine oil filler cap
(P. 431)
Engine oil level dipstick
(P. 430)
Brake fluid reservoir
(P. 435)
Battery (P. 437)
Fuse box (P. 458)
Electric cooling fan
Engine coolant reservoir
(P. 433)
Condenser (P. 435)
Radiator (P. 435)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
430
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil
level on the dipstick.
■ Checking the engine oil
Park the vehicle on level ground. After warming up the engine
and turning it off, wait more than 5 minutes for the oil to drain
back into the bottom of the engine.
Holding a rag under the end,
pull the dipstick out.
Wipe the dipstick clean.
Reinsert the dipstick fully.
Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check the
oil level.
Low
Normal
Excessive
The shape of the dipstick
may differ depending on the
type of vehicle or engine.
Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.
Engine oil
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
6
431
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Adding engine oil
If the oil level is below or near
the low level mark, add engine
oil of the same type as that
already in the engine.
Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed
before adding oil.
Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise.
Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.
Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise.
Engine oil selection P. 541
Oil quantity
(Low Full)
1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp. qt.)
Items Clean funnel
1
2
3
432
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Engine oil consumption
A certain amount of engine oil will be consumed while driving. In the following
situations, oil consumption may increase, and engine oil may need to be
refilled in between oil maintenance intervals.
● When the engine is new, for example directly after purchasing the vehicle or
after replacing the engine
● If low quality oil or oil of an inappropriate viscosity is used
● When driving at high engine speeds or with a heavy load, or when driving
while accelerating or decelerating frequently
● When leaving the engine idling for a long time, or when driving frequently
through heavy traffic
WARNING
■ Used engine oil
● Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may
cause skin disorders such as inflammation and skin cancer, so care
should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used
engine oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.
● Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do
not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the
ground.
Call your Toyota dealer, service station or auto parts store for information
concerning recycling or disposal.
● Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.
NOTICE
■ To prevent serious engine damage
Check the oil level on a regular basis.
■ When replacing the engine oil
● Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.
● Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.
● Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.
● Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.
433
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “F” and “L” lines on
the reservoir when the engine is cold.
Reservoir cap
“F” line
“L” line
If the level is on or below the “L”
line, add coolant up to the “F” line.
(P. 531)
■ Coolant selection
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or a similar high quality ethylene
glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with
long-life hybrid organic acid technology.
For the U.S.A.: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% cool-
ant and 50% deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -31F
[-35C])
For Canada: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% cool-
ant and 45% deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -44F
[-42C])
For more details about engine coolant, contact your Toyota dealer.
■ If the coolant level drops within a short time of replenishing
Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine coolant reservoir caps, drain cock
and water pump.
If you cannot find a leak, have your Toyota dealer test the cap and check for
leaks in the cooling system.
Engine coolant
1
2
3
434
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
■ When the engine is hot
Do not remove the engine coolant reservoir cap or the radiator cap.
(P. 533)
The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the
cap is removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns.
NOTICE
■ When adding coolant
Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of
water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion
protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.
■ If you spill coolant
Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging parts or paint.
435
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Check the radiator and condenser and clear away any foreign objects.
If either of the above parts is extremely dirty or you are not sure of
their condition, have your vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
■ Checking fluid level
The brake fluid level should be
between the “MAX” and “MIN”
lines on the tank.
■ Adding fluid
Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary item.
Slide and lift up the rubber
strip to partially remove it as
shown.
Radiator and condenser
WARNING
■ When the engine is hot
Do not touch the radiator or condenser as they may be hot and cause seri-
ous injuries, such as burns.
Brake fluid
Fluid type FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid
Item Clean funnel
1
436
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Disconnect the claws and
remove the service cover.
Remove the reservoir cap.
Add brake fluid slowly while checking the fluid level.
■ Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air
Excess moisture in the brake fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking effi-
ciency. Use only newly opened brake fluid.
2
3
WARNING
■ When filling the reservoir
Take care as brake fluid can harm your hands and eyes and damage
painted surfaces.
If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean
water immediately.
If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.
NOTICE
■ If the fluid level is low or high
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads
wear out or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.
However, if the reservoir needs frequent refilling, there may be a serious
problem. Have the vehicle inspected at your Toyota dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
4
437
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Check the battery as follows.
■ Battery exterior
Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that
there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.
Terminals
Hold-down clamp
■ Before recharging
When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Therefore, observe the following before recharging:
● If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect
the ground cable.
● Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and dis-
connecting the charger cables to the battery.
■ After recharging/reconnecting the battery (vehicles with a smart key sys-
tem)
● Unlocking the doors using the smart key system may not be possible imme-
diately after reconnecting the battery. If this happens, use the wireless
remote control or the mechanical key to lock/unlock the doors.
● Start the engine with the engine switch in ACCESSORY mode. The engine
may not start with the engine switch turned off. However, the engine will
operate normally from the second attempt.
● The engine switch mode is recorded by the vehicle. If the battery is recon-
nected, the vehicle will return the engine switch mode to the status it was in
before the battery was disconnected. Make sure to turn off the engine
before disconnect the battery. Take extra care when connecting the battery
if the engine switch mode prior to discharge is unknown.
If the system will not start even after multiple attempts, contact your Toyota
dealer.
Battery
1
2
438
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
■ Chemicals in the battery
Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce
hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death
or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near the
battery:
● Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools.
● Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.
● Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.
● Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
● Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.
● Keep children away from the battery.
■ Where to safely charge the battery
Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a
garage or closed room where there is insufficient ventilation.
■ How to recharge the battery
Only perform a slow charge (5 A or less). The battery may explode if
charged at a quicker rate.
■ Emergency measures regarding electrolyte
● If electrolyte gets in your eyes
Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immedi-
ate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or
cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility.
● If electrolyte gets on your skin
Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical
attention immediately.
● If electrolyte gets on your clothes
It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the cloth-
ing and follow the procedure above if necessary.
● If you accidentally swallow electrolyte
Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention
immediately.
NOTICE
■ When recharging the battery
Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all
accessories are turned off.
439
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Add washer fluid in the following
situations:
● A washer does not work.
● The warning message (if
equipped) appears on the multi-
information display. (P. 497)
Washer fluid
WARNING
■ When adding washer fluid
Do not add washer fluid when the engine is hot or running as washer fluid
contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc.
NOTICE
■ Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid
Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.
Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces, as well as
damaging the pump leading to problems of the washer fluid not spraying.
■ Diluting washer fluid
Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.
Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bot-
tle.
440
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Check if the treadwear indicators are showing on the tires. Also check
the tires for uneven wear, such as excessive wear on one side of the
tread.
Check the spare tire condition and pressure if not rotated.
New tread
Worn tread
Treadwear indicator
The location of treadwear indicators is shown by a “TWI” or “” mark,
etc., molded into the sidewall of each tire.
Replace the tires if the treadwear indicators are showing on a tire.
Rotate the tires in the order
shown.
To equalize tire wear and extend
tire life, Toyota recommends that
tire rotation is carried out at the
same interval as tire inspection.
Tires
Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance sched-
ules and treadwear.
Checking tires
Tire rotation
1
2
3
Front
441
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses
tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire infla-
tion pressure before serious problems arise. (P. 480)
◆ Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters must also be installed.
When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are
installed, new ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure
warning computer and the tire pressure warning system must be
initialized. Have tire pressure warning valves and transmitter ID
codes registered by your Toyota dealer. (P. 443)
◆ Initializing the tire pressure warning system
■ The tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the fol-
lowing circumstances:
● When changing the tire size.
● When the tire inflation pressure is changed such as when chang-
ing traveling speed or load weight.
When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire
inflation pressure is set as the benchmark pressure.
Tire pressure warning system (if equipped)
442
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
How to initialize the tire pressure warning system
Park the vehicle in a safe place and turn the engine switch off.
Initialization cannot be performed while the vehicle is moving.
Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation
pressure level. (P. 546)
Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire infla-
tion pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will operate
based on this pressure level.
Turn the engine switch to the “ON” position (vehicles without a
smart key system) or IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with a smart
key system).
Open the glove box. Press
and hold the tire pressure
warning reset switch until the
tire pressure warning light
blinks slowly 3 times.
Vehicles without a smart key system: Wait for a few minutes with
the engine switch in the “ON” position and then turn the engine
switch to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.
Vehicles with a smart key system: Wait for a few minutes with the
engine switch in IGNITION ON mode and then turn the engine
switch off.
1
2
3
4
5
443
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
◆ Registering ID codes
The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is equipped with a
unique ID code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code. Have the ID code
registered by your Toyota dealer.
■ When to replace your vehicle’s tires
Tires should be replaced if:
● The treadwear indicators are showing on a tire.
● You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to
expose the fabric, and bulges indicating internal damage
● A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size
or location of a cut or other damage
If you are not sure, consult with your Toyota dealer.
■ Replacing tires and wheels (vehicles with a tire pressure warning
system)
If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not reg-
istered, the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After driv-
ing for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1
minute and stays on to indicate a system malfunction.
■ Tire life
Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even
if it has seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.
■ Routine tire inflation pressure checks (vehicles with a tire pressure
warning system)
The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation
pressure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of
your routine of daily vehicle checks.
■ Low profile tires (17-inch tires)
Generally, low profile tires will wear more rapidly and tire grip perfor-
mance will be reduced on snowy and/or icy roads when compared to
standard tires. Be sure to use snow tires or tire chains on snowy and/or
icy roads and drive carefully at a speed appropriate for road and weather
conditions.
444
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Maximum load of tire
Check that the maximum load of the replacement tire is greater than 1/2
of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the
rear axle, whichever is greater.
■ Tire types
● Summer tires
Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway
driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same
traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for
driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered
roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended. When install-
ing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.
● All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to
be adequate for driving in most winter conditions as well as for use
year-round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction
performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all
season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance com-
pared with summer tires in highway driving.
● Snow tires
For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using
snow tires. If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, con-
struction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your
vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow
tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without
first checking local regulations for possible restrictions. Snow tires
should be installed on all wheels. (P. 263)
■ Initializing the tire pressure warning system (vehicles with a tire
pressure warning system)
Initialize the system with the tire inflation pressure adjusted to the speci-
fied level.
■ If the tread on snow tires wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm)
The effectiveness of the tires as snow tires is lost.
For the GAWR, see the Certification
Label. For the maximum load of the tire,
see the load limit at maximum cold tire
inflation pressure mentioned on the
sidewall of the tire. (P. 5 5 1 )
445
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
If you press the tire pressure warning reset switch accidentally (vehi-
cles with a tire pressure warning system)
If initialization is performed, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the speci-
fied level and initialize the tire pressure warning system again.
■ When initialization of the tire pressure warning system has failed
(vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)
Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the following
cases, the settings have not been recorded and the system will not oper-
ate properly. If repeated attempts to record tire inflation pressure settings
are unsuccessful, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
● When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pressure
warning light does not blink 3 times.
● After driving for a certain period of time since the initialization has been
completed, the warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute.
■ Tire pressure warning system certification
For the U.S.A.
FCC ID: HYQ23AAK FCC ID: PAXPMVC010
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsi-
ble for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equip-
ment.
For Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may
not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
NOTE:
L’utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée seulement aux deux conditions
suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur du
dispositif doit être prêt à accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique reçu,
même si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionne-
ment du dispositif.
446
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
■ When inspecting or replacing tires
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.
Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train as well as
dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.
● Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns.
Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear.
● Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Toyota.
● Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply
tires).
● Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires.
● Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle.
Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously.
■ When initializing the tire pressure warning system (vehicles with a
tire pressure warning system)
Do not operate the tire pressure warning reset switch without first
adjusting the tire inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the
tire pressure warning light may not come on even if the tire inflation
pressure is low, or it may come on when the tire inflation pressure is
actually normal.
447
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
NOTICE
■ Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves,
transmitters and tire valve caps (vehicles with a tire pressure warn-
ing system)
● When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pres-
sure warning valves and transmitters may be damaged if not handled
correctly.
● When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than
those specified. The cap may become stuck.
■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmit-
ters (vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is
used, contact your Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop as soon
as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter when replacing the tire. (P. 4 4 1 )
■ Driving on rough roads
Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or pot-
holes.
These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing
the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition, driving on rough roads
may cause damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s
wheels and body.
■ Low profile tires (17-inch tires)
Low profile tires may cause greater damage than usual to the tire wheel
when sustaining impact from the road surface. Therefore, pay attention
to the following:
● Be sure to use proper tire inflation pressure. If tires are under-inflated,
they may be damaged more severely.
● Avoid potholes, uneven pavement, curbs and other road hazards. Fail-
ure to do so may lead to severe tire and wheel damage.
■ If tire inflation pressure of each tire becomes low while driving
Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.
449
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Tire valve
Tire pressure gauge
Remove the tire valve cap.
Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.
Read the pressure using the gauge gradations.
If the tire inflation pressure is not at the recommended level, adjust
the pressure.
If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to deflate.
After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and
adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage.
Put the tire valve cap back on.
■ Tire inflation pressure check interval
You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once
a month.
Do not forget to check the spare.
■ Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure
Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:
● Reduced fuel economy
● Reduced driving comfort and poor handling
● Reduced tire life due to wear
● Reduced safety
● Damage to the drive train
If a tire needs frequent inflating, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.
Inspection and adjustment procedure
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
450
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure
When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:
● Check only when the tires are cold.
If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or has not been
driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire
inflation pressure reading.
● Always use a tire pressure gauge.
It is difficult to judge if a tire is properly inflated based only on its appear-
ance.
● It is normal for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving as
heat is generated in the tire. Do not reduce tire inflation pressure after
driving.
● Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.
Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is
balanced.
WARNING
■ Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance
Keep your tires properly inflated.
If the tires are not properly inflated, the following conditions may occur
which could lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury:
● Excessive wear
● Uneven wear
● Poor handling
● Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires
● Air leaking from between tire and wheel
● Wheel deformation and/or tire damage
● Greater possibility of tire damage while driving (due to road hazards,
expansion joints, sharp edges in the road, etc.)
NOTICE
■ When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure
Be sure to put the tire valve caps back on.
If a valve cap is not installed, dirt or moisture may get into the valve and
cause an air leak, resulting in decreased tire inflation pressure.
451
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are
equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width and
inset
*.
Replacement wheels are available at your Toyota dealer.
*: Conventionally referred to as “offset”.
Toyota does not recommend using the following:
● Wheels of different sizes or types
● Used wheels
● Bent wheels that have been straightened
● Use only Toyota wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use with
your aluminum wheels.
● When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the
wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).
● Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire
chains.
● Use only Toyota genuine balance weights or equivalent and a plas-
tic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.
■ When replacing wheels (vehicles with a tire pressure warning sys-
tem)
The wheels of your vehicle are equipped with tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to
provide advance warning in the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure.
Whenever wheels are replaced, tire pressure warning valves and trans-
mitters must be installed. (P. 441)
Wheels
If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be
replaced. Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or
cause a loss of handling control.
Wheel selection
Aluminum wheel precautions (if equipped)
452
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
■ When replacing wheels
● Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in
the Owner’s Manual, as this may result in a loss of handling control.
● Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a
tubeless tire. Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or seri-
ous injury.
■ When installing the wheel nuts
● Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened,
leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can
cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing an
accident and resulting in death or serious injury. Remove any oil or
grease from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
■ Use of defective wheels prohibited
Do not use cracked or deformed wheels.
Doing so could cause the tire to leak air during driving, possibly causing
an accident.
NOTICE
■ Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters (vehicles
with a tire pressure warning system)
● Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warn-
ing valves and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your
Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to
purchase your tire pressure warning valves and transmitters at your
Toyota dealer.
● Ensure that only genuine Toyota wheels are used on your vehicle.
Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly
with non-genuine wheels.
● Be sure to install the wheel nuts with
the tapered ends facing inward.
Installing the nuts with the tapered
ends facing outward can cause the
wheel to break and eventually cause
the wheel to come off while driving,
which could lead to an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.
Tapered
portion
453
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Turn the engine switch off.
Open the glove box. Slide off
the damper.
Push in the glove box on the
vehicle’s outer side to discon-
nect the claws. Then pull out
the glove box and disconnect
the lower claws.
Remove the filter cover.
Air conditioning filter
The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain
air conditioning efficiency.
Removal method
1
2
3
4
454
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Replacement method
Remove the air conditioning fil-
ter and replace it with a new
one.
The “UP” marks shown on the
filter should be pointing up.
■ Checking interval
Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance
schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement
may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the
“Schedule maintenance guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.)
■ If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically
The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.
NOTICE
■ When using the air conditioning system
Make sure that a filter is always installed.
Using the air conditioning system without a filter may cause damage to the
system.
455
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
● Flathead screwdriver
● Small flathead screwdriver
● Lithium battery CR2016 (vehicles without a smart key system), or
CR2032 (vehicles with a smart key system)
Vehicles without a smart key system
Remove the cover.
To prevent damage to the key,
cover the tip of the screwdriver with
a rag.
To prevent the buttons from being
disassembled, face the button sur-
face downward.
Remove the module.
Wireless remote control/electronic key
battery
: If equipped
Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted.
You will need the following items:
Replacing the battery
1
2
456
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Open the case cover using a
coin protected with tape etc.
and remove the depleted bat-
tery using a small flathead
screwdriver.
Insert a new battery with the “+”
terminal facing up.
Vehicles with a smart key system
Take out the mechanical key.
Remove the cover.
To prevent damage to the key,
cover the tip of the screwdriver with
a rag.
Remove the depleted battery.
Insert a new battery with the “+”
terminal facing up.
3
1
2
3
457
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Use a CR2016 (vehicles without a smart key system) or CR2032 (vehicles
with a smart key system) lithium battery
● Batteries can be purchased at your Toyota dealer, local electrical appliance
shops or camera stores.
● Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manu-
facturer.
● Dispose of used batteries according to local laws.
■ If the key battery is depleted
The following symptoms may occur:
● The smart key system (if equipped) and wireless remote control will not
function properly.
● The operational range will be reduced.
WARNING
■ Removed battery and other parts
These parts are small and if swallowed by a child, they can cause choking.
Keep away from children. Failure to do so could result in death or serious
injury.
NOTICE
■ For normal operation after replacing the battery
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents:
● Always work with dry hands.
Moisture may cause the battery to rust.
● Do not touch or move any other component inside the remote control.
● Do not bend either of the battery terminals.
458
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Turn the engine switch off.
Open the fuse box cover.
Engine compartment
Push the tab in and lift the lid
off.
Under the driver’s side instrument panel
Remove the lid.
Remove the fuse with the pull-
out tool.
Only type A fuses can be removed
using the pullout tool.
Checking and replacing fuses
If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may
have blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as nec-
essary.
1
2
3
459
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Check if the fuse is blown.
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace the blown fuse with a new fuse of an appropriate amperage rat-
ing. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.
4
1
2
Type A Type B
Type C
460
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ After a fuse is replaced
● If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may
need replacement. (P. 461)
● If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
■ If there is an overload in a circuit
The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage.
WARNING
■ To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause damage to the vehicle, and possibly a fire or
injury.
● Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than that indicated, or use
any other object in place of a fuse.
● Always use a genuine Toyota fuse or equivalent.
Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.
● Do not modify the fuses or fuse boxes.
NOTICE
■ Before replacing fuses
Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your
Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
461
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Check the wattage of the light bulb to be replaced. (P. 547)
■ Front
Light bulbs
You may replace the following bulbs yourself. The difficulty level
of replacement varies depending on the bulb. If necessary bulb
replacement seems difficult to perform, contact your Toyota
dealer.
For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact
your Toyota dealer.
Preparing for light bulb replacement
Bulb locations
Front turn signal/parking lights
Front side marker lights
1
2
462
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Rear
Back-up lights (bulb type)
Rear turn signal lights
Stop/tail/rear side marker lights
License plate lights
1
2
3
4
463
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Front side marker lights
Turn the bulb base counter-
clockwise.
Remove the light bulb.
When installing, reverse the steps listed.
Replacing light bulbs
1
2
3
464
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Front turn signal/parking lights
Turn the bulb base counter-
clockwise.
Remove the light bulb.
When installing, reverse the steps listed.
1
2
3
465
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Stop/tail/rear side marker lights and rear turn signal lights
Open the trunk lid and
remove the clips.
To prevent damage to the vehi-
cle, cover the tip of the screw-
driver with a rag.
Partly remove the luggage
trim cover.
Turn the bulb base counter-
clockwise.
Rear turn signal light
Stop/tail/rear side marker
light
Remove the light bulb.
Rear turn signal light
Stop/tail/rear side marker
light
When installing, reverse the steps listed.
1
2
3
1
2
4
1
2
5
466
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Back-up lights (bulb type)
Open the trunk lid and
remove the cover.
Turn the bulb base counter-
clockwise.
Remove the light bulb.
When installing, reverse the steps listed.
1
2
3
4
467
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
7
Maintenance and care
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
License plate lights
Open the trunk lid and
remove the trunk panel cover
clips.
To prevent damage to the vehi-
cle, cover the tip of the screw-
driver with a rag.
Partly remove the trunk panel
cover and turn the bulb base
counterclockwise.
Remove the light bulb.
When installing, reverse the steps listed.
1
2
3
4
468
7-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Replacing the following bulbs
If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by
your Toyota dealer.
● Headlights/daytime running lights (if equipped)
● Daytime running lights (if equipped)
● High mounted stoplight
● Side turn signal lights (if equipped)
● Back-up lights (LED type)
■ LED light bulbs
The headlights, daytime running lights, high mounted stoplight, and
back-up
lights (LED type) consist of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burns out,
take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer to have the light replaced.
■ Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens
Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not
indicate a malfunction.
Contact your Toyota dealer for more information in the following situations:
● Large drops of water have built up on the inside of the lens.
● Water has built up inside the headlight.
WARNING
■ Replacing light bulbs
● Turn off the lights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after
turning off the lights.
The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.
● Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. When it is
unavoidable to hold the glass portion, use and hold with a clean dry cloth
to avoid getting moisture and oils on the bulb.
Also, if the bulb is scratched or dropped, it may blow out or crack.
● Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failure to do so
may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This
may damage the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.
■ To prevent damage or fire
Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.
469
8
When trouble arises
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
8-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers .......... 470
If your vehicle has to
be stopped in an
emergency ...................... 471
8-2. Steps to take in an
emergency
If your vehicle needs to
be towed ......................... 473
If you think something
is wrong .......................... 478
Fuel pump shut off
system ............................ 479
If a warning light turns
on or a warning
buzzer sounds ................ 480
If a warning message or
indicator is displayed ...... 489
If you have a flat tire.......... 509
If the engine will
not start........................... 521
If the electronic key does
not operate properly........ 523
If the vehicle battery is
discharged ...................... 526
If your vehicle overheats ... 531
If the vehicle becomes
stuck ............................... 534
470
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
8-1. Essential information
Press the switch.
All the turn signal lights will flash.
To turn them off, press the switch
once again.
■ Emergency flashers
If the emergency flashers are used for a long time while the engine is not
operating, the battery may discharge.
Emergency flashers
The emergency flashers are used to warn other drivers when the
vehicle has to be stopped in the road due to a breakdown, etc.
471
8-1. Essential information
8
When trouble arises
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly depress it.
Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the effort
required to slow the vehicle.
Shift the shift lever to N.
If the shift lever is shifted to N
After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
Stop the engine.
If the shift lever cannot be shifted to N
Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce vehicle
speed as much as possible.
Vehicles without a smart key
system: Stop the engine by
turning the engine switch to the
“ACC” position.
Vehicles with a smart key sys-
tem: To stop the engine, press
and hold the engine switch for 2
consecutive seconds or more,
or press it briefly 3 times or
more in succession.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
If your vehicle has to be stopped in an
emergency
Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop
the vehicle in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the follow-
ing procedure:
1
2
3
4
3
4
Press and hold for 2 seconds or
more, or press briefly 3 times or more
4
5
472
8-1. Essential information
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
■ If the engine has to be turned off while driving
● Power assist for the brakes and steering wheel will be lost, making the
brake pedal harder to depress and the steering wheel heavier to turn.
Decelerate as much as possible before turning off the engine.
● Vehicles without a smart key system: Never attempt to remove the key, as
doing so will lock the steering wheel.
473
8
When trouble arises
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact
your Toyota dealer or commercial towing service before towing.
● The engine is running but the vehicle does not move.
● The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.
Do not tow with a sling-type truck
to prevent body damage.
If your vehicle needs to be towed
If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle
towed by your Toyota dealer or commercial towing service,
using a wheel-lift type truck or flatbed truck.
Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/
provincial and local laws.
Situations when it is necessary to contact dealers before towing
Towing with a sling-type truck
474
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
If your vehicle is transported by a
flatbed truck, it should be tied
down at the locations shown in the
illustration.
If you use chains or cables to tie
down your vehicle, the angles
shaded in black must be 45.
Do not overly tighten the tie
downs or the vehicle may be dam-
aged.
Towing with a wheel-lift type truck
From the front From the rear
Release the parking brake. Use a towing dolly under the
front wheels.
Using a flatbed truck
475
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
If a tow truck is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be
temporarily towed using cables or chains secured to the emergency
towing eyelet. This should only be attempted on hard surfaced roads
for at most 50 miles (80 km) at under 18 mph (30 km/h).
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The
vehicle’s wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in
good condition.
Securely attach cables or
chains to the towing eyelet.
Take care not to damage the vehi-
cle body.
Vehicles without a smart key system: Enter the vehicle being towed
and start the engine.
If the engine does not start, turn the engine switch to the “ON” posi-
tion.
Vehicles with a smart key system: Enter the vehicle being towed
and start the engine.
If the engine does not start, turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON
mode.
Shift the shift lever to N and release the parking brake.
Vehicles with a continuously variable transmission: When the shift
lever cannot be shifted: P. 183, 188
■ While towing
If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will
not function, making steering and braking more difficult.
■ Wheel nut wrench
Wheel nut wrench is stored in the trunk. (P. 509)
Emergency towing
Emergency towing procedure
1
2
3
476
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ When towing the vehicle
■ While towing
● When towing using cables or chains, avoid sudden starts, etc. which place
excessive stress on the towing eyelet, cables or chains. The towing eyelet,
cables or chains may become damaged, broken debris may hit people,
and cause serious damage.
● Vehicles without a smart key system: Do not turn the engine switch to the
“LOCK” position.
There is a possibility that the steering wheel is locked and cannot be oper-
ated.
● Vehicles with a smart key system: Do not turn the engine switch off.
There is a possibility that the steering wheel is locked and cannot be oper-
ated.
Be sure to transport the vehicle with the
front wheels raised or with all four wheels
raised off the ground. If the vehicle is
towed with the front wheels contacting
the ground, the drivetrain and related
parts may be damaged.
477
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing using a wheel-lift type
truck
● Vehicles without a smart key system: Do not tow the vehicle from the rear
when the engine switch is in the “LOCK” position or the key is removed.
The steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheels
straight.
● Vehicles with a smart key system: Do not tow the vehicle from the rear
when the engine switch is off. The steering lock mechanism is not strong
enough to hold the front wheels straight.
● When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at
the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the
vehicle could be damaged while being towed.
■ To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing with a sling-type truck
Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.
■ To prevent damage to the vehicle during emergency towing
Do not secure cables or chains to the suspension components.
478
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
● Fluid leaks under the vehicle.
(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)
● Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear
● Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points higher
than normal.
● Changes in exhaust sound
● Excessive tire squeal when cornering
● Strange noises related to the suspension system
● Pinging or other noises related to the engine
● Engine missing, stumbling or running roughly
● Appreciable loss of power
● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking
● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road
● Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches
the floor
If you think something is wrong
If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle proba-
bly needs adjustment or repair. Contact your Toyota dealer as
soon as possible.
Visible symptoms
Audible symptoms
Operational symptoms
479
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is
activated.
Vehicles without a smart key system
Turn the engine switch to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.
Restart the engine.
Vehicles with a smart key system
Turn the engine switch to ACCESSORY mode or turn it off.
Restart the engine.
Fuel pump shut off system
To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or
when an airbag inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off
system stops the supply of fuel to the engine.
NOTICE
■ Before starting the engine
Inspect the ground under the vehicle.
If you find that fuel has leaked onto the ground, the fuel system has been
damaged and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine.
1
2
1
2
480
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
If a warning light turns on or a warning
buzzer sounds
Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights
comes on or flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but then
goes off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the
system. However, if this continues to occur, have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer.
Warning light and warning buzzer list
Warning light Warning light/Details/Actions
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)*
1
Indicates that:
• The brake fluid level is low; or
• The brake system is malfunctioning
This light also comes on when the parking brake is not
released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is
fully released the system is operating normally.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and con-
tact your Toyota dealer. Continuing to drive the vehi-
cle may be dangerous.
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Malfunction indicator lamp
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The electronic engine control system;
• The electronic throttle control system; or
• The electronic continuously variable transmission con-
trol system.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
SRS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The SRS airbag system;
• The front passenger occupant classification system; or
• The seat belt pretensioner system
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
481
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
ABS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The ABS; or
• The brake assist system
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
Electric power steering system warning light (warning
buzzer)
Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steer-
ing) system
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
(Comes on)
Slip indicator
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The VSC (Vehicle Stability Control) system;
• The TRAC (Traction Control) system; or
• The hill-start assist control system
The light will flash when the VSC or the TRAC
system is
operating.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
Low fuel level warning light
Indicates that remaining fuel is approximately 2.0 gal. (7.5
L, 1.7 Imp. gal.) or less
Refuel the vehicle.
Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
(warning buzzer)
*
2
Warns the driver and/or front passenger to fasten their
seat belts
Fasten the seat belt.
If the front passenger’s seat is occupied, the front
passenger’s seat belt also needs to be fastened to
make the warning light (warning buzzer) turn off.
Rear passengers’ seat belt reminder lights (warning
buzzer)
*
2
Warns the rear passengers to fasten their seat belts.
Fasten the seat belt.
Master warning light
A buzzer sounds and the warning light comes on and
flashes to indicate that the master warning system has
detected a malfunction.
P. 489
Warning light Warning light/Details/Actions
482
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
(Flashes or illumi-
nates)
PCS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the PCS (Pre-Collision System)
or that the system is temporarily unavailable due to the
vehicle being extremely hot/cold, or dirt around a front
sensor, etc. (P. 225, 489)
Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display. (P. 225, 489)
If the PCS (Pre-Collision System) or VSC (Vehicle Stability
Control) system is disabled, the PCS warning light will illu-
minate.
P. 225
(Orange)
LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control) indica-
tor
The warning light comes on and a warning message is
displayed to indicate that the LDA (Lane Departure Alert
with steering control) system is not available temporarily
or has detected a malfunction.
P. 491, 492
Tire pressure warning light*
3
When the light comes on:
Low tire inflation pressure such as
• Natural causes (P. 48 4 )
• Flat tire (P. 509)
Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified
level.
The light will turn off after a few minutes. In case
the light does not turn off even if the tire inflation
pressure is adjusted, have the system checked by
your Toyota dealer.
When the light comes on after blinking for 1 minute:
Malfunction in the tire pressure warning system
Have the system checked by your Toyota dealer.
Warning light Warning light/Details/Actions
483
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
*
1
: Parking brake engaged warning buzzer:
P. 490
*
2
: Driver’s seat belt buzzer:
Vehicles without a smart key system: The driver’s seat belt buzzer sounds
to alert the driver that his or her seat belt is not fastened. Once the engine
switch is turned to the “ON” position, the buzzer sounds for 6 seconds. If
the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h), the buzzer sounds once.
If the seat belt is still unfastened after 24 seconds, the buzzer will sound
intermittently for 6 seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the
buzzer will sound in a different tone for 90 more seconds.
Vehicles with a smart key system: The driver’s seat belt buzzer sounds to
alert the driver that his or her seat belt is not fastened. Once the engine
switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode, the buzzer sounds for 6 seconds.
If the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h), the buzzer sounds
once. If the seat belt is still unfastened after 24 seconds, the buzzer will
sound intermittently for 6 seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened,
the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 90 more seconds.
Front passenger’s seat belt buzzer:
The front passenger’s seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the front passenger
that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds once if the
vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h). If the seat belt is still unfas-
tened after 24 seconds, the buzzer will sound intermittently for 6 seconds.
Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different
tone for 90 more seconds.
Rear passenger’s seat belt buzzer:
The rear passenger’s seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the rear passengers
that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds for 6 seconds
after the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h). Then, if the seat
belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 24 more
seconds.
*
3
: If equipped
484
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ SRS warning light
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front impact
sensors, side impact sensors (front door), side impact sensors (front), side
impact sensors (rear), driver’s seat belt buckle switch, front passenger occu-
pant classification system, “AIR BAG ON” indicator light, “AIR BAG OFF” indi-
cator light, front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch, seat belt pretensioners
(front), airbags, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (P. 36)
■ Front passenger detection sensor, seat belt reminder and warning
buzzer
If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger detec-
tion sensor may cause the warning light to flash and the warning buzzer to
sound even if a passenger is not sitting in the seat.
■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving
First check the following:
● Is the fuel tank empty?
If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.
● Is the fuel tank cap loose?
If it is, tighten it securely.
The light will go off after several driving trips.
If the light does not go off even after several trips, contact your Toyota dealer
as soon as possible.
■
When the tire pressure warning light comes on (vehicles with a tire
pressure warning system)
Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level. Push-
ing the tire pressure warning reset switch will not turn off the tire pressure
warning light.
■ The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes
(vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)
The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes such
as natural air leaks and tire inflation pressure changes caused by tem-
perature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the
warning light (after a few minutes).
485
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
When a tire is replaced with a spare tire (vehicles with a tire pressure
warning system)
The compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning valve
and transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will not
turn off even though the flat tire has been replaced with the spare tire.
Replace the spare tire with the repaired tire and adjust the tire inflation
pressure. The tire pressure warning light will go off after a few minutes.
■ Conditions that the tire pressure warning system may not function
properly (vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)
The tire pressure warning system will be disabled in the following condi-
tions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
● If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
are used
● If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is not
registered in the tire pressure warning computer
● If the tire inflation pressure is 73 psi (500 kPa, 5.1 kgf/cm
2
or bar) or
higher
The tire pressure warning system may be disabled in the following condi-
tions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
● If electronic devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies are
nearby
● If a radio set at similar frequency is in use in the vehicle
● If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed
● If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, in particular around the
wheels or wheel housings
● If non-genuine Toyota wheels are used (Even if you use Toyota wheels,
the tire pressure warning system may not work properly with some types
of tires.)
● If tire chains are used
■ If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking
for 1 minute (vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)
If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1
minute when the engine switch is turned on, have it checked by your
Toyota dealer.
■ Warning buzzer
In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard because of noisy place or an
audio sound.
■ Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer)
When the battery charge becomes insufficient or the voltage temporarily
drops, the electric power steering system warning light may come on and the
warning buzzer may sound.
486
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
■ If both the ABS and the brake system warning lights remain on
Stop your vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact your Toyota
dealer. The vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking, and the
ABS system may fail, which could cause an accident resulting in death or
serious injury.
■ When the electric power steering system warning light comes on
The steering wheel may become extremely heavy.
When steering wheel operations are heavier than usual, grip the steering
wheel firmly and operate it using more force than usual.
■
If the tire pressure warning light comes on (vehicles with a tire
pressure warning system)
Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could
cause a loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.
● Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire
inflation pressure immediately.
● If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pres-
sure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires.
If a tire is flat, change it with the spare tire and have the flat tire
repaired by the nearest Toyota dealer.
● Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate,
you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.
■ If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur (vehicles with a tire
pressure warning system)
The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.
487
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
■ Maintenance of the tires
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the
vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label (tire and load information label). (If your vehicle has tires of a dif-
ferent size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label [tire and load information label], you should determine
the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a sub-
stitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached
the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire
pressure warning light).
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warn-
ing system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunc-
tion indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure
warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illumi-
nated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illu-
minated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pres-
sure as intended.
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a vari-
ety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires
or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning
system) from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pres-
sure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alter-
nate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to
continue to function properly.
488
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
NOTICE
■ To ensure the tire pressure warning system operates properly
(vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)
Do not install tires with different specifications or makers, as the tire
pressure warning system may not operate properly.
489
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Master warning light
The master warning light also
comes on or flashes in order to
indicate that a message is cur-
rently being displayed on the multi-
information display.
Multi-information display
If any of the warning message or indicator comes on again after the
following actions have been performed, contact your Toyota dealer.
If a warning message or indicator is displayed
If a warning is shown on the multi-information display, stay calm
and perform the following actions:
1
2
Warning message and warning buzzer list
Warning message Details/Actions
Indicates that:
• There is a high possibility of a frontal colli-
sion; or
• The pre-collision braking function is operating
A buzzer also sounds.
Slow the vehicle by applying the brakes.
Monochrome display
Color display
Indicates that your vehicle is nearing the vehicle
ahead (in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode)
A buzzer also sounds.
Slow the vehicle by applying the brakes.
490
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Monochrome display
Color display
Indicates that one or more of the doors is not fully
closed.
The system also indicates which doors are not
fully closed.
If the vehicle reaches a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h),
flashes and a buzzer sounds to indicate
that the door(s) are not yet fully closed.
Make sure that all the doors are closed.
Monochrome display
Color display
Indicates that the trunk is not fully closed.
If the vehicle reaches a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h),
flashes and a buzzer sounds to indicate
that the trunk is not yet fully closed.
Close the trunk.
Indicates that the vehicle is being driven at 3 mph
(5 km/h) or more with the parking brake still
engaged.
A buzzer also sounds.
Release the parking brake.
Warning message Details/Actions
(U.S.A.) (Canada) (Flashes)
491
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Monochrome display
Color display
Indicates that the vehicle has deviated from the
lane (while the LDA [Lane Departure Alert with
steering control] system is operating)
• Vehicles with a monochrome display: The
lane line on the side the vehicle has deviated
from flashes.
• Vehicles with a color display: The lane line on
the side the vehicle has deviated from
flashes in amber.
• A buzzer also sounds.
Check around the vehicle and back to
inside of the lane lines.
Indicates that the LDA (Lane Departure Alert with
steering control) system has determined that the
driver does not have their hands on the steering
wheel while the steering control function is on
If the system continues to determine that the
driver does not have his hands on the steering
wheel, a buzzer will sound.
Firmly hold the steering wheel.
Indicates a malfunction in the LDA (Lane Depar-
ture Alert with steering control) system
A buzzer also sounds.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
Warning message Details/Actions
(Orange)
(Flashes)
(Orange)
492
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Indicates that the LDA (Lane Departure Alert with
steering control) and pre-collision system are
temporarily canceled due to high temperatures
around the camera sensor
Turn the LDA (Lane Departure Alert with
steering control) system off, wait for the
area around the camera sensor to cool, and
then turn the LDA (Lane Departure Alert
with steering control) system back on.
The LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering con-
trol) system is temporarily canceled due to a mal-
function in a sensor other than the camera
sensor.
A buzzer also sounds.
Turn the LDA (Lane Departure Alert with
steering control) system off and follow the
appropriate troubleshooting procedures
for warning message. Afterward, drive the
vehicle for a short time, and then turn the
LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering
control) system back on.
Indicates that the LDA (Lane Departure Alert with
steering control) and pre-collision system are
temporarily canceled because dirt, rain, conden-
sation, ice, snow, etc., are present on the wind-
shield in front of the camera sensor
Turn the LDA (Lane Departure Alert with
steering control) system off, remove any
dirt, rain, condensation, ice, snow, etc.,
from the windshield, and then turn the LDA
(Lane Departure Alert with steering control)
system back on.
Indicates that the LDA (Lane Departure Alert with
steering control) system cannot be used because
the vehicle speed is lower than approximately 32
mph (50 km/h)
Drive the vehicle at 32 mph (50 km/h) or
higher.
Warning message Details/Actions
(Flashes) (Orange)
(Orange)
(Flashes) (Orange)
493
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Indicates that LDA (Lane Departure Alert with
steering control) cannot be used due to the vehi-
cle speed being too high
Slow down.
Monochrome display
Color display
Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging
system.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place
and contact your Toyota dealer. Continuing
to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.
Monochrome display
Color display
Indicates a malfunction in the smart key system
(if equipped).
A buzzer also sounds.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
Warning message Details/Actions
(Flashes)
494
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Indicates that the radar sensor is dirty or covered
with ice
A buzzer also sounds.
Clean the sensor.
Indicates that the dynamic radar cruise control
system cannot be used temporarily due to bad
weather
A buzzer also sounds.
Use the dynamic radar cruise control sys-
tem when it becomes available again.
Indicates that the dynamic radar cruise control
system brake control function is temporarily
unavailable
A buzzer also sounds.
Depress the brake.
Monochrome display
Color display
Indicates a malfunction in the dynamic radar
cruise control system.
• Press the “ON-OFF” button once to deacti-
vate the system, and then press the button
again to reactivate the system.
• A buzzer also sounds.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
Warning message Details/Actions
495
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Indicates a malfunction in the dynamic radar
cruise control
• Depress the brake pedal.
• A buzzer also sounds.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
Indicates a malfunction in the pre-collision sys-
tem
A buzzer also sounds.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
Indicates that, since the VSC (Vehicle Stability
Control) system was turned off, the pre-collision
brake system operation is stopped
Turn the VSC on. (P. 259)
Indicates that the pre-collision system is tempo-
rarily unavailable
Please wait until the system returns. If the
message does not disappear, the system
may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle
inspected by your Toyota dealer immedi-
ately.
Warning message Details/Actions
(Flashes)
(Flashes)
496
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Indicates that the pre-collision system sensor is
dirty, covered with ice, etc.
Remove any dirt, ice, etc.
Monochrome display
Color display
Indicates abnormal engine oil pressure.
• The warning message is shown if the engine
oil pressure is too low.
• A buzzer also sounds.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place
and contact your Toyota dealer. Continuing
to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.
Vehicles without a smart key system:
Indicates that the engine switch is turned off or
turned to the “ACC” position mode and the
driver’s door is opened while the lights are turned
on.
A buzzer also sounds.
Turn the lights off.
Vehicles with a smart key system:
Indicates that the engine switch is turned off or
turned to ACCESSORY mode and the driver’s
door is opened while the lights are turned on.
A buzzer also sounds.
Turn the lights off.
(If equipped)
Indicates that the moon roof is not fully closed
(with the engine switch off, and the driver’s door
open)
A buzzer also sounds.
Close the moon roof.
Warning message Details/Actions
(Flashes)
(Flashes)
(Flashes)
497
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The automatic headlight leveling system;
• The Automatic High Beam system; or
• The LED headlight system
A buzzer also sounds.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
Monochrome display
Color display
(If equipped)
Indicates that the washer fluid level is low.
Add washer fluid.
Color display only
Indicates that remaining fuel is approximately 2.0
gal. (7.5L, 1.7 Imp. gal.) or less
Refuel the vehicle.
Color display only
Indicates that the TRAC (Traction Control) sys-
tem is turned off
Turn the TRAC on. (P. 259)
(U.S.A. only)
Indicates that all maintenance according to the
driven distance on the maintenance schedule
*
should be performed soon.
Comes on approximately 4500 miles (7200 km)
after the message has been reset.
If necessary, perform maintenance.
Warning message Details/Actions
498
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
*: Refer to the separate “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual
Supplement” for the maintenance interval applicable to your vehicle.
■ Message displays
Message displays used in this section are intended as examples, and may
differ from the image that is actually displayed on the multi-information dis-
play.
■ Warning buzzer
P. 485
Monochrome display
Color display
(U.S.A. only)
Indicates that all maintenance is required to cor-
respond to the driven distance on the mainte-
nance schedule
*.
Comes on approximately 5000 miles (8000 km)
after the message has been reset.
(The indicator will not work properly unless the
message has been reset.)
Perform the necessary maintenance.
Please reset the message after the mainte-
nance is performed (P. 415)
Warning message Details/Actions
499
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem,
check that the warning message and light go off.
Have the malfunction repaired immediately. (vehicles with a
smart key system)
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message Details/Actions
Con-
tinu-
ous
Monochrome display
Color display
(Vehicles with a continuously variable
transmission)
The driver’s door was opened
while any shift lever other than
P was selected without turning
off the engine switch.
Shift the shift lever to P.
(Flashes)
500
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Con-
tinu-
ous
Contin-
uous
Monochrome display
Color display
(Vehicles with a continuously variable
transmission)
The driver’s door was opened
and closed while the electronic
key was not in the vehicle, the
shift lever was not in P and the
engine switch was not turned
off.
Shift the shift lever to P.
Bring the electronic key
back into the vehicle.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message Details/Actions
(Displayed alternately)
(Displayed alternately)
(Flashes)
501
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Once 3 times
Monochrome display
Color display
The electronic key was carried
outside the vehicle and a door
other than the driver’s door was
opened and closed while the
engine switch was in a mode
other than off.
Bring the electronic key
back into the vehicle.
The driver’s door was opened
and closed while the electronic
key was not in the vehicle, the
shift lever was in P (vehicles
with a continuously variable
transmission) and the engine
switch was not turned off.
Turn the engine switch off.
Bring the electronic key
back into the vehicle.
Once
Contin-
uous
(5 sec-
onds)
Monochrome display
Color display
(Vehicles with a continuously variable
transmission)
An attempt was made to exit
the vehicle with the electronic
key and lock the doors without
first turning the engine switch
off when the shift lever was in P.
Turn the engine switch off
and lock the doors again.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message Details/Actions
(Flashes)
(Displayed alternately)
(Displayed alternately)
(Flashes)
502
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Once
Monochrome display
Color display
The electronic key is not
detected when an attempt is
made to start the engine.
Start the engine with the
electronic key present.
9
times
Monochrome display
Color display
An attempt was made to drive
when the regular key was not
inside the vehicle.
Confirm that the elec-
tronic key is inside the
vehicle.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message Details/Actions
(Flashes)
(Flashes)
503
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Contin-
uous
(5 sec-
onds)
Monochrome display
Color display
An attempt was made to lock
the doors using the smart key
system while the electronic key
was still inside the vehicle.
Retrieve the electronic key
from the vehicle and lock
the doors again.
Once
Contin-
uous
(5 sec-
onds)
Monochrome display
Color display
An attempt was made to lock
either front door by opening a
door and putting the inside lock
button into the lock position,
then closing the door by pulling
on the outside door handle with
the electronic key still inside the
vehicle.
Retrieve the electronic key
from the vehicle and lock
the doors again.
Once
The electronic key has a low
battery.
Replace the electronic key
battery. (P. 455)
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message Details/Actions
(Flashes)
(Flashes)
504
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Once
(Vehicles with a continuously variable
transmission)
The steering lock could not be
released within 3 seconds of
the engine switch being
pressed.
Press the engine switch
while depressing the brake
pedal and moving the
steering wheel left and
right.
(Vehicles with a manual transmission)
The steering lock could not be
released within 3 seconds of
the engine switch being
pressed.
Press the engine switch
while depressing the
clutch pedal and moving
the steering wheel left and
right.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message Details/Actions
(Flashes)
(Flashes)
505
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Once
Monochrome display
Color display
(Vehicles with a continuously variable
transmission)
• When the doors were
unlocked with the mechanical
key and then the engine
switch was pressed, the elec-
tronic key could not be
detected in the vehicle.
• The electronic key could not
be detected in the vehicle
even after the engine switch
was pressed two consecu-
tive times.
Touch the electronic key to
the engine switch while
depressing the brake
pedal.
Monochrome display
Color display
(Vehicles with a manual transmission)
• When the doors were
unlocked with the mechanical
key and then the engine
switch was pressed, the elec-
tronic key could not be
detected in the vehicle.
• The electronic key could not
be detected in the vehicle
even after the engine switch
was pressed two consecu-
tive times.
Touch the electronic key to
the engine switch while
depressing the clutch
pedal.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message Details/Actions
(Flashes)
(Flashes)
506
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Once
Monochrome display
Color display
(Vehicles with a continuously variable
transmission)
The driver’s door was opened
and closed with the engine
switch turned off and then the
engine switch was put in
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode twice without the engine
being started.
Press the engine switch
while depressing the brake
pedal.
During an engine starting pro-
cedure in the event that the
electronic key was not function-
ing properly (P. 523), the
engine switch was touched with
the electronic key.
Press the engine switch
while depressing the brake
pedal within 10 seconds of
the buzzer sounding.
Monochrome display
Color display
(Vehicles with a manual transmission)
The driver’s door was opened
and closed with the engine
switch turned off and then the
engine switch was put in
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode twice without the engine
being started.
Press the engine switch
while depressing the
clutch pedal.
During an engine starting pro-
cedure in the event that the
electronic key was not function-
ing properly (P. 523), the
engine switch was touched with
the electronic key.
Press the engine switch
while depressing the
clutch pedal within 10 sec-
onds of the buzzer sound-
ing.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message Details/Actions
(Flashes)
(Flashes)
507
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Once
(Vehicles with a continuously variable
transmission)
An attempt was made to start
the engine with the shift lever in
an incorrect position.
Shift the shift lever to P
and start the engine.
Once
Monochrome display
Color display
(Vehicles with a continuously variable
transmission)
The engine switch has been
turned off with the shift lever in
a position other than P or N.
Shift the shift lever to P.
Once
Monochrome display
Color display
(Vehicles with a continuously variable
transmission)
After the engine switch has
been turned off with the shift
lever in a position other than P,
the shift lever has been shifted
to P.
Turn the engine switch off.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message Details/Actions
(Flashes)
(Flashes)
(Flashes)
508
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Message displays
Message displays used in this section are intended as examples, and may
differ from the image that is actually displayed on the multi-information dis-
play.
■ Warning buzzer
P. 485
Monochrome display
Color display
(Vehicles with a continuously variable
transmission)
Power was turned off due to the
automatic power off function.
Next time when starting
the engine, increase the
engine speed slightly and
maintain that level for
approximately 5 minutes
to recharge the battery.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message Details/Actions
509
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
● Stop the vehicle in a safe place on a hard, flat surface.
● Set the parking brake.
● Shift the shift lever to P (continuously variable transmission) or R
(manual transmission).
● Stop the engine.
● Turn on the emergency flashers. (P. 470)
If you have a flat tire
Your vehicle is equipped with a spare tire. The flat tire can be
replaced with the spare tire.
For details about tires: P. 4 4 0
WARNING
■ If you have a flat tire
Do not continue driving with a flat tire.
Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the
wheel beyond repair, which could result in an accident.
Before jacking up the vehicle
511
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Remove the luggage floor
cover.
WARNING
■ Using the tire jack
Observe the following precautions.
Improper use of the tire jack may cause the vehicle to suddenly fall off
the jack, leading to death or serious injury.
● Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or
installing and removing tire chains.
● Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat
tire.
Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for
replacing tires on this vehicle.
● Put the jack properly in its jack point.
● Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while it is supported
by the jack.
● Do not start the engine or drive the vehicle while the vehicle is sup-
ported by the jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is inside.
● When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to
replace the tire.
● Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.
● When lowering the vehicle, make sure that there is no-one near the
vehicle. If there are people nearby, warn them vocally before lowering.
Taking out the jack
1
512
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Take out the jack.
For tightening
For loosening
Remove the luggage floor cover. (P. 511)
Remove the tool tray.
Loosen the center fastener that
secures the spare tire.
2
1
2
Taking out the spare tire
1
2
3
WARNING
■ When storing the spare tire
Be careful not to catch fingers or other body parts between the spare
tire and the body of the vehicle.
513
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Chock the tires.
For vehicles with steel wheels,
remove the wheel ornament
using the wrench.
To protect the wheel ornament,
place a rag between the wrench
and the wheel ornament, as
shown in the illustration.
Slightly loosen the wheel nuts
(one turn).
Replacing a flat tire
1
Flat tire Wheel chock positions
Front
Left-hand side Behind the rear right-hand side tire
Right-hand side Behind the rear left-hand side tire
Rear
Left-hand side In front of the front right-hand side tire
Right-hand side In front of the front left-hand side tire
2
3
514
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Turn the tire jack portion “A” by
hand until the notch of the jack
is in contact with the jack point.
The jack point guides are located
under the rocker panel. They
indicate the jack point positions.
Raise the vehicle until the tire is
slightly raised off the ground.
Remove all the wheel nuts and
the tire.
When resting the tire on the
ground, place the tire so that the
wheel design faces up to avoid
scratching the wheel surface.
4
5
6
515
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
■ Replacing a flat tire
● Do not touch the disc wheels or the area around the brakes immedi-
ately after the vehicle has been driven.
After the vehicle has been driven the disc wheels and the area around
the brakes will be extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet
or other body parts while changing a tire, etc. may result in burns.
● Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to
loosen and the tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury.
• Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 76 ft•lbf (103
N•m, 10.5 kgf•m) as soon as possible after changing wheels.
• Do not attach a heavily damaged wheel ornament, as it may fly off
the wheel while the vehicle is moving.
• When installing a tire, only use wheel nuts that have been specifi-
cally designed for that wheel.
• If there are any cracks or deformations in the bolt screws, nut
threads or bolt holes of the wheel, have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
• When installing the wheel nuts, be sure to install them with the
tapered ends facing inward. (P. 452)
516
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Remove any dirt or foreign mat-
ter from the wheel contact sur-
face.
If foreign matter is on the wheel
contact surface, the wheel nuts
may loosen while the vehicle is in
motion, causing the tire to come
off.
Install the tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by hand by
approximately the same amount.
When replacing a steel wheel
with a compact spare tire,
tighten the wheel nuts until the
tapered portion comes into
loose contact with the disc
wheel seat.
When replacing an aluminum
wheel with a compact spare
tire, tighten the wheel nuts until
the tapered portion comes into
loose contact with the disc
wheel seat.
Lower the vehicle.
Installing the spare tire
1
2
Tapered portion
Disc wheel
seat
Tapered portion
Disc wheel
seat
3
517
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Firmly tighten each wheel nut
two or three times in the order
shown in the illustration.
Tightening torque:
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
Stow the flat tire, tire jack and all tools.
4
5
518
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ The compact spare tire
● The compact spare tire is identified by the label “TEMPORARY USE
ONLY” on the tire sidewall.
Use the compact spare tire temporarily, and only in an emergency.
● Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure of the compact spare tire.
(P. 54 6 )
■ When the compact spare tire is equipped
The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire
compared to when driving with standard tires.
■ After completing the tire change (vehicles with a tire pressure warn-
ing system)
The tire pressure warning system must be reset. (P. 442)
■ When using the compact spare tire (vehicles with a tire pressure
warning system)
As the compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be
indicated by the tire pressure warning system. Also, if you replace the
compact spare tire after the tire pressure warning light comes on, the light
remains on.
■ If you have a flat front tire on a road covered with snow or ice
Install the compact spare tire on one of the rear wheels of the vehicle.
Perform the following steps and fit tire chains to the front tires:
Replace a rear tire with the compact spare tire.
Replace the flat front tire with the tire removed from the rear of the vehi-
cle.
Fit tire chains to the front tires.
■ When reinstalling the wheel ornament (vehicles with steel wheels)
Align the cutout of the wheel ornament
with the valve stem as shown the illus-
tration.
1
2
3
519
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
■ When using the compact spare tire
● Remember that the compact spare tire provided is specifically
designed for use with your vehicle. Do not use your compact spare tire
on another vehicle.
● Do not use more than one compact spare tires simultaneously.
● Replace the compact spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possi-
ble.
● Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shift-
ing operations that cause sudden engine braking.
■ When the compact spare tire is attached
The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following sys-
tems may not operate correctly:
■ Speed limit when using the compact spare tire
Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a compact
spare tire is installed on the vehicle.
The compact spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Fail-
ure to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or
serious injury.
■ After using the tools and jack
Before driving, make sure all the tools and jack are securely in place in
their storage location to reduce the possibility of personal injury during a
collision or sudden braking.
• ABS & Brake assist
• VSC
•TRAC
• Dynamic radar cruise control
• EPS
• LDA (Lane Departure Alert with
steering control)
• PCS (Pre-Collision System)
• Rear view monitor system
• Navigation system (if equipped)
520
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
NOTICE
■ Be careful when driving over bumps with the compact spare tire
installed on the vehicle.
The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire
compared to when driving with standard tires. Be careful when driving
over uneven road surfaces.
■ Driving with tire chains and the compact spare tire
Do not fit tire chains to the compact spare tire.
Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving
performance.
■ When replacing the tires (vehicles with a tire pressure warning sys-
tem)
When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmit-
ters (vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is
used, contact your Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop as soon
as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter when replacing the tire. (P. 4 4 1 )
521
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
● There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.
Refuel the vehicle.
● The engine may be flooded.
Try to restart the engine again following correct starting procedures.
(P. 171, 174)
● There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system.
(P. 67)
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
● The battery may be discharged. (P. 526)
● The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.
The engine starting system may be malfunctioning due to an electrical
problem such as electronic key battery depletion or a blown fuse.
However, an interim measure is available to start the engine.
(P. 522)
If the engine will not start
If the engine will not start even though correct starting proce-
dures are being followed (P. 171, 174), consider each of the fol-
lowing points:
The engine will not start even though the starter motor operates
normally.
The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and head-
lights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low
volume.
The starter motor does not turn over (vehicles with a smart key
system)
522
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
● One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected.
● The battery may be discharged. (P. 526)
● There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system (vehicles
with a smart key system).
Contact your Toyota dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if repair
procedures are unknown.
When the engine does not start, the following steps can be used as an
interim measure to start the engine if the engine switch is functioning
normally:
Set the parking brake.
Shift the shift lever to P (continuously variable transmission) or N
(manual transmission).
Turn the engine switch to ACCESSORY mode.
Press and hold the engine switch for about 15 seconds while
depressing the brake pedal and clutch pedal (manual transmission)
firmly.
Even if the engine can be started using the above steps, the system
may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and head-
lights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.
Emergency start function (vehicles with a smart key system)
1
2
3
4
523
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Use the mechanical key (P.
103) in order to perform the fol-
lowing operations:
Locks all the doors
Unlocks the door
Turning the key rearward unlocks
the driver’s door. Turning the key
once again within 5 seconds
unlocks the other doors.
If the electronic key does not operate properly
(vehicles with a smart key system)
If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is
interrupted (P. 125) or the electronic key cannot be used
because the battery is depleted, the smart key system and wire-
less remote control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors
can be opened and the engine can be started by following the
procedure below.
Locking and unlocking the doors
1
2
524
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Continuously variable transmission: Ensure that the shift lever is in
P and depress the brake pedal.
Manual transmission: Shift the shift lever to N and depress the
clutch pedal.
Touch the Toyota emblem side
of the electronic key to the
engine switch.
When the electronic key is
detected, a buzzer sounds and the
engine switch will turn to IGNITION
ON mode.
When the smart key system is
deactivated in customization set-
ting, the engine switch will turn to
ACCESSORY mode.
Firmly depress the brake pedal (continuously variable transmis-
sion) or clutch pedal (manual transmission) and check that
is shown on the multi-information display.
Press the engine switch.
In the event that the engine still cannot be started, contact your Toyota
dealer.
Starting the engine
1
2
3
4
525
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Stopping the engine
Shift the shift lever to P (continuously variable transmission) or N (manual
transmission) and press the engine switch as you normally do when stopping
the engine.
■ Replacing the key battery
As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the
electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery is depleted.
(P. 455)
■ Changing engine switch modes
Release the brake pedal (continuously variable transmission) or clutch pedal
(manual transmission) and press the engine switch in step above.
The engine does not start and modes will be changed each time the switch is
pressed. (P. 176)
■ When the electronic key does not work properly
● Make sure that the smart key system has not been deactivated in the cus-
tomization setting. If it is off, turn the function on.
(Customizable features P. 564)
● Check if battery-saving mode is set. If it is set, cancel the function.
(P. 124)
3
526
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle
with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your vehicle by following the
steps below.
Vehicles with an alarm: Confirm
that the electronic key (vehicles
with a smart key system) or key
(vehicles without a smart key
system) is being carried.
When connecting the jumper (or
booster) cables, depending on the
situation, the alarm may activate
and doors locked. (P. 70)
Open the hood. (P. 425)
Remove the engine cover.
Raise the rear of the engine
cover to remove the two rear
clips, and then raise the front of
the engine cover to remove the
two front clips.
If the vehicle battery is discharged
The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the
vehicle’s battery is discharged.
You can also call your Toyota dealer or a qualified repair shop.
1
2
3
527
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Connect the jumper cables according to the following procedure:
Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to the positive (+) battery
terminal on your vehicle.
Connect the clamp on the other end of the positive cable to the
positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle.
Connect a negative cable clamp to the negative (-) battery termi-
nal on the second vehicle.
Connect the clamp at the other end of the negative cable to a
solid, stationary, unpainted metallic point away from the battery
and any moving parts, as shown in the illustration.
4
1
2
3
4
528
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine speed
slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5 minutes to
recharge the battery of your vehicle.
Vehicles with a smart key system: Open and close any of the doors
of your vehicle with the engine switch off.
Vehicles without a smart key system:
Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and turn the
engine switch to the “ON” position, then start the vehicle's engine.
Vehicles with a smart key system:
Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and turn the
engine switch to IGNITION ON mode, then start the vehicle's
engine.
Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper cables in
the exact reverse order from which they were connected.
Once the engine starts, have the vehicle inspected at your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible.
5
6
7
8
529
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Starting the engine when the battery is discharged
The engine cannot be started by push-starting.
■ To prevent battery discharge
● Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is off.
● Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running
at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic.
■ Charging the battery
The electricity stored in the battery will discharge gradually even when the
vehicle is not in use, due to natural discharge and the draining effects of cer-
tain electrical appliances. If the vehicle is left for a long time, the battery may
discharge, and the engine may be unable to start. (The battery recharges
automatically during driving.)
■ When recharging or replacing the battery
● Vehicles with a smart key system: In some cases, it may not be possible to
unlock the doors using the smart key system when the battery is dis-
charged. Use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock or
unlock the doors.
● The engine may not start on the first attempt after the battery has recharged
but will start normally after the second attempt. This is not a malfunction.
● Vehicles with a smart key system: The engine switch mode is memorized by
the vehicle. When the battery is reconnected, the system will return to the
mode it was in before the battery was discharged. Before disconnecting the
battery, turn the engine switch off.
If you are unsure what mode the engine switch was in before the battery dis-
charged, be especially careful when reconnecting the battery.
530
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
■ Avoiding battery fires or explosions
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flam-
mable gas that may be emitted from the battery:
● Make sure each jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that
it is not unintentionally in contact with any other than the intended terminal.
● Do not allow the other end of the jumper cable connected to the “+” termi-
nal to come into contact with any other parts or metal surfaces in the area,
such as brackets or unpainted metal.
● Do not allow the + and - clamps of the jumper cables to come into contact
with each other.
● Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near
the battery.
■ Battery precautions
The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while
related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following pre-
cautions when handling the battery:
● When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care
not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing
or the vehicle body.
● Do not lean over the battery.
● In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes,
immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.
Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention
can be received.
● Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and
other battery-related parts.
● Do not allow children near the battery.
NOTICE
■ When handling jumper cables
When connecting the jumper cables, ensure that they do not become entan-
gled in the cooling fan or engine drive belt.
531
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
● The engine coolant temperature gauge (P. 77, 86) enters the red
zone or a loss of power is experienced.
● Steam comes out from under the hood.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning sys-
tem, and then stop the engine.
If you see steam:
Carefully lift the hood after the steam subsides.
If you do not see steam:
Carefully lift the hood.
After the engine has cooled
down sufficiently, inspect the
hoses and radiator core (radia-
tor) for any leaks.
Radiator
Cooling fan
If a large amount of coolant
leaks, immediately contact your
Toyota dealer.
If your vehicle overheats
The following may indicate that your vehicle is overheating.
Correction procedures
1
2
3
1
2
532
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
The coolant level is satisfactory
if it is between the “F” and “L”
lines on the reservoir.
Reservoir
“F” line
“L” line
Radiator cap
Add engine coolant if neces-
sary.
Water can be used in an emer-
gency if engine coolant is unavail-
able.
Start the engine to check that the radiator cooling fan operate and
to check for coolant leaks from the radiator or hoses.
If the fan is not operating:
Stop the engine immediately and contact your Toyota dealer.
If the fan is operating:
Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Toyota dealer.
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
533
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
■ When inspecting under the hood of your vehicle
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury such as burns.
● If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until
the steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot.
● Keep hands and clothing (especially a tie, a scarf or a muffler) away from
the fan and belts.
NOTICE
■ When adding engine coolant
Add coolant slowly after the engine has cooled down sufficiently. Adding
cool coolant to a hot engine too quickly can cause damage to the engine.
■ To prevent damage to the cooling system
Observe the following precautions:
● Avoid contaminating the coolant with foreign matter (such as sand or dust
etc.).
● Do not use any coolant additives.
● Do not loosen the radiator cap and the
coolant reservoir cap while the engine
and radiator are hot.
High temperature steam or coolant
could spray out.
534
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P
(continuously variable transmission) or N (manual transmission).
Remove the mud, snow or sand from around the front wheels.
Place wood, stones or some other material under the front wheels
to help provide traction.
Restart the engine.
Shift the shift lever to D or R (continuously variable transmission) or
1 or R (manual transmission) and release the parking brake. Then,
while exercising caution, depress the accelerator pedal.
■ When it is difficult to free the vehicle (vehicles with a TRAC system)
Press to turn off TRAC.
Vehicles with a monochrome display
Vehicles with a color display
If the vehicle becomes stuck
Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle
becomes stuck in mud, dirt or snow:
1
2
3
4
5
535
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
8
When trouble arises
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
WARNING
■ When attempting to free a stuck vehicle
If you choose to push the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the
surrounding area is clear to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or people.
The vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes
free. Use extreme caution.
■ When shifting the shift lever
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may
cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ To avoid damaging the transmission and other components
● Avoid spinning the front wheels and depressing the accelerator pedal
more than necessary.
● If the vehicle remains stuck even after these procedures are performed,
the vehicle may require towing to be freed.
536
8-2. Steps to take in an emergency
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
537
9
Vehicle specifications
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
9-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.).......... 538
Fuel information ................ 548
Tire information ................. 551
9-2. Customization
Customizable features ...... 564
9-3. Items to initialize
Items to initialize ............... 573
538
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
9-1. Specifications
*
1
: Unladen vehicles
*
2
: 195/65R15 tires
*
3
: P205/55R16 and P215/45R17 tires
■
Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for
your vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your
Toyota. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.
This number is stamped on the
top left of the instrument panel.
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)
Dimensions and weights
Overall length 183.1 in. (4650 mm)
Overall width 69.9 in. (1776 mm)
Overall height*
1
57.3 in. (1455 mm)
Wheelbase 106.3 in. (2700 mm)
Tread
Front
60.3 in. (1531 mm)
*
2
59.8 in. (1519 mm)*
3
Rear
60.4 in. (1534 mm)
*
2
59.9 in. (1522 mm)*
3
Vehicle capacity weight
(occupants + luggage)
865 lb. (390 kg)
Vehicle identification
539
9-1. Specifications
9
Vehicle specifications
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
This number is also on the Certifi-
cation Label on the driver’s side
center pillar.
■ Engine number
The engine number is stamped
on the engine block as shown.
540
9-1. Specifications
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
*: Drive belt tension measured with Borroughs drive belt tension gauge No.
BT-33-73F (used belt), lbf
*: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing
the engine oil. Warm up and turn off the engine, wait more than 5 minutes,
and check the oil level on the dipstick.
Engine
Model 1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE and 2ZR-FAE) engines
Type 4 cylinder in line, 4 cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke 3.17 3.48 in. (80.5 88.3 mm)
Displacement 109.7 cu. in. (1798 cm
3
)
Drive belt tension
2ZR-FE*
143 ± 22 lbf (650 ± 100 N, 65 ± 10 kgf)
2ZR-FAE
Automatic adjustment
Valve clearance Automatic adjustment
Fuel
Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only
Octane rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference)
13.2 gal. (50 L, 10.9 Imp. gal.)
Lubrication system
Oil capacity
(Drain and refill
reference
*)
With filter
Without filter
4.4 qt. (4.2 L, 3.7 Imp. qt.)
4.1 qt. (3.9 L, 3.4 Imp. qt.)
541
9-1. Specifications
9
Vehicle specifications
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Engine oil selection
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Toyota vehicle. Use
Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to sat-
isfy the following grade and viscosity.
Oil grade: ILSAC GF-5 multigrade engine oil
Recommended viscosity:
SAE 0W-20
SAE 0W-20 is the best choice for
good fuel economy and good start-
ing in cold weather.
If SAE 0W-20 is not available, SAE
5W-20 oil may be used. However,
it must be replaced with SAE 0W-
20 at the next oil change.
Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained here as an example):
• The 0W in 0W-20 indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows cold
startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier starting of
the engine in cold weather.
• The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil when the
oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity (one with a higher
value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or
under extreme load conditions.
How to read oil container label
The International Lubricant Specification Advisory Committee
(ILSAC) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help
you select the oil you should use.
Outside temperature
542
9-1. Specifications
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Cooling system
Capacity (Reference) 5.8 qt. (5.5 L, 4.8 Imp. qt.)
Coolant type
Use either of the following.
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
• Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based
non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-
borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic
acid technology
Do not use plain water
Ignition system
Spark plug
Make DENSO SC20HR11
DENSO SC16HR11
Gap 0.043 in. (1.1 mm)
NOTICE
■ Iridium-tipped spark plugs
Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust spark plug gap.
543
9-1. Specifications
9
Vehicle specifications
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Electrical system
Battery
Open voltage at
68F (20C):
12.3 V or More
If the voltage is lower than the standard value,
charge the battery.
(Voltage checked 20 minutes after the engine
and all the lights turned off)
Charging rates 5 A max.
Manual transaxle
Gear oil capacity
(Reference)
2.5 qt. (2.4 L, 2.1 Imp. qt.)
Gear oil type
“TOYOTA Genuine Manual Transmission Gear
Oil LV GL-4 75W” or equivalent
NOTICE
■ Manual transmission gear oil type
● Please be aware that depending on the particular characteristics of the
gear oil used or the operating conditions, idle sound, shift feeling and/or
fuel efficiency may be different or affected and, in the worst case, damage
to the vehicle' s transmission. Toyota recommends to use “TOYOTA Genu-
ine Manual Transmission Gear Oil LV GL-4 75W” to achieve optimal per-
formance.
● Your Toyota vehicle is filled with “TOYOTA Genuine Manual Transmission
Gear Oil LV GL-4 75W” at the factory. Use Toyota approved “TOYOTA
Genuine Manual Transmission Gear Oil LV GL-4 75W” or an equivalent oil
of matching quality that satisfies the above specifications. Please contact
your Toyota dealer for further details.
544
9-1. Specifications
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
*: The fluid capacity is a reference quantity.
If replacement is necessary, contact your Toyota dealer.
Continuously variable transaxle
Fluid capacity* 7.9 qt. (7.5 L, 6.6 Imp. qt.)
Fluid type Toyota Genuine CVTF FE
NOTICE
■ Continuously variable transaxle fluid type
Using continuously variable transaxle fluid other than “Toyota Genuine
CVTF FE” may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of the trans-
mission accompanied by vibration and, ultimately, damage to the vehicle’s
transmission.
Clutch
Pedal free play 0.2 0.6 in. (5 15 mm)
Fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3
545
9-1. Specifications
9
Vehicle specifications
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
*
1
: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 66 lbf (294 N, 30
kgf) while the engine is running
*
2
: Parking brake lever travel when pulled up with a force of 44 lbf (200 N, 20
kgf)
Brakes
Pedal clearance*
1
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
2.9 in. (74 mm)
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FAE) engine
2.8 in. (71 mm)
Pedal free play 0.04 0.24 in. (1 6 mm)
Brake pad wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Parking brake lining wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Parking brake lever travel*
2
6 9 clicks
Fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3
546
9-1. Specifications
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Type A
Type B
Type C
Steering
Free play Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)
Tires and wheels
Tire size 195/65R15 91S, T135/80R16 101M
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)
Front: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Rear: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Spare: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Wheel size 15 6 J, 16 4T (compact spare)
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
Tire size P205/55R16 89H, T135/80R16 101M
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)
Front: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Spare: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Wheel size 16 6 1/2 J, 16 4T (compact spare)
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
Tire size P215/45R17 87W, T135/80R16 101M
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)
Front: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Spare: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Wheel size 17 7 J, 16 4T (compact spare)
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
547
9-1. Specifications
9
Vehicle specifications
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
*
1
: Light bulbs not listed in this table are LED bulbs.
*
2
: If equipped
Light bulbs*
1
Light bulbs Bulb No. W Type
Exterior
Front side marker
lights
W5W 5 B
Front turn signal/park-
ing lights
Type A
Type B
7444NA
WY21W
28/8
21
B
Side turn signal
lights
*
2
5B
Rear turn signal lights 21 B
Stop/tail and rear side
marker lights
7443 21/5 A
License plate lights 5A
Back-up lights
(bulb
type)*
2
921 16 A
Interior
Vanity lights 8A
Front personal/inte-
rior lights (vehicles
without a moon roof)
8A
Front personal/inte-
rior lights (vehicles
with a moon roof)
5A
Rear interior light 8C
Trunk light 3.8 A
A: Wedge base bulbs (clear)
C: Double end bulbs
B: Wedge base bulbs (amber)
548
9-1. Specifications
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Gasoline quality
In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gaso-
line you are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of
gasoline. If this does not correct the problem, consult your Toyota dealer.
■ Recommendation of the use of gasoline containing detergent additives
● Toyota recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to
avoid the build-up of engine deposits.
● All gasoline sold in the U.S.A. contains minimum detergent additives to
clean and/or keep clean intake systems, per EPA’s lowest additives concen-
tration program.
● Toyota strongly recommends the use of Top Tier Detergent Gasoline. For
more information on Top Tier Detergent Gasoline and a list of marketers,
please go to the official website www.toptiergas.com.
Fuel information
You must only use unleaded gasoline.
Select octane rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher.
Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 87
may result in engine knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to
engine damage.
At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of
ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A..
549
9-1. Specifications
9
Vehicle specifications
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Recommendation of the use of low emissions gasoline
Gasolines containing oxygenates such as ethers and ethanol, as well as
reformulated gasolines, are available in some cities. These fuels are typically
acceptable for use, providing they meet other fuel requirements.
Toyota recommends these fuels, since the formulations allow for reduced
vehicle emissions.
■ Non-recommendation of the use of blended gasoline
● If you use gasohol in your vehicle, be sure that it has an octane rating no
lower than 87.
● Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.
■ Non-recommendation of the use of gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains an octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-
clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel
containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely
affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this
happens, contact your Toyota dealer for service.
■ If your engine knocks
● Consult your Toyota dealer.
● You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerat-
ing or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.
● Use only gasoline containing up to 15%
ethanol.
DO NOT use any flex-fuel or gasoline
that could contain more than 15% etha-
nol, including from any pump labeled
E30, E50, E85 (which are only some
examples of fuel containing more than
15% ethanol).
DO NOT use gasoline contain-
ing more than 15% ethanol.
(30% ethanol)
(50% ethanol)
(85% ethanol)
550
9-1. Specifications
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
NOTICE
■ Notice on fuel quality
● Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used, the engine will be
damaged.
● Do not use leaded gasoline.
Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s three-way catalytic
converters causing the emission control system to malfunction.
● Do not use gasohol other than the type previously stated.
Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems.
● Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than the
level previously stated will cause persistent heavy knocking.
At worst, this will lead to engine damage.
■ Fuel-related poor driveability
If poor driveability (poor hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.) is
encountered after using a different type of fuel, discontinue the use of that
type of fuel.
■ When refueling with gasohol
Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle’s paint.
551
9-1. Specifications
9
Vehicle specifications
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Full-size tire
Compact spare tire
Tire information
Typical tire symbols
552
9-1. Specifications
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Tire size (P. 554)
DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) (P. 5 5 3)
Uniform tire quality grading
For details, see “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” that follows.
Location of treadwear indicators (P. 4 4 0)
Tire ply composition and materials
Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands
which form the plies in a tire.
Radial tires or bias-ply tires
A radial tire has “RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “RADIAL”
is a bias-ply tire.
TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE
A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly put into the tire.
A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air
pressure.
Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure (P. 558)
Maximum cold tire inflation pressure (P. 558)
This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
Summer tires or all season tires (P. 4 4 4)
An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “M+S”
is a summer tire.
“TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
A compact spare tire is identified by the phrase “TEMPORARY USE
ONLY” molded on its sidewall. This tire is designed for temporary
emergency use only.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
553
9-1. Specifications
9
Vehicle specifications
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
DOT symbol*
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Tire manufacturer’s identification mark
Tire size code
Manufacturer’s optional tire type code (3 or 4 letters)
Manufacturing week
Manufacturing year
Manufacturer's code
*: The DOT symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
Typical DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Type A
Type B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
554
9-1. Specifications
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Typical tire size information
The illustration indicates typical
tire size.
Tire use (P = Passenger car,
T = Temporary use)
Section width (millimeters)
Aspect ratio
(tire height to section width)
Tire construction code
(R = Radial, D = Diagonal)
Wheel diameter (inches)
Load index
(2 digits or 3 digits)
Speed symbol
(alphabet with one letter)
■ Tire dimensions
Section width
Tire height
Wheel diameter
Tire size
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
555
9-1. Specifications
9
Vehicle specifications
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Bead
Sidewall
Shoulder
Tread
Belt
Inner liner
Reinforcing rubber
Carcass
Rim lines
Bead wires
Chafer
Tire section names
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
556
9-1. Specifications
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations
issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the
U.S. Department of Transportation.
It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Toyota
vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.
Your Toyota dealer will help answer any questions you may have as
you read this information.
■ DOT quality grades
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Require-
ments in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found
where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width.
For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
■ Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear
rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a speci-
fied government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2)
times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual condi-
tions of their use. Performance may differ significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences
in road characteristics and climate.
■ Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C,
and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking
(straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turn-
ing) traction.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
557
9-1. Specifications
9
Vehicle specifications
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing
the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissi-
pate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead
to sudden tire failure.
Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the labo-
ratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grades of a tire assume that it is properly
inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either sepa-
rately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire
failure.
558
9-1. Specifications
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Glossary of tire terminology
Tire related term Meaning
Cold tire inflation pres-
sure
Tire pressure when the vehicle has been
parked for three hours or more, or has not
been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km under
that condition
Maximum inflation
pressure
The maximum cold inflated pressure to which
a tire may be inflated, shown on the sidewall
of the tire
Recommended infla-
tion pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a
manufacturer
Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those stan-
dard items which may be replaced) of auto-
matic transmission, power steering, power
brakes, power windows, power seats, radio
and heater, to the extent that these items are
available as factory-installed equipment
(whether installed or not)
Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard
equipment, including the maximum capacity of
fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air
conditioning and additional weight optional
engine
Maximum loaded vehi-
cle weight
The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight
Normal occupant
weight
150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants
specified in the second column of Table 1
*
that follows
Occupant distribution
Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as speci-
fied in the third column of Table 1
* below
559
9-1. Specifications
9
Vehicle specifications
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Production options
weight
The combined weight of installed regular pro-
duction options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in
excess of the standard items which they
replace, not previously considered in curb
weight or accessory weight, including heavy
duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy
duty battery, and special trim
Rim
A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire beads are
seated
Rim diameter
(Wheel diameter)
Nominal diameter of the bead seat
Rim size designation Rim diameter and width
Rim type designation
The industry manufacturer’s designation for a
rim by style or code
Rim width Nominal distance between rim flanges
Vehicle capacity
weight (Total load
capacity)
The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb.
(68 kg) times the vehicle’s designated seating
capacity
Vehicle maximum load
on the tire
The load on an individual tire that is deter-
mined by distributing to each axle its share of
the maximum loaded vehicle weight, and
dividing by two
Vehicle normal load on
the tire
The load on an individual tire that is deter-
mined by distributing to each axle its share of
curb weight, accessory weight, and normal
occupant weight (distributed in accordance
with Table 1
* below), and dividing by two
Weather side
The surface area of the rim not covered by the
inflated tire
Bead
The part of the tire that is made of steel wires,
wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is
shaped to fit the rim
Bead separation
A breakdown of the bond between compo-
nents in the bead
Tire related term Meaning
560
9-1. Specifications
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Bias ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at alternate
angles substantially less than 90 degrees to
the centerline of the tread
Carcass
The tire structure, except tread and sidewall
rubber which, when inflated, bears the load
Chunking
The breaking away of pieces of the tread or
sidewall
Cord The strands forming the plies in the tire
Cord separation
The parting of cords from adjacent rubber
compounds
Cracking
Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or inner-
liner of the tire extending to cord material
CT
A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire
and rim system in which the rim is designed
with rim flanges pointed radially inward and
the tire is designed to fit on the underside of
the rim in a manner that encloses the rim
flanges inside the air cavity of the tire
Extra load tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and
at higher inflation pressures than the corre-
sponding standard tire
Groove The space between two adjacent tread ribs
Innerliner
The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a
tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium
within the tire
Innerliner separation
The parting of the innerliner from cord material
in the carcass
Intended outboard
sidewall
(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering, or bears manufac-
turer, brand, and/or model name molding
that is higher or deeper than the same
molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or
(b) The outward facing sidewall of an asym-
metrical tire that has a particular side that
must always face outward when mounted
on a vehicle
Tire related term Meaning
561
9-1. Specifications
9
Vehicle specifications
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Light truck (LT) tire
A tire designated by its manufacturer as pri-
marily intended for use on lightweight trucks
or multipurpose passenger vehicles
Load rating
The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry
for a given inflation pressure
Maximum load rating
The load rating for a tire at the maximum per-
missible inflation pressure for that tire
Maximum permissible
inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflation pressure to which
a tire may be inflated
Measuring rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical
dimension requirements
Open splice
Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall,
or innerliner that extends to cord material
Outer diameter The overall diameter of an inflated new tire
Overall width
The linear distance between the exteriors of
the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including ele-
vations due to labeling, decorations, or protec-
tive bands or ribs
Passenger car tire
A tire intended for use on passenger cars,
multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks,
that have a gross vehicle weight rating
(GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or less.
Ply A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords
Ply separation
A parting of rubber compound between adja-
cent plies
Pneumatic tire
A mechanical device made of rubber, chemi-
cals, fabric and steel or other materials, that,
when mounted on an automotive wheel, pro-
vides the traction and contains the gas or fluid
that sustains the load
Radial ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90
degrees to the centerline of the tread
Reinforced tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and
at higher inflation pressures than the corre-
sponding standard tire
Tire related term Meaning
562
9-1. Specifications
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
*: Table 1 Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for
various designated seating capacities
Section width
The linear distance between the exteriors of
the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding ele-
vations due to labeling, decoration, or protec-
tive bands
Sidewall
That portion of a tire between the tread and
bead
Sidewall separation
The parting of the rubber compound from the
cord material in the sidewall
Snow tire
A tire that attains a traction index equal to or
greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E-
1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when
using the snow traction test as described in
ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method for
Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight
Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and
which is marked with an Alpine Symbol ( )
on at least one sidewall
Test rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and
may be any rim listed as appropriate for use
with that tire
Tread
That portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road
Tread rib
A tread section running circumferentially
around a tire
Tread separation Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass
Treadwear indicators
(TWI)
The projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the
degrees of wear of the tread
Wheel-holding fixture
The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire
assembly securely during testing
Tire related term Meaning
563
9-1. Specifications
9
Vehicle specifications
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Designated seating
capacity, Number of
occupants
Vehicle normal load,
Number of occupants
Occupant distribution
in a normally loaded
vehicle
2 through 4 2 2 in front
5 through 10 3
2 in front, 1 in second
seat
11 through 15 5
2 in front, 1 in second
seat, 1 in third seat, 1
in fourth seat
16 through 20 7
2 in front, 2 in second
seat, 2 in third seat, 1
in fourth seat
564
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
9-2. Customization
■ Changing by using Entune Audio
Press the “SETUP” button.
Select “Vehicle” on the “Setup” screen.
Various setting can be changed. Refer to the list of settings that can
be changed for details.
■ Changing by using Entune Audio Plus or Entune Premium
Audio
Press the “APPS” button.
Select “Setup” on the “Apps” screen and select “Vehicle”.
Various setting can be changed. Refer to the list of settings that can
be changed for details.
■ Changing by using multi-information display
P. 83, 93
■ Changing by using the door lock switch
P. 11 4
Customizable features
Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be
personalized to suit your preferences. Programming these pref-
erences requires specialized equipment and may be performed
by your Toyota dealer.
Customizing vehicle features
1
2
1
2
565
9-2. Customization
9
Vehicle specifications
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other func-
tions being customized. Contact your Toyota dealer for further details.
Settings that can be changed using the audio system
Settings that can be changed using the multi-information display
Settings that can be changed by your Toyota dealer
Definition of symbols: O = Available, — = Not available
■
Gauges, meters and multi-information display (P. 77, 86, 99)
Vehicles with a monochrome display
Vehicles with a color display
Customizable features
1
2
3
Function*
1
Default setting
Customized set-
ting
Language*
2
English French O O —
Eco Driving Indicator
Light
*
3
On
(Self-lighting)
Off — O —
1
2 3
Function*
1
Default setting
Customized set-
ting
Language*
2
English French O O —
Units*
2
miles (MPG US)
km (km/L)
O O —
km (L/100 km)
Maintenance system ini-
tialization
*
4
Off On — O —
Eco Driving Indicator
Light
*
3
On
(Self-lighting)
Off — O —
Drive information 1
Current fuel con-
sumption
*
5
— O —
Average fuel con-
sumption (after
reset)
— O —
Drive information 2
Distance (driving
range)
*
5
— O —
Average vehicle
speed (after
reset)
— O —
Pop-up display*
6
On Off — O —
1
2 3
566
9-2. Customization
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
*
1
: For details about each function: P. 83, 93
*
2
: The default setting varies according to country.
*
3
: If equipped
*
4
: U.S.A. only
*
5
: 4 of the following items: current fuel consumption, average fuel consump-
tion (after reset), average fuel consumption (after start), average fuel con-
sumption (after refuel), average vehicle speed (after reset), average
vehicle speed (after start), distance (driving range), distance (after start),
elapsed time (after reset), elapsed time (after start), blank.
*
6
: Intersection guidance, incoming calls
■
LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control) (P. 22 6 )
■ PCS (Pre-Collision System) (P. 214)
Accent color Light blue
Blue
O O —Orange
Yellow
Function*
1
Default setting
Customized set-
ting
1
2 3
Function Default setting
Customized set-
ting
Steering Assist On Off — O —
Alert sensitivity Standard High — O —
Vehicle sway warning
function
On Off — O —
Vehicle sway warning
sensitivity
Standard
Low
— O —
High
1
2 3
Function Default setting
Customized set-
ting
PCS (Pre-Collision Sys-
tem)
On Off — O —
Alert timing
(Middle)
(Far)
— O —
(Near)
1
2 3
567
9-2. Customization
9
Vehicle specifications
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Door lock (P. 108, 117, 523)
Function Default setting
Customized set-
ting
Unlocking using a key
Driver’s door
unlocked in one
step, all doors
unlocked in two
steps
All doors
unlocked in one
step
— — O
Speed-detecting auto-
matic door lock function
(vehicles with a smart
key system)
Off On
O — O
Opening driver's door
unlocks all doors
Off On
Shifting gears to P
unlocks all doors. (vehi-
cles with a continuously
variable transmission)
On Off
O — O
Shifting gears to posi-
tion other than P locks all
doors. (vehicles with a
continuously variable
transmission)
On Off
Locking/unlocking of the
trunk when all doors are
locked/unlocked
On Off — — O
1 2 3
568
9-2. Customization
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Smart key system* and wireless remote control* (P. 1 0 8, 11 7)
*: If equipped
Function Default setting
Customized set-
ting
Operation buzzer vol-
ume
5
Off
O — O
1 to 7
Operation signal (emer-
gency flashers)
On Off O — O
Time elapsed before
automatic door lock
function is activated if
door is not opened after
being unlocked
60 seconds
Off
O — O
30 seconds
120 seconds
Open door warning
buzzer (when locking the
vehicle)
On Off — — O
1 2 3
569
9-2. Customization
9
Vehicle specifications
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Smart key system* (P. 108, 117, 122)
*: If equipped
■
Wireless remote control* (P. 102, 108, 117)
*: If equipped
Function Default setting
Customized set-
ting
Smart key system On Off — — O
Number of permissible
times of continuous
smart lock
Twice Unlimited — — O
1 2 3
Function Default setting
Customized set-
ting
Wireless remote control On Off — — O
Unlocking operation
Driver’s door
unlocked in one
step, all doors
unlocked in two
steps
All doors
unlocked in one
step
O — O
Trunk unlocking opera-
tion
Press and hold
(short)
One short press
— — O
Push twice
Press and hold
(long)
Off
Alarm (panic mode) On Off — — O
1 2 3
570
9-2. Customization
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Turn signal lever (P. 191)
*
1
: After flashing the turn signal lights when turning left or right while this func-
tion is off and the turn signal lever is moved to the first position in the direc-
tion of the flashing light, the turn signal lights can be selected to be flashing
or off.
*
2
: The turn signal lights will be off if the turn signal lever is moved to the first
position in the direction of flashing light.
■
Automatic light control system (P. 193)
Function Default setting
Customized set-
ting
The number of times the
turn signal lights flash
automatically when the
turn signal lever is
moved to the first posi-
tion during a lane
change
*
1
3
5
— — O7
Off*
2
1 2 3
Function Default setting
Customized set-
ting
Light sensor sensitivity Level 3 Level 1 to 5 O — O
Sensitivity of the ambient
light sensor used for
dimming the indicator on
the air conditioning con-
trol buttons.
Standard -2 to 2
— — O
Sensitivity of the ambient
light sensor used for
brightening the indicator
on the air conditioning
control buttons.
Standard -2 to 2
— — O
Time elapsed before
headlights automatically
turn off after doors are
closed
30 seconds
Off
O — O60 seconds
90 seconds
1 2 3
571
9-2. Customization
9
Vehicle specifications
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■
Lights (P. 1 9 3)
■ Automatic air conditioning system* (P. 373)
*: If equipped
■
Illumination (P. 3 8 4)
*: If equipped
Function Default setting
Customized set-
ting
Daytime running light
system
On Off O — O
1 2 3
Function Default setting
Customized set-
ting
Air conditioning auto
switch operation
On Off O — O
1 2 3
Function Default setting
Customized set-
ting
Time elapsed before the
interior lights turn off
15 seconds
7.5 seconds
O
*
— O
30 seconds
Operation after the
engine switch is turned
off
On Off — — O
Operation when the
doors are unlocked
On Off — — O
Operation when you
approach the vehicle
with the electronic key
on your person
*
On Off — — O
1 2 3
572
9-2. Customization
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
■ Vehicle customization
When the doors remain closed after unlocking the doors and the timer acti-
vated automatic door lock function activates, signals will be generated in
accordance with the operational signal (emergency flashers) function set-
tings.
■ When customizing using audio system
Stop the vehicle in a safe place, apply the parking brake, and shift the shift
lever to P (continuously variable transmission) or N (manual transmission).
Also, to prevent battery discharge, leave the engine running while customiz-
ing the features.
WARNING
■ During customization
As the engine needs to be running during customization, ensure that the
vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such
as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may
collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health
hazard.
NOTICE
■ During customization
To prevent battery discharge, ensure that the engine is running while cus-
tomizing features.
573
9
Vehicle specifications
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
9-3. Items to initialize
Items to initialize
The following items must be initialized for normal system opera-
tion after such cases as maintenance being performed on the
vehicle:
Item When to initialize Reference
Message indicating mainte-
nance is required
(U.S.A. only)
• After the maintenance is per-
formed
P. 415
Tire pressure warning sys-
tem (if equipped)
• When changing the tire
size
• When changing the tire
inflation pressure by
changing traveling speed
or load weight, etc.
P. 442
574
9-3. Items to initialize
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
576
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addi-
tion to notifying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll-free: 1-800-
331-4331).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer,
or Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free
at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov
; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
Jersey Ave, S.E., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
577
10
For owners
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
● Déroulez la sangle diagonale
de telle sorte qu’elle passe
entièrement sur l’épaule, sans
pour autant être en contact
avec le cou ou glisser de
l’épaule.
● Placez la sangle abdominale
aussi bas que possible sur les
hanches.
● Réglez la position du dossier de siège. Asseyez-vous le dos le plus
droit possible et calez-vous bien dans le siège.
● Ne vrillez pas la ceinture de sécurité.
■ Ceintures de sécurité
Nettoyez avec un chiffon ou une éponge humectée d’eau savon-
neuse tiède. Vérifiez régulièrement que les ceintures ne sont pas
effilochées, entaillées ou exagérément usées.
Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners
(in French)
The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions
extracted from the seat belt section in this manual.
See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in
English.
Utilisation correcte des ceintures de sécurité
Entretien et soin
578
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
AVERTISSEMENT
■ Dommage et usure de la ceinture de sécurité
Inspectez la ceinture de sécurité périodiquement. Vérifiez si elles ne sont
pas entaillées, effilochées et que leurs ancrages ne sont pas desserrés.
N’utilisez pas une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse avant qu’elle ne soit
remplacée. Une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse n’apporte aucune garan-
tie de protection de l’occupant en cas de blessures graves, voire mortelles.
579
10
For owners
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
◆ Coussins gonflables avant SRS
Coussin gonflable conducteur SRS/coussin gonflable passager
avant
Participent à la protection de la tête et du thorax du conducteur et
du passager avant contre les chocs avec les éléments intérieurs
Coussin gonflable de genoux du conducteur SRS
Participe à la protection du conducteur
Coussin gonflable d’assise SRS
Contribue à retenir le passager avant
SRS airbag instructions for Canadian
owners (in French)
The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instructions
extracted from the SRS airbag section in this manual.
See the SRS airbag section for more detailed SRS airbag instruc-
tions in English.
1
2
3
580
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
◆ Coussins gonflables latéraux et rideaux SRS
Coussins gonflables latéraux avant SRS
Participent à la protection du thorax des occupants du siège avant
Coussins gonflables rideaux SRS
• Participent principalement à la protection de la tête des occu-
pants des sièges latéraux
• Peut contribuer à empêcher les occupants d'être éjectés du véhi-
cule en cas de tonneau
4
5
581
10
For owners
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Compositions du système de coussin gonflable SRS
Capteurs d’impact avant
Système de classification de
l’occupant du passager avant
(ECU et capteurs)
Coussin gonflable d’assise
Capteurs d’impact latéral
(porte avant)
Coussin gonflable passager
avant
Coussins gonflables latéraux
Prétensionneurs de ceintures
de sécurité et limiteurs de
force
Capteurs d’impact latéral
(avant)
Témoins indicateurs “AIR
BAG ON” et “AIR BAG OFF”
Coussins gonflables rideaux
Capteurs d’impact latéral
(arrière)
Coussin gonflable conducteur
Bouton de la boucle de cein-
ture de sécurité du conducteur
Coussin gonflable de genoux
du conducteur
Ensemble de capteurs du
coussin gonflable
Bouton de la boucle de cein-
ture de sécurité du siège du
passager avant
Témoin d’avertissement SRS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
582
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Votre véhicule est équipé de COUSSINS GONFLABLES INTELLI-
GENTS conçus selon les normes de sécurité américaines applicables
aux véhicules à moteur (FMVSS208). Le boîtier électronique (ECU)
des coussins gonflables régule le déploiement de ces derniers sur la
base des informations qu’il reçoit des capteurs, etc., indiqués ci-des-
sus dans le schéma illustrant les composants du système. Parmi ces
informations figurent la gravité du choc et les informations de l’occu-
pant. Le déploiement rapide des coussins gonflables est obtenu au
moyen d’une réaction chimique dans les dispositifs pyrotechniques,
qui produit un gaz inoffensif permettant d’amortir le mouvement des
occupants.
583
10
For owners
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
AVERTISSEMENT
■ Précautions concernant le coussin gonflable SRS
Respectez les précautions suivantes concernant les coussins gonflables
SRS.
Autrement, des blessures graves, voire mortelles, pourraient s’ensuivre.
● Le conducteur et les passagers du véhicule doivent porter correctement
leur ceinture de sécurité.
Les coussins gonflables SRS sont des dispositifs supplémentaires à utili-
ser avec les ceintures de sécurité.
● Le coussin gonflable conducteur SRS se déploie avec une force considé-
rable, et peut provoquer des blessures graves, voire mortelles, si le
conducteur se trouve très près du coussin gonflable. L’autorité fédérale
chargée de la sécurité routière aux États-Unis (NHTSA) conseille:
Sachant que la zone de danger pour le coussin gonflable conducteur se
trouve dans les premiers 2 à 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) de déploiement, placez-
vous à 10 in. (250 mm) de votre coussin gonflable conducteur vous
garantit une marge de sécurité suffisante. Cette distance est mesurée
entre l’axe du volant et votre sternum. Si vous êtes assis à moins de 10
in. (250 mm), vous pouvez changer votre position de conduite de plu-
sieurs façons:
• Reculez votre siège le plus possible, de manière à pouvoir encore
atteindre confortablement les pédales.
• Inclinez légèrement le dossier du siège.
Bien que les véhicules puissent être différents les uns des autres, la
plupart des conducteurs peuvent s’asseoir à une distance de 10 in.
(250 mm), même avec le siège conducteur complètement avancé, sim-
plement en inclinant un peu le dossier de siège. Si vous avez des diffi-
cultés à voir la route après avoir incliné votre siège, utilisez un coussin
ferme et antidérapant pour vous rehausser ou, si votre véhicule est
équipé du réglage en hauteur du siège, remontez-le.
• Si votre volant est réglable, inclinez-le vers le bas. Cela a pour effet
d’orienter le coussin gonflable en direction de votre poitrine plutôt que
de votre tête et de votre cou.
Réglez votre siège selon les recommandations de la NHTSA ci-dessus,
tout en conservant le contrôle des pédales, du volant et de l’affichage des
commandes du tableau de bord.
584
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
AVERTISSEMENT
■ Précautions concernant le coussin gonflable SRS
● Le coussin gonflable passager avant SRS se déploie également avec une
force considérable, ce qui peut provoquer des blessures graves, voire
mortelles, si le passager avant se trouve très près du coussin gonflable.
Éloignez le siège du passager avant aussi loin que possible du coussin
gonflable et réglez le dossier de siège de façon à ce que le passager
avant soit assis bien droit dans le siège.
● Les nourrissons et les enfants qui ne sont pas correctement assis et/ou
protégés peuvent être grièvement blessés ou tués par le déploiement du
coussin gonflable. Installez dans un siège de sécurité enfant les enfants
trop jeunes pour pouvoir utiliser la ceinture de sécurité. Toyota recom-
mande vivement que les nourrissons et les enfants soient installés sur le
siège arrière du véhicule et convenablement attachés. Les sièges arrière
sont plus sûrs pour les nourrissons et les enfants que le siège du passa-
ger avant.
● N’installez jamais un siège de sécurité enfant type dos à la route sur le
siège du passager avant, même si le témoin indicateur “AIR BAG OFF” est
allumé. En cas d’accident, par la violence et la vitesse de son déploie-
ment, le coussin gonflable du passager avant peut blesser grièvement,
voire tuer l’enfant si le siège de sécurité enfant type dos à la route est ins-
tallé sur le siège du passager avant.
● Si vous attachez une rallonge de cein-
ture de sécurité aux boucles de ceinture
de sécurité du siège avant, mais pas au
pêne de la ceinture de sécurité, les
coussins gonflables avant SRS
détectent que le conducteur et le passa-
ger avant ont attaché leur ceinture de
sécurité, alors même que ce n’est pas
le cas. Dans ce cas, il se peut que les
coussins gonflables avant SRS ne se
déploient pas correctement en cas de
collision, ce qui peut provoquer des
blessures graves, voire mortelles en
cas de collision. Veillez à porter la cein-
ture de sécurité avec la rallonge de
ceinture de sécurité.
585
10
For owners
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
AVERTISSEMENT
■ Précautions concernant le coussin gonflable SRS
● Ne vous asseyez pas sur le bord du
siège et ne vous appuyez pas contre le
tableau de bord.
● Ne laissez pas un enfant se tenir
debout devant le coussin gonflable pas-
sager avant SRS ou bien s’asseoir sur
les genoux du passager avant.
● Ne laissez pas les occupants du siège
avant voyager avec un objet sur les
genoux.
● Ne vous appuyez pas contre la porte, le
rail latéral de toit ou contre les montants
avant, latéraux et arrière.
● Ne laissez personne s’agenouiller sur
les sièges passagers en appui contre la
porte ou sortir la tête ou les mains à
l’extérieur du véhicule.
586
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
AVERTISSEMENT
■ Précautions concernant le coussin gonflable SRS
● Ne fixez ni ne posez aucun objet sur
des emplacements tels que le tableau
de bord, la garniture du volant de direc-
tion et la partie inférieure du tableau de
bord.
Ces objets risquent de se transformer
en projectile lorsque les coussins gon-
flables du conducteur, passager avant
et genoux conducteur SRS se
déclenchent.
● Ne rien fixer aux emplacements tels
que la porte, la vitre du pare-brise, la
vitre latérale, au montant avant et
arrière, au rail latéral de toit et à la poi-
gnée d’assistance.
● Véhicules dépourvus du système
d’accès et de démarrage “mains libres”:
Ne fixez pas d’objets lourds, pointus ou
très durs, tels que des clés et des
accessoires aux clés. Ces objets
risquent d’entraver le déploiement du
coussin gonflable de genoux du
conducteur SRS ou d’être projetés vers
l’emplacement du siège conducteur par
la force de déploiement du coussin gon-
flable, constituant ainsi un danger
potentiel.
587
10
For owners
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
AVERTISSEMENT
■ Précautions concernant le coussin gonflable SRS
● Si un cache en plastique recouvre la partie où le coussin gonflable de
genoux du conducteur SRS se déploie, veillez à le retirer.
● N’utilisez pas d’accessoires de siège venant recouvrir les zones de
déploiement des coussins gonflables latéraux SRS et du coussin gon-
flable d’assise SRS, car ils risqueraient de gêner le déploiement des cous-
sins gonflables SRS. De tels accessoires peuvent empêcher les coussins
gonflables latéraux et le coussin gonflable d’assise de fonctionner correc-
tement, désactiver le dispositif ou entraîner le déploiement accidentel des
coussins gonflables latéraux et du coussin gonflable d’assise, entraînant
la mort ou des blessures graves.
● Évitez de faire subir des chocs ou des pressions excessives aux zones
renfermant les composants du coussin gonflable SRS.
En effet, cela pourrait entraîner un dysfonctionnement des coussins gon-
flables SRS.
● Ne touchez aucun composant du système immédiatement après le
déploiement (gonflage) des coussins gonflables SRS, car ils peuvent être
très chauds.
● Si vous avez des difficultés à respirer après le déploiement des coussins
gonflables SRS, ouvrez une porte ou une vitre pour faire entrer de l’air
frais, ou bien descendez du véhicule si cela ne présente pas de danger.
Essuyez tout résidu dès que possible afin d’éviter d’éventuelles irritations
cutanées.
● Si les parties renfermant les coussins gonflables SRS, telles que la garni-
ture du moyeu de volant et les garnitures de montants avant et arrière,
apparaissent abîmées ou craquelées, faites-les remplacer par votre
concessionnaire Toyota.
● Ne placez rien sur le siège du passager avant, comme un coussin par
exemple. Cela a pour conséquence de répartir le poids du passager, ce
qui empêche le capteur de détecter correctement le poids du passager. En
conséquence, les coussins gonflables avant SRS du passager avant
risquent de ne pas se déployer en cas de collision.
588
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
AVERTISSEMENT
■ Modification et mise au rebut des éléments du système du coussin
gonflables SRS
Ne mettez pas votre véhicule au rebut et n’effectuez pas les modifications
suivantes sans consulter votre concessionnaire Toyota. Les coussins gon-
flables SRS peuvent être défaillants ou se déployer (se gonfler) accidentel-
lement, provoquant la mort ou de graves blessures.
● Installation, retrait, démontage et réparation des coussins gonflables SRS
● Réparations, modifications, retrait ou remplacement du volant, du tableau
de bord, de la planche de bord, des sièges ou de leur garniture, des mon-
tants avant, latéraux et arrière ou des rails latéraux de toit
● Réparations ou modifications de l’aile avant, du pare-choc avant, ou des
flancs de l’habitacle
● Installation d’un protège-calandre (pare-buffles, pare-kangourou, etc.), de
chasse-neige, de treuils
● Modifications du système de suspension du véhicule
● Installation d’appareils électroniques, tels qu’une radio émetteur/récepteur
et d’un lecteur CD
● Aménagements de votre véhicule pour une personne ayant un handicap
physique
589
Index
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
What to do if...
(Troubleshooting) .................... 590
Alphabetical index ..................... 595
Vehicles with an Entune Premium Audio or Entune
Audio Plus:
For details of equipment related to Entune Premium
Audio or Entune Audio Plus, such as the audio system,
refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYS-
TEM OWNER'S MANUAL”.
590
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
● If you lose your keys or mechanical keys, new genuine keys or mechanical
keys can be made by your Toyota dealer. (P. 104)
● If you lose your keys or electronic keys, the risk of vehicle theft increases
significantly. Contact your Toyota dealer immediately. (P. 107)
● Is the key battery weak or depleted? (P. 455)
● Vehicles with a smart key system:
Is the engine switch in IGNITION ON mode?
When locking the doors, turn the engine switch off. (P. 176)
● Vehicles with a smart key system:
Is the electronic key left inside the vehicle?
When locking the doors, make sure that you have the electronic key on
your person.
● The function may not operate properly due to the condition of the radio
wave. (P. 125)
● Is the child-protector lock set?
The rear door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the lock is
set. Open the rear door from outside and then unlock the child-protector
lock. (P. 112)
● The function to prevent the electronic key from being left inside the trunk
will operate and you can open the trunk as usual. Take the key out from the
trunk. (P. 119)
If you have a problem, check the following before contacting
your Toyota dealer.
The doors cannot be locked, unlocked, opened or closed
You lose your keys
The doors cannot be locked or unlocked
The rear door cannot be opened
The trunk lid is closed with the electronic key left inside
(vehicles with a smart key system)
591
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
● Vehicles with a continuously variable transmission:
Is the shift lever in P? (P. 171)
● Vehicles with a manual transmission:
Do you turn the key with the clutch pedal depressed firmly?
(P. 171)
● Is the steering wheel unlocked? (P. 171)
● Is the battery discharged? (P. 526)
● Vehicles with a continuously variable transmission:
Did you press the engine switch while firmly depressing the brake pedal?
(P. 174)
● Vehicles with a manual transmission:
Did you press the engine switch while firmly depressing the clutch pedal?
(P. 174)
● Vehicles with a continuously variable transmission:
Is the shift lever in P? (P. 178)
● Is the electronic key anywhere detectable inside the vehicle?
(P. 123)
● Is the steering wheel unlocked? (P. 178)
● Is the electronic key battery weak or depleted?
In this case, the engine can be started in a temporary way.
(P. 524)
● Is the battery discharged? (P. 526)
If you think something is wrong
The engine does not start
(vehicles without a smart key system)
The engine does not start
(vehicles with a smart key system)
592
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
● Vehicles without a smart key system:
Is the engine switch in the “ON” position?
If you cannot release the shift lever by depressing the brake pedal with the
engine switch in the “ON” position. (P. 183, 188)
● Vehicles with a smart key system:
Is the engine switch in IGNITION ON mode?
If you cannot release the shift lever by depressing the brake pedal with the
engine switch in IGNITION ON mode. (P. 183, 188)
● Vehicles without a smart key system:
It is locked to prevent theft of the vehicle if the key is pulled from the engine
switch. (P. 172)
● Vehicles with a smart key system:
It is locked automatically to prevent theft of the vehicle. (P. 1 78 )
● Is the window lock switch pressed?
The power window except for the one at the driver’s seat cannot be oper-
ated if the window lock switch is pressed. (P. 143)
The shift lever cannot be shifted from P even if you depress
the brake pedal (vehicles with a continuously variable trans-
mission)
The steering wheel cannot be turned after the engine is
stopped
The windows do not open or close by operating the power
window switches
593
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
● The auto power off function will be operated if the vehicle is left in ACCES-
SORY or IGNITION ON mode (the engine is not running) for a period of
time. (P. 177)
● The seat belt reminder light is flashing
Are the driver and the passenger wearing the seat belts? (P. 481)
● The brake system warning light is on
Is the parking brake released? (P. 192)
Depending on the situation, other types of warning buzzer may also sound.
(P. 480, 489)
● Is the electronic key left inside the vehicle?
Check the message on the multi-information display. (P. 489)
● Did anyone inside the vehicle open a door during setting the alarm?
The sensor detects it and the alarm sounds. (P. 69)
Vehicles without a smart key system
To stop the alarm, turn the engine switch to the “ON” position or start the
engine.
Vehicles with a smart key system
To stop the alarm, turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode or start
the engine.
● When a warning light turns on or a warning message or indicator is dis-
played, refer to P. 480, 489.
The engine switch is turned off automatically
(vehicles with a smart key system)
A warning buzzer sounds during driving
A warning buzzer sounds when leaving the vehicle
(vehicles with a smart key system)
An alarm is activated and the horn sounds
(vehicles with an alarm)
A warning light turns on or a warning message or indicator
is displayed
594
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
● Stop the vehicle in a safe place and replace the flat tire with the spare
tire. (P. 509)
● Try the procedure for when the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or
snow. (P. 534)
When a problem has occurred
If you have a flat tire
The vehicle becomes stuck
595
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Alphabetical index
Alphabetical index
A/C .................................... 366, 373
Air conditioning filter ............. 453
ABS
(Anti-lock Brake System)...... 257
Function ................................ 257
Warning light......................... 481
Air conditioning filter .............. 453
Air conditioning
system............................ 366, 373
Air conditioning filter ............. 453
Airbags ....................................... 34
Airbag operating conditions .... 42
Airbag precautions for
your child .............................. 37
Airbag warning light .............. 480
Correct driving posture ........... 26
Curtain shield airbag operating
conditions ............................. 42
Curtain shield airbag
precautions........................... 40
General airbag precautions .... 37
Locations of airbags................ 34
Modification and
disposal of airbags ............... 41
Side airbag operating
conditions ............................. 42
Side airbag precautions.......... 37
Side and curtain shield airbags
operating conditions ............. 42
Side and curtain shield airbags
precautions........................... 37
SRS airbags............................ 34
Alarm .......................................... 69
Anchor brackets ........................ 58
Antennas
(smart key system)................ 122
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) ...................................... 257
Function................................ 257
Warning light......................... 481
Assist grips.............................. 395
Audio input
* ........................... 272
Automatic High Beam ............. 198
Automatic light control
system.................................... 193
AUX port
*......................... 272, 305
Back-up lights
Replacing light bulb .............. 466
Wattage ................................ 547
Battery ...................................... 437
Battery checking................... 437
If the vehicle has discharged
battery ................................ 526
Preparing and checking
before winter ...................... 263
Warning light......................... 489
Bluetooth
®
*
Entune Audio................ 320, 322
Bottle holders .......................... 389
Brake
Fluid...................................... 545
Parking brake ....................... 192
Warning light......................... 480
Brake assist ............................. 257
Break-in tips ............................ 155
Brightness control
Instrument panel light
control ............................ 79, 88
A
B
*: For vehicles with an Entune Premium Audio or Entune Audio Plus,
refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
OWNER'S MANUAL”.
596
Alphabetical index
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Care................................... 408, 411
Aluminum wheels.................. 409
Exterior ................................. 408
Interior................................... 411
Seat belts.............................. 412
Cargo capacity......................... 166
CD player
*................................ 290
Chains....................................... 265
Child restraint system............... 54
Booster seats, definition ......... 55
Booster seats, installation....... 62
Convertible seats,
definition ............................... 55
Convertible seats,
installation ............................ 61
Infant seats, definition............. 55
Infant seats, installation .......... 60
Installing CRS with LATCH
anchors................................. 59
Installing CRS with seat
belts...................................... 60
Installing CRS with top tether
strap ..................................... 63
Child safety ................................ 53
Airbag precautions.................. 37
Battery precautions....... 438, 530
Child restraint system ............. 54
How your child should wear
the seat belt.......................... 30
Installing child restraints ......... 58
Moon roof precautions.......... 150
Power window lock switch.... 143
Power window precautions... 146
Rear door child-protectors.... 112
Removed electronic key
battery precautions............. 457
Seat belt extender
precautions........................... 33
Seat belt precautions.............. 32
Seat heater precautions ....... 383
Trunk precautions................. 120
Child-protectors ...................... 112
Cleaning ........................... 408, 411
Aluminum wheels ................. 409
Exterior ................................. 408
Interior .................................. 411
Seat belts.............................. 412
Clock......................................... 392
Compass .................................. 403
Condenser................................ 435
Console box............................. 388
Continuously variable
transmission.................. 181, 184
If the shift lever cannot
be shifted from P........ 183, 188
M mode................................. 186
Cooling system........................ 433
Engine overheating............... 531
Cup holders ............................. 390
Curtain shield airbags............... 35
Customizable features ............ 564
C
597
Alphabetical index
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Daytime running light
system.................................... 195
Defogger
Outside rear view
mirrors ........................ 368, 376
Rear window ................. 368, 376
Dimensions .............................. 538
Dinghy towing.................. 168, 169
Display
Multi-information display... 77, 86
Trip information................. 80, 87
Warning message ................ 489
Do-it-yourself maintenance .... 422
Door lock
Doors .................................... 108
Key........................................ 109
Smart key system ................. 108
Wireless remote control........ 108
Doors ........................................ 108
Automatic door locking
and unlocking systems....... 113
Door lock............................... 111
Door windows ....................... 143
Open door warning buzzer ... 123
Outside rear view mirrors...... 141
Rear door child-protector...... 112
Warning message................. 489
Driving ...................................... 152
Break-in tips.......................... 155
Correct posture ....................... 26
Procedures ........................... 152
Winter drive tips.................... 263
Dynamic radar cruise
control .................................... 235
Constant speed control
mode .................................. 243
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode....................... 239
Eco drive mode........................ 182
Eco Driving Indicator ................ 99
Electric Power Steering
(EPS) ...................................... 257
Function................................ 257
Warning light......................... 481
Electronic key .......................... 102
Battery-saving function......... 124
If the electronic key does not
operate properly................. 523
Replacing the battery............ 455
Emergency, in case of
If a warning buzzer
sounds................................ 480
If a warning light turns on ..... 480
If a warning message or
indicator is displayed.......... 489
If the battery is discharged ... 526
If the electronic key does not
operate properly................. 523
If the engine will not start...... 521
If you have a flat tire ............. 509
If you think something is
wrong ................................. 478
If your vehicle becomes
stuck................................... 534
If your vehicle has to be
stopped in an emergency... 471
If your vehicle needs to be
towed.................................. 473
If your vehicle overheats....... 531
D
E
*: For vehicles with an Entune Premium Audio or Entune Audio Plus,
refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
OWNER'S MANUAL”.
598
Alphabetical index
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Emergency flashers ................ 470
Engine....................................... 540
ACCESSORY mode ............. 176
Compartment........................ 429
Engine switch................ 171, 174
Hood ..................................... 425
How to start the
engine......................... 171, 174
Identification number ............539
If the engine will not start...... 521
Ignition switch
(engine switch) ...........171, 174
Overheating .......................... 531
Engine coolant......................... 433
Capacity................................ 542
Checking............................... 433
Preparing and checking
before winter....................... 263
Engine coolant temperature
gauge.................................. 77, 86
Engine immobilizer system ...... 67
Engine oil ................................. 430
Capacity................................ 540
Checking............................... 430
Preparing and checking
before winter....................... 263
Engine switch .................. 171, 174
Entune Audio ........................... 273
Audio input............................ 272
AUX port/USB
port ..................................... 272
Bluetooth
®
audio................... 320
CD player.............................. 290
iPod....................................... 296
MP3/WMA disc ..................... 290
Optimal use........................... 287
Portable music player ........... 272
Radio .................................... 288
Steering wheel audio
switch ................................. 338
USB memory ........................ 301
Entune Audio Plus
*
Entune Premium Audio*
EPS
(Electric Power Steering) ..... 257
Function................................ 257
Warning light......................... 481
Flat tire
Vehicles with a spare tire...... 509
Floor mats .................................. 24
Fluid
Brake .................................... 545
Continuously variable
transmission ....................... 544
Washer ................................. 439
Front interior light ................... 385
Front passenger occupant
classification system.............. 47
Front seats ............................... 130
Adjustment............................ 130
Cleaning ............................... 411
Correct driving posture ........... 26
Head restraints ..................... 134
Seat heaters ......................... 383
Front turn signal lights ........... 191
Replacing light bulbs ............ 464
Turn signal lever................... 191
Wattage ................................ 547
Fuel ........................................... 204
Capacity................................ 540
Fuel gauge........................ 77, 86
Fuel pump shut off system ... 479
Information............................ 548
Refueling .............................. 204
Type.............................. 540, 548
Warning light......................... 481
Fuel filler door ......................... 204
Refueling .............................. 204
Fuel pump shut off system..... 479
Fuses ........................................ 458
F
599
Alphabetical index
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Garage door opener ................ 396
Gauges ................................. 77, 86
Glove box ................................. 388
Hands-free system
(for cellular phone)
* ............. 306
Head restraints ........................ 134
Headlights ................................ 193
Light switch ........................... 193
Wattage ................................ 547
Heaters
Heated steering wheel.......... 383
Outside rear view
mirrors ........................ 368, 376
Seat heaters ......................... 383
Hood ......................................... 425
Hooks
Retaining hooks (floor mat)..... 24
Horn .......................................... 137
I/M test ...................................... 421
Identification ............................ 538
Engine .................................. 539
Vehicle.................................. 538
Ignition switch
(engine switch).............. 171, 174
Illuminated entry system ........ 386
Immobilizer system................... 67
Indicators ................................... 75
Initialization
Moon roof ............................. 149
Power windows..................... 145
Tire pressure
warning system .................. 441
Inside rear view mirror............ 139
Instrument panel light
control................................ 79, 88
Interior lights ........................... 384
G
H
I
*: For vehicles with an Entune Premium Audio or Entune Audio Plus,
refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
OWNER'S MANUAL”.
600
Alphabetical index
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Jack
Positioning the jack............... 427
Vehicle-equipped jack........... 510
Jack handle.............................. 510
Jam protection function
Moon roof.............................. 148
Power window....................... 144
Keyless entry
Smart key system ......... 108, 117
Wireless remote
control......................... 108, 118
Keys .......................................... 102
Battery-saving function ......... 124
Electronic key ....................... 102
Engine switch................ 171, 174
If the electronic key does
not operate properly ........... 523
Key number plate.................. 102
Keyless entry ........................ 103
Mechanical key..................... 103
Replacing the battery............ 455
Warning buzzer..................... 123
Wireless remote control........ 103
Knee airbags.............................. 34
LATCH anchors ......................... 59
LDA (Lane Departure
Alert with steering
control)................................... 226
Lane departure alert
function............................... 226
Steering control function....... 227
Vehicle sway warning........... 227
Lever
Auxiliary catch lever.............. 425
Hood lock
release lever....................... 425
Shift lever.............. 181, 184, 189
Turn signal lever................... 191
Wiper lever ........................... 202
License plate lights ................. 193
Light switch........................... 193
Replacing light bulbs ............ 467
Wattage ................................ 547
Light bulbs
Replacing.............................. 461
Wattage ................................ 547
Lights
Front Interior light ................. 385
Headlight switch ................... 193
Illuminated entry system....... 386
Interior lights list.................... 384
Personal lights...................... 385
Rear interior light .................. 386
Replacing light bulbs ............ 461
Trunk light............................. 119
Turn signal lever................... 191
Vanity lights .......................... 392
Wattage ................................ 547
Lock steering column ..... 172, 178
J
K
L
601
Alphabetical index
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Maintenance
Do-it-yourself maintenance... 422
General maintenance ........... 417
Maintenance data ................. 538
Maintenance
requirements ...................... 414
Resetting the reminder light
or message indicating
maintenance is required..... 415
Malfunction indicator lamp..... 480
Manual air conditioning
system.................................... 366
Manual transmission............... 189
Master warning light................ 481
Meter ..................................... 77, 86
Indicators ................................ 75
Meters............................... 77, 86
Multi-information display... 77, 86
Warning lights......................... 73
Mirrors
Inside rear view mirror .......... 139
Outside rear view mirror
defoggers ................... 368, 376
Outside rear view mirrors...... 141
Vanity mirrors........................ 392
Mobile Assistant
*.................... 362
Moon roof ................................. 147
Jam protection function......... 148
Operation .............................. 147
MP3 disc
*................................. 290
Multi-information display.... 77, 86
Customizing vehicle
features .......................... 83, 93
Drive monitor .................... 81, 92
Switching the display ........ 77, 87
Trip information................. 80, 87
Warning message................. 489
Noise from under vehicle ........... 8
Odometer ............................. 77, 86
Oil
Engine oil.............................. 540
Opener
Hood..................................... 425
Trunk .................................... 117
Outside rear view mirrors....... 141
Adjusting and folding ............ 141
Outside rear view mirror
defoggers ................... 368, 376
Outside temperature
display.................................... 393
Overheating, Engine ............... 531
M
N
O
*: For vehicles with an Entune Premium Audio or Entune Audio Plus,
refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
OWNER'S MANUAL”.
602
Alphabetical index
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Paddle shift switches .............. 186
Parking brake........................... 192
Operation .............................. 192
Parking brake engaged
warning buzzer ................... 490
Parking brake engaged
warning message ............... 490
Parking lights........................... 193
Light switch ........................... 193
Replacing light bulbs............. 464
Wattage ................................ 547
PCS (Pre-Collision
System) .................................. 214
Pre-collision brake assist...... 214
Pre-collision braking ............. 214
Pre-collision warning............. 214
Personal lights......................... 385
Power outlet............................. 394
Power steering......................... 257
Warning light......................... 481
Power windows........................ 143
Jam protection function......... 144
Operation .............................. 143
Window lock switch............... 143
Radiator.................................... 435
Radio
* ...................................... 288
Rear interior light .................... 386
Rear seat
Folding down ........................ 132
Rear turn signal lights ............ 191
Replacing light bulbs ............ 465
Turn signal lever................... 191
Wattage ................................ 547
Rear view mirror
Inside rear view mirror .......... 139
Outside rear view mirrors ..... 141
Rear view monitor system...... 247
Rear window defogger.... 368, 376
Refueling .................................. 204
Capacity................................ 540
Fuel types ..................... 540, 548
Opening the fuel tank cap..... 205
Replacing
Electronic key battery ........... 455
Fuses.................................... 458
Light bulbs ............................ 461
Tires...................................... 509
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners...................... 576
Resetting the reminder light
or message indicating
maintenance is required....... 415
P
R
603
Alphabetical index
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Seat belt reminder light........... 481
Seat belts.................................... 28
Adjusting the seat belt ............ 29
Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) .................... 30
Child restraint system
installation ............................ 60
Cleaning and maintaining
the seat belt........................ 412
Emergency Locking Retractor
(ELR).................................... 30
How to wear your seat belt ..... 28
How your child should wear
the seat belt.......................... 30
Pregnant women, proper
seat belt use......................... 31
Reminder light and buzzer.... 481
Seat belt extender................... 30
Seat belt pretensioners........... 29
SRS warning light ................. 480
Seat heaters ............................. 383
Seats ......................................... 130
Adjustment............................ 130
Adjustment precautions ........ 131
Child seats/child restraint
system installation................ 58
Cleaning................................ 411
Head restraints ..................... 134
Properly sitting in the seat ...... 26
Seat heaters ......................... 383
Sensor
Automatic headlight
system................................ 195
Camera sensor..................... 209
Inside rear view mirror .......... 140
Radar sensor........................ 209
Shift lever ................. 181, 184, 189
Continuously variable
transmission ............... 181, 184
If the shift lever cannot
be shifted from P........ 183, 188
Manual transmission............. 189
Shift lock system............. 182, 187
Side airbags ............................... 35
Side marker lights ................... 193
Light switch........................... 193
Replacing light bulbs .... 463, 465
Wattage ................................ 547
Side mirrors ............................. 141
Adjusting and folding ............ 141
Side turn signal lights............. 191
Replacing light bulbs ............ 468
Turn signal lever................... 191
Wattage ................................ 547
Smart key system.................... 122
Antenna location................... 122
Entry functions.............. 108, 117
Starting the engine ............... 174
Snow tires ................................ 266
Spare tire.................................. 509
Inflation pressure .................. 546
Storage location.................... 510
Spark plug................................ 542
Specifications .......................... 538
S
*: For vehicles with an Entune Premium Audio or Entune Audio Plus,
refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
OWNER'S MANUAL”.
604
Alphabetical index
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Speedometer........................ 77, 86
Steering lock
Column lock release ..... 172, 178
Steering lock system warning
message............................. 504
Steering wheel ......................... 137
Adjustment............................ 137
Audio switches
*.................... 271
Heated steering wheel.......... 383
Stop lights
Replacing light bulbs............. 465
Storage feature ........................ 387
Stuck
If the vehicle becomes
stuck................................... 534
Sun shade
Roof ...................................... 148
Sun visors ................................ 392
Switches
Audio remote control
switches
* ........................... 271
Compass switch.................... 403
“DISP” switch .......................... 81
Door lock switches................ 111
Dynamic radar cruise
control switch...................... 235
“ECO MODE” switch............. 182
Emergency flashers
switch ................................. 470
Engine switch................ 171, 174
Garage door opener
switches ............................. 396
Heated steering
wheel switch....................... 383
Ignition switch............... 171, 174
LDA (Lane Departure
Alert with steering
control) switch .................... 229
Light switches ....................... 193
Meter control switches............ 91
Moon roof switches............... 147
Outside rear view mirror
switches ............................. 141
Paddle shift switches............ 186
Power door lock switch......... 111
Power window switches........ 143
Rear window and outside
rear view mirror
defoggers switch ........ 368, 376
Seat heater switches ............ 383
Sport mode switch................ 185
Talk switch
*.......................... 359
Telephone switches
*............ 338
Tire pressure warning reset
switch ................................. 442
“TRIP” switch .......................... 87
Vehicle-to-vehicle
distance switch................... 235
VSC OFF switch ................... 258
Window lock switch .............. 143
Windshield wiper and
washer switch..................... 202
605
Alphabetical index
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Tachometer .......................... 77, 86
Tail lights.................................. 193
Light switch ........................... 193
Replacing light bulbs............. 465
Wattage ................................ 547
Talk switch
*............................. 359
Telephone
switches
*............................... 338
Theft deterrent system
Alarm ...................................... 69
Engine immobilizer system..... 67
Tire inflation pressure............. 448
Maintenance data ................. 546
Warning light......................... 482
Tire information ....................... 551
Glossary................................ 558
Size....................................... 554
Tire identification number ..... 553
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading............................... 556
Tire pressure warning
system.................................... 441
Function ................................ 441
Initializing .............................. 441
Installing tire pressure
warning valves and
transmitters......................... 441
Registering ID codes ............443
Tire pressure warning reset
switch ................................. 442
Warning light......................... 482
Tires.......................................... 440
Chains .................................. 265
Checking............................... 440
If you have a flat tire ............. 509
Inflation pressure .................. 546
Replacing.............................. 509
Rotating tires ........................ 440
Size....................................... 546
Snow tires............................. 266
Spare tire .............................. 509
Tire pressure warning
system................................ 441
Warning light......................... 482
Tools......................................... 510
Top tether strap ......................... 63
Total load capacity .................. 166
Towing
Dinghy towing............... 168, 169
Emergency towing................ 473
Towing eyelet ....................... 473
Trailer towing........................ 167
Toyota Safety Sense P............ 207
Automatic High Beam........... 198
Dynamic radar cruise
control ................................ 235
LDA (Lane Departure
Alert with steering
control) ............................... 226
PCS (Pre-Collision
System) .............................. 214
T
*: For vehicles with an Entune Premium Audio or Entune Audio Plus,
refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
OWNER'S MANUAL”.
606
Alphabetical index
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
TRAC (Traction Control) ......... 257
Traction Control
(TRAC).................................... 257
Transmission ........... 181, 184, 189
Trip information ................... 80, 87
Trip meters ........................... 77, 86
Trunk......................................... 117
Internal trunk release lever ... 119
Smart key system ................. 117
Trunk light............................. 119
Trunk opener ........................ 117
Wireless remote control........ 118
Trunk light
Trunk light............................. 119
Wattage ................................ 547
Turn signal lights..................... 191
Replacing light bulbs.....464, 465
Turn signal lever ................... 191
Wattage ................................ 547
USB port
*................................. 272
Vanity lights ............................. 392
Wattage ................................ 547
Vanity mirrors .......................... 392
Vehicle data recording................ 9
Vehicle identification
number ................................... 538
Vehicle Stability Control
(VSC) ...................................... 257
Voice command system
* ....... 359
VSC
(Vehicle Stability Control) .... 257
Warning buzzers
Brake system........................ 480
Downshifting ......................... 187
Electric power steering ......... 481
Key reminder ................ 172, 499
Open door............................. 490
Open moon roof.................... 496
Open trunk............................ 490
Seat belt reminder ................ 481
Warning lights ........................... 73
ABS ...................................... 481
Brake system........................ 480
Electric power steering ......... 481
LDA (Lane Departure Alert
with steering control)
indicator.............................. 482
Low fuel level........................ 481
Malfunction indicator lamp.... 480
Master warning light ............. 481
PCS ...................................... 482
Seat belt reminder light......... 481
Slip indicator......................... 481
SRS ...................................... 480
Tire pressure ........................ 482
U
V
W
607
Alphabetical index
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
Warning messages.................. 489
Washer...................................... 202
Checking............................... 439
Preparing and checking
before winter....................... 263
Switch ................................... 202
Washing and waxing ............... 408
Weight....................................... 538
Wheels ...................................... 451
Replacing.............................. 451
Size....................................... 546
Window glasses....................... 143
Window lock switch ................ 143
Windows................................... 143
Power windows.....................143
Rear window
defogger ..................... 368, 376
Windshield wiper
de-icer....................................... 376
Windshield wipers ................... 202
Intermittent wiper .................. 202
Winter driving tips ................... 263
Wireless remote control.......... 103
Battery-Saving Function ....... 124
Locking/Unlocking......... 108, 118
Replacing the battery............ 455
WMA disc
* ............................... 290
*: For vehicles with an Entune Premium Audio or Entune Audio Plus,
refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
OWNER'S MANUAL”.
608
COROLLA_TMMMS_TMMC_U
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Auxiliary catch lever Trunk opener Fuel filler door
P. 425 P. 117 P. 204
Hood lock release
lever
Fuel filler
door opener
Tire inflation
pressure
P. 425 P. 204
P. 546
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference)
13.2 gal. (50 L, 10.9 Imp. gal.)
Fuel type P. 540, 548
Cold tire inflation
pressure
P. 5 4 6
Engine oil capacity
(Drain and refill —
reference)
P. 540
Engine oil type
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent
P. 540
